POSTAL

ACCOUNTS
MANUAL
VOLUME II
deals with the accounting procedures to be followed by the Postal

Accounts organisation of the Postal Department, in regard to agency

and other functions like Savings Bank, Government Securities, P.O.

Certificates, Money Orders, Indian Postal Orders, British Postal

Orders, Customs Duty etc.

 PREFACE

Since departmentalisation of Postal Accounts with effect from 1-4-76, the

need for bringing out a comprehensive manual to serve as a guide for ensuring
proper accounting of the agency functions undertaken by the P&T Department, in
the circle Postal Accounts Offices /Posta1 Accounts Wing of the P&T Directorate
has been keenly felt.

This in the first edition of the Postal Accounts Manual Vol. II which deals
with the accounting procedures to be followed by the Postal Accounts
organisation of the P&T Department, in regard to agency and other functions like
Savings Bank, Government Securities, P.O. Certificates, Money Orders, Indian
Postal Orders, British Postal Orders, Customs Duty etc. arranged in separate
chapters.

The detailed accounting procedures laid down in this Manual provide the
guidelines to the circle Postal Accounts Offices. They replace the relevant
procedures embodied in the Postal Accounts Manual Vol. II (Provisional Issue)
and the Technical Audit Manual published by the erstwhile A.G., P&T and
followed in the combined Audit and Accounts set up. Changes which have
occurred in the various procedures consequent on the departmentalisation of
accounts have .also been incorporated in· the manual.

Errors and omissions, if any, may be brought to the notice of the Director
General, Posts and Telegraphs (CMR CELL.). Any suggestion for amendment of
rules/procedures may be addressed to the CMR CELL with a copy to the Postal
Accounts Wing of this Directorate.

Dated, 21St October, '83 S. K. GHOSE,

NEW DELHI Secretary,
Ministry of Communications,
D.G.P&T &
Chairman, P&T Board.

i
 1
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES

CHAPTER I

GOVERNMENT SECURITIES

Introductory

1.1 To facilitate the investment of Savings Bank deposits in

Government Securities, the Indian Post Office, acting as Agent to the
Government of India, used to (undertake) prior to 1-3-65 the purchase, sale
and custody of Government Securities on behalf of Savings Bank
depositors. The facility of fresh purchase of Government securities through
P.O. Savings Bank accounts has, however, been withdrawn w.e.f. 1-3-65.
The facility of sale custody and credit of interest on securities already
purchased through Savings Bank Accounts before 1-3-65 continues. Such
transactions are regulated in accordance with the Indian Securities Act (X
of 1920) and subsidiary rules made there under by the President of India
both of which will be found in the Government Securities Manual. Rules
regarding such transactions, for the guidance of investors are published in
the Sub Section "Investments" in Section VI of the Indian Posts and
Telegraphs Guide. Detailed rules of procedure to be followed in Indian Post
Offices will be found in Chapter 8 of the Posts and Telegraphs Manual,
Vol. VI (Post Office).

NOTE-- The Indian Securities Act (X of 1920) does not recognise any
Trusteeship in Government Promissory Notes. These Notes are regarded as the
property of the person in whose name they stand issued or endorsed and these
endorsements are considered valid so long as the Notes have been dealt with under
the provisions of the Law and rules framed there under. As Government securities,
held in the custody of the Director General, Postal Services, stand in his own name,
he may use his own discretion on the merits of each case, apart from the provisions
of the Indian Securities Act or the rules issued there under in making endorsements
in favour of claimants.

1.2 The rules, governing the submission of accounts to the Postal

Accounts Offices in respect of transactions in respect of Government
 2
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
securities and the maintenance of initial, accounts from which the accounts
so rendered, are compiled, will be found in Posts and Telegraphs Manual
Vol. VI (Part II). The initial checking and the accounting work in
connection with Govt. securities is centralised in the office of the Director
of Accounts (Postal) Calcutta.

Director General Imprest--Purchase and Sale of securities through

The Reserve Bank of India

1.3 An imprest of Govt. Promissory notes of the values of Rs. 1 lac in

various Govt. of India loans is held by the Director General, Postal
Services. Owing to the abolition of facilities for fresh purchase of Govt.
Securities through the Savings Bank Accounts with effect from 1-3-1965
this imprest need not be replenished as and when the nominal value falls
short of Rs. One lac, as a result of maturity of loans in the imprest.
Transactions on account of sales should always be effected through Reserve
Bank of India.

In order to keep a watch over the state of the imprest the following
registers are maintained in the Govt. Security Section.

1.Register for controlling the Imprest [form D.G. (PA) 200].

2.Imprest Registers showing the balance of Securities [form D.G.

(PA)-201].

3.Imprest Register showing Profit and .loss [form D.G. (PA)-202].

1.4 Posting of transactions relating to maturity or sale of individual

loan or bond and the balance of imprest at the end of each month, which is
arrived at by deducting from the previous month's balance is shown thereon
is made in the register in form D.G. (PA)-200.

The register should be submitted to the Director of Accounts (Postal)

by the 10th of the following month.
 3
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
1.5 The Register in form DG (PA)-201 is maintained for the purpose
of working out the monthly balance of imprest. This is done by deduction
from the previous month's balance, the value of any loan or bond
discharged on maturity.

The monthly balance of imprest as worked out herein should be

verified with that shown in the Register in form D.G. (PA)-200 (for
controlling the imprest). The register should be submitted to the G.O. in-
charge of the section for monthly review.

1.6 Govt. Securities, held in the Imprest of the Director General,

Postal Services are, as and when necessary, sold through the Reserve Bank
of India.

1.7 When Govt. Securities are to be sold through the Reserve Bank of
India either out of imprest, or the depositors holdings in the Director
General's custody, the particulars of the securities are entered in the Issue
side of the Stock Day Book and the Day Book and a requisition in form
D.G. (PA) 203A is sent to the Reserve Bank along with the Govt.
Promissory Notes duly endorsed in its favour when Govt. securities
tendered for sale by a S. B. Depositor are to be sold through the bank, the
securities tendered after examination by the Public Debt Office will be sent
to the bank duly endorsed in its favour along with a requisition in form
D.G. (PA)-203(A). On receipt of the Banks intimation of sale, the debits
thereof are checked and appropriate note of sale is kept against the
respective entry in the Day Book. The particulars of sale are noted in the
Register of sale of Govt. Securities, through the bank in form D.G. (PA)-
212 and the entries in the Register are initialed by the Branch Officer on the
same day.

The entries are totaled monthly and the total amounts of sales thus
arrived at should be agreed with the monthly totals of the credit scrolls
received from the RBI, Calcutta and the credit adjusted on this account by
the C.A.S., R.B.I., Nagpur.
 4
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
NOTE.- Transactions on behalf of S. B, Depositors will be completed within
14 days from the date of receipt of the application or such further period beyond 14
days as may be specified by the investor on his application. If owing to the absence
of buyers in the market the bank is unable to effect the transactions within 14 days,
the period within which a transaction should be, completed will be specified on the
requisition sent to the Bank.

1.8 The sale proceeds of the Govt. Securities: realised from the
Reserve Bank of India either for reducing the imprest or on behalf of S. B.
depositors are adjusted in the accounts as follows: On receipt of intimation
of sale from the Reserve Bank of India, Calcutta by G.S. Section.

(i) In case of sale of Govt. Promissory Notes for the imprest.

Dr.

0021 Taxes on Income other than Corporation Tax deduct from

interest on Securities.

8661-Suspense Account

(2) Suspense Account (P&T)

(4) Remittance to Bank.

Cr.

8661-Suspense Account

(2) Suspense Account (P&T)

5.P&T Investments--Cost of Govt. Promissory Notes & Investments. I.

Post Office Savings Bank Investment Account.

(c) Interest on the imprest of, Govt. Promissory Notes.

(g) Cost of Govt. Promissory Notes in the imprest.

(Iii) In the case of sale of G. P. Notes for the S. B. depositors

 5
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
Dr.

8661-Suspense Account

(2) Suspense Account (P&T)

(4) Remittance to Bank.

Cr.

8661-Suspense Account

(2) Suspense Account (P&T)

5.P&T Investments--Cost of Govt. Promissory Notes and Investments

certificates held in imprest. I. Post Office Savings Bank Investment
Account.

(i) Net cost of Govt. Promissory Notes outside the imprest.

Purchase of Securities.- The facility of purchase of Govt. Securities

through P.O. Savings Bank Accounts has been withdrawn w.e.f. 1-3·1965
by the Government.

Safe custody and delivery of Securities:

1.9 On receipt of an application for the safe custody of securities, the

notes and the application should be examined with references to Rule 48(1)
of Savings Bank Rules in Section VI of the Post Office Guide. Any
irregularities noticed should be communicated to the Postmaster, if
necessary, in Form No. D.G. (P.A.) 218 and the application and the
securities returned to him for submission after completion. When
everything is in order, the securities should be entered in the Day Book
Form No. D.G. (PA) 209 and sent to the Public Debt Office with a
requisition (in duplicate) in Form No.' D.G. (P.A)-21O for renewal or
examination of the endorsement, re-enhancement at Calcutta Treasury (if
necessary) and drawing of arrear interest, if due, on those securities. On
receipt of the securities from the Public Debt Office, the application should
 6
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
be entered in the register maintained in Form No. D.G. (PA)-222. The date
of receipt back of the securities from the Public Debt Office with their
nominal value should be noted against the original entry in the Day Book.
The particulars of the securities should also be entered in the Intermediate
Day Book and then transferred to the stock Day Book. A receipt for the
securities should be made out in Form No. D.G. (PA)-214 and forwarded
under a covering letter (Form No. D.G.(P)-223) to the Postmaster for the
delivery to the depositor, together with an advice of interest, less income
tax at ,the prescribed rate for credit to his Savings Bank Account, if any
interest is due on the securities tendered for safe custody. If the depositor
has already some holdings in the same, kind of securities in the custody of.
the Director General, Postal Services, the nominal value of securities
tendered, for safe custody should be noted in the ledger card maintained for
him, otherwise a new account should be opened in the ledger card under the
date on which the application is received, complete in all respects from the
Postmaster and attested by the Branch Officer-in-Charge of the Section.
The register in Form No. D.G. (PA)-222 should be reviewed by the Branch
Officer on the 15th of each month.

NOTE l.-- Securities belonging to deceased depositors may be kept in

custody through the account of the person to wham they are to be delivered, if he
desires them to be so kept. Even if the securities are taken delivery of and
subsequently tendered by him for safe custody, they may be accepted.

NOTE 2.-- When Government Securities taken delivery of on behalf of a

minor depositor duly endorsed in his favour are subsequently -tendered for safe
custody by the Director General, Postal Services, on attainment of majority, no such
declaration is necessary if the account opened on his behalf through which
Government securities were purchased is operated upon by him alone under Rule
34-A of the Post Office Savings "Bank rules on his attaining majority and the ex-
minor intends to retain them in the custody of the Director General, Postal Services.
In such cases, an application from the ex-minor that he intends to keep the securities
in the custody of the Director General, Postal Services may be obtained along with
the original safe custody receipt which should be returned after necessary
correction.
 7
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
NOTE 3.-- Payment orders for the full half years interest less income tax
should be issued along with the safe custody receipt when the securities are
tendered for safe custody within a fortnight before the close of the half year of the
loan concerned.

NOTE 4.-- When the Director General's receipt for securities held in Safe-
Custody is reported to be lost, the depositor would report the matter to the
Postmaster concerned, who would after exercising the necessary checks and
certificates as prescribed in Rule 66 of the Director General's Special Post Office
Circular No. 36, dated 23-12-1966, forward the same -to the Director of Accounts
(postal), Calcutta (Government Security Section). The application on receipt should
be carefully examined to see that the case is genuine with reference to the notes in
the personal ledger card of the holder and that the securities are actually laying un-
disposed of. The guard file of acknowledgements for S. C. Receipt or, certificates
issued in lieu thereof should also be examined to see whether any certificates in the
case in question had already been issued previously. If the application is in order
and the securities stand un-discharged, a certificate in lieu of the lost S. C. Receipt
in form D.G. (PA) 216 containing the particulars of the original S.C. Receipt should
then be issued and sent to the Postmaster concerned for delivery to the applicant
together with a forwarding memo in Form No. D.G. (PA)-256 and an acknowledge-
ment in Form No. D.G. (PA)-2l7 for return of the acknowledgement with the
signature of the recipient the Postal Accounts Office, Calcutta, will watch the return
of this acknowledgement and when received back should keep the same after
necessary scrutiny in a guard file to be preserved permanently When, however, a
S.C. Receipt is lost before delivery to the party, a certificate in lieu thereof should
be issued after proper investigation into the case has been conducted by the
Divisional Superintendent of Post Offices concerned and a report clearly establishing
the loss received in the Accounts Office through the Head of the Circle.

Suitable notes about the loss of original receipt and the issue of the certificate
in lieu thereof should invariably he kept in the ledger card of the holder under the
initials of the Branch Officer concerned simultaneously with the signing of the
certificate and the Postmaster should be instructed to keep similar notes in the G. S.
Roll

NOTE 5.-- Delivery of Securities in the form of stock certificates is permitted

only in cases referred to in the above sub-para. In such cases Government
Promissory Notes of equivalent value should be taken out of stock and endorsed in
favour of the President and forwarded to the Public Debt O.ce with a requisition in
duplicate in Form No. D.G. (PA) 210 showing the following particulars-
 8
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
(1) The name of the depositor.

(2) Address of the depositor.

(3) Name of the Treasury or Sub-Treasury.

On receipt of the stock certificates from the Public Debt Office - their return
should be noted against the original entries in the Day Book and then charged off on
the issue side of the Stock Day Book of Government Promissory Notes. They should
then be entered on the receipt side of the Stock Day Book of Stock certificates and
charged off 0'1 the issue side thereof.

1.10 When an application is received from a depositor for, delivery of

a Government Security out of custody, it should be seen that the safe
custody receipt accompanies it. It should also be ascertained by reference to
the Government Security ledger card that the security is within the balance
of the depositor’s holdings. A security of the same nominal value and of the
same loan or bond as that held by the depositor should then be taken, out of
the Director General's stock. The security should be charged off on the
issue side of the Stock Day Book, necessary entry being made in the
register maintained in Form No. D.G. (PA)-224 and then entered in the
register of Government Securities received and disposed under the signature
of the Gazetted Officer-in-charge of the Section. The nominal value of the
security should be debited to the depositor's ledger card under the initials of
the Branch Officer and forwarded to the Postmaster with a covering letter
Form No. D.G. (PA)-225 and an acknowledgement in Form No. D.G. (PA)-
2l5 for delivery to the depositor. The acknowledgement when received back
should be placed before the Branch Officer and filed after he has initialed
the entries in the register of Government Securities received back within a
fortnight from the issue of the securities. The register in Form No. D.G.
(PA)-224 should be reviewed by the Branch Officer on the 10th of each
month.

NOTE 1-- Enfacement of Securities for payment of interest at a Treasury or

Sub-Treasury can be obtained through the Director General, Postal Services,
 9
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
provided the Treasury or sub-Treasury is situated in the States of West Bengal,
Orissa, Assam, Meghalaya, Nagaland, Manipur and Tripura including the treasuries
and sub-treasuries in the Union Territories of Mizoram and Arunachal Pradesh and
the Central Government Treasuries at Port Blair. In such cases the Securities on
being taken cut of stock should be entered in the Day Book Form D.G. (PA)-209
and sent to the Public Debt Office with a requisition in duplicate in Form D.G.
(PA)-210 for enhancement for payment of interest at Treasury or sub-treasury
specified by the depositor on his application. On receipt of the securities from the
Pubic Debt Office, their return should be noted against the original entries in the
Day Book and they should then be disposed of in the manner stated above.

NOTE 2.-- If the payment of interest is required as per Public Debt Office,
Calcutta, no enfacement is necessary.

NOTE 3.-- In the case of securities delivered out of custody within a

fortnight before the close of the half-year, the amount of full half year's interest less
income-tax should be advised to the Postmaster for debit to the depositor's Savings
Bank Account under intimation to the Accounts Office concerned.

Sale of Government Securities

1.11 All applications for sale received on a day will be collected and
examined to see that they are in order with reference to Rule 47 of the
Savings Bank Depositors' Rules in Section VI of the Post Office Guide. In
the case of a sale from safe custody it will also be seen that the safe custody
receipt accompanies the application and that the nominal value of the
securities to be sold is within the amount held for the depositor by
consulting his ledger card. Any - irregularity noticed should be intimated to
the Postmaster by means of objection memo. in Form No. D.G (PA)-219
and the documents returned to him for resubmission after completion. A
memo of cost in Form No. D.G. (PA)-208 will be attached to each
application found to be in order and the applications entered in the register
maintained in form D.G. (PA)-207. All applications for sale should
ordinarily be disposed of on the day following the date of their receipt in
the Section or on the next day.
 10
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
The sale of Securities held in the safe custody will be affected through
the Bank. The procedure laid down in Para 1.7 will be followed. On receipt
of the Memo of sale from the Bank, the details of the Sale proceeds as
actually shown in the Bank's Memo will be noted on the Memo in Form
D.G. (PA)-208, attached to the application. In every case the details of sale
proceeds will be noted in the register of applications referred to in para
1.11 above. The nominal value of Securities sold will be posted in red ink
in the ledger card of the depositor under the initials of the Branch Officer.

Inscribed Value of securities sold

1.12 An intimation of sale in Form No. D.G. (PA)-237 should be sent

to the Postmaster advising him of the sale proceeds and of any interest
accrued on the securities during the current half year up to the day
proceeding the date of sale less income tax, for credit to the depositor's
Saving Bank Account. At the same time, an extract of the intimation should
be sent, to the Postal Accounts Office concerned for necessary action. The
particulars of sale proceeds and interest less income tax should also be
intimated to the depositor through the Post master in form No. D.G. (PA)-
213. The safe custody receipt sent with the application for sale should be
properly punched perforating the word ‘cancelled’ by means of a punching
machine in the presence of the Branch Officer-in-Charge under his initials,
after which it should be filed separately in guard files. The relevant entry in
the ledger card should also be attested by the Gazetted Officer. If the
securities, sold form part of an investment held on behalf of a depositor, a
revised receipt in Form No. D.G. (PA)-214 for the balance still remaining
in the custody of the Director General, Postal Services, should be sent along
with the intimation of sale to the Postmaster for delivery to the depositor.
On receipt of the intimation from the Postmaster with a certificate of credit
to the depositor's Savings Bank Account, the date of receipt should be noted
in the column provided for the purpose in the register of applications which
should be reviewed by the Branch Officer once on the 15th and again on the
last day of every month.
 11
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
NOTE.-- In the Case of securities sold through the Bank within the fortnight
before the close of the half year the following procedure should be followed:-

If an interest Payment Order has been prepared but not issued it will be
cancelled. In the case where an IPO has already been issued the net amount of the
IPO will be deducted from the net amount of sale proceeds intimated by the Bank
and the balance only will be advised to the Postmaster for credit to the depositor's
S.B. account. The income tax deduction certificate already issued will be called for
and cancelled. Deduct entries under S. B. deposits and Income Tax will be made in
the IPO register with a remark that the Securities have been sold through the Bank.
A remark to the effect that this has been done and the net amount of the IPO will
also be noted on the memo. in Form No. D.G (PA)-208, attached to the application.
In the· intimation of sale sent to the Accounts Office concerned a remark will be
made to the effect that the net amount of sale proceeds as per Bank's memo. will be
posted as credit to the depositor's S. B. account and that the net amount of the IPO
will be posted as deduction credit under S. B. deposits as it represents write back of
net interest advised.

1.13 In the case of Security tendered for sale, the particulars of the
Security should be entered in the Day Book (Form No. D.G. (PA)-209 and
the script sent to the Public Debt Office for examination of endorsement
and reinfacement at the Calcutta Treasury and drawing of arrear interest if
due, or renewal with a requisition in Form No D.G. (PA)-210. If it is
returned under objection by the Public Debt Officer, the irregularities
should be removed in communication with the Postmasters Form No. D.G.
(PA)-218 and the security sent again to the Public Debt Office. When the
security is received back after examination or renewal, the securities are to
be sold through the Bank according to the procedure laid down in para 1.7.
The sale proceeds should be noted on the Memo. in Form No. D.G. (PA)-
208 attached to the application. An intimation of Sale in Form No. D.G.
(PA)-237 should be sent to the Post Master advising him the sale proceeds
together with accrued interest less income tax, for credit to the depositor's
account. Intimation should also be sent to the depositor through the Post-
master in Form D.G. (PA)-213. An extract of intimation should also be sent
at the same time to the Accounts Office concerned for necessary action.
 12
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
When Government Securities are sold by depositors, the amount is
credited to "Savings Bank Deposits" and "021 Taxes on Income Other than
Corporation Tax", "Government Security Tax"-or "Savings Bank Deposits"
only, by debit to Post Office Savings Bank Investment Account-Net Cost of
Government Promissory Notes outside the imprest.

Repayment of Securities on Maturity and Maintenance of Subsidiary

General Ledger Accounts

1.14 Government securities held in the custody of the Director

General, Postal Services, on behalf of Savings Bank Depositors are
repayable through the Post Office on maturity. A list showing names of
holders of safe custody acknowledgements, number of their Savings Bank
Accounts and the nominal value of securities, is prepared by the
Government Security Section of Calcutta Postal Accounts Office in
duplicate and sent to each Head Post Office, a fortnight before the date
of maturity. On receipt of the duplicate copy of the list, it should be seen
that all the items have been initialled by the Postmaster in token of his
having checked them. In the case or accounts transferred to other Post
Offices, Supplemental lists should be prepared in duplicate and sent to
the Postmasters concerned. As regards Safe Custody receipts which have
been discharged by the Post Office, a Schedule of Payments of
Securities supported by discharged safe custody receipts should be
forwarded by Postmasters to the Government Security Section, a copy
thereof being also sent to the Postal Accounts Office concerned along
with the cash account rendered by them. The entries in the schedule of
payments should be carefully checked and any irregularity noticed
therein should forthwith be reported to the Postmaster in Form No. D.G.
(PA) 220. Any discharge irregularly effected by the Post Office should
be entered in a register which should be reviewed by the Branch Officer
on the 25th of the following month. Further action in respect of each
irregularity detected should be noted in the register. The nominal value
of Securities discharged should be debited to the depositor's ledger card
 13
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
and the date of discharge noted in the duplicate copy of the list of
holder. The safe custody receipt should be properly punched perforating
the word “Cancelled” by means of a punching machine in the presence
of the GO-In-Charge under his initial. The relevant entry in ledger card
should also be attested by him and the receipt filed separately in guard
files.

A subsidiary General Ledger Account in respect of each matured loan

is maintained in the name of Director-General, Postal Services by the
Public Debt Office. On the maturity of a loan, the stock of Government
securities held by the Director General, Postal Services on behalf of the
depositors in that loan should be surrendered to the Public Debt Office for
cancellation and credit of the value to the subsidiary General Ledger
Account in respect of the expired loan.

Half yearly statements showing the balance outstanding at the end of

each half year in respect of each expired loan will be furnished to the
Director of Accounts (Postal) Calcutta by the Public Debt Office. These
balances should be verified in the manner indicated in Note I below Para.
1.16.

1.15 Discharged Safe Custody receipts should be checked with

reference to the following points:-

1) Every adult depositor should himself sign the discharge of

securities matured for re-payment. If discharge is affected by an agent
on behalf of any depositor on the strength of a general power of
attorney, the document should be carefully examined by the Postmaster
and the fact noted against the signature of the agent. The thumb
impression of an illiterate depositor should be attested by a witness who
is known to the Post Office but not himself a postal official, this fact
being certified by the Postmaster on the surrendered Safe Custody
receipt. The ex-minor’s signature on the safe custody acknowledgement
should also be attested in the manner mentioned above.
 14
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
2) In the case of a security deposit account, the Postmaster
should certify against the signature of the pledges on the Safe Custody
acknowledgement that the signatory is the pledgee.

3) In the case of securities held on behalf of a minor or a lunatic

or any depositor incapable of managing his own affairs :-

(i)When the value of Securities does not exceed Rs. 5.000--

(a) The father or the widowed mother should sign the discharge,
the relationship of the signatory being certified by the
Postmaster.

(b) When the holder of the Securities and his father or the
widowed mother ordinarily resides at a place other than
where the depositor's Savings Bank Account stands, the
acquaintance signed by the father or the widowed mother
should be accepted on the production of a certificate of
identity signed by any Magistrate. The certificate should be
attached to the Safe Custody acknowledgement surrendered
by the depositor.

(c) Discharge by a person other than the father or the widowed

mother should be accepted on production of a certificate
from the District Magistrate to the effect that the person is
the actual guardian of the holder of the securities. In the case
of minor depositors, an authority for payment from the Post-
master General is necessary. The certificate should always
accompany the discharged Safe Custody Receipts.

(ii) When the value of Securities exceeds Rs. 5,000--

(a) In the case of a minor depositor, payment should only be

made under the orders of the Postmaster General to the legal
guardian.
 15
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
(b) In the case of a lunatic or any person incapable of managing
his own affairs, payment should not be made unless and until
the applicant has produced evidence to the satisfaction of the
Director General, Postal Services, that he is the actual guar-
dian of such person. Such evidence should be attached to
Safe Custody acknowledgements forwarded to the
Government Security Section of the, office of the Director of
Accounts (Postal) Calcutta before payment.

4) The a quittance given by the applicant for discharge of

securities belonging to a deceased depositor should be accepted on
the authority of the Postmaster General recognising the applicant's
title to the Securities. The Postmaster-Genera1's authority should
be attached to discharged Safe Custody receipts.

1.16 Charges on account of payments of discharged values of

Government Securities appearing in the cash Accounts of Post Offices
should be taken by the Postal Accounts Office concerned to the head, "P&T
Remittance" and passed on to the Government Security Section of the
Calcutta Postal Accounts Office through Advice of Transfer Debits so as to
reach it by the 14th of the month following that to which the transactions
relate. These A.T.Ds. should show the particulars of the Securities disc
charged in respect of each Head Office supported by vouchers, if any,
received from the Post Offices. The Government Security Section after
reconciling these debits with the figures of discharge reported by the
Postmasters through their schedule of payments, will prepare a monthly
consolidated statements of debits and made the following adjustments :-

The total amount of debit as per these consolidated statements will be

taken to the head 8661-- Suspense Account (2) Suspense Account (P&T).
(2) Pay & Accounts Office Suspense (Outward) PAO Min. of Fin. (DEA)
by per contra credit to the head M-P&T Remittance.
 16
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
Any difference found at the time of reconciliation will be placed under
either of the suspense heads "Departmental Advances- Excess Debits on
account of discharge of loan" or Deposits- short debit on account of
discharge of loan” and cleared by correspondence with the Postal Accounts
Office or the Post Office, as the case may be. A reconciliation register
should be maintained for the purpose and submitted to the Branch, Officer
on the 25th of the following month.

The statement of discharges i.e. loan Schedule showing the particulars

of the loans to which the debit pertains, should also be furnished separately
to the Pay and Accounts Officer, Min. of Fin. (DEA). The actual amount of
Securities discharged and the debits thereof passed on to the Principal
Accounts Officer Ministry of Fin. (DEA), New Delhi through the
Settlement Account of the Director of Accounts, Postal, Calcutta should be
agreed monthly. The amount of Securities discharged during the period
should then be intimated to the Public Debt Office for debiting respective
subsidiary General Ledger Account.

NOTE 1.-- One page at the end of the Stock Day Book should be set apart for
showing the balance of undischarged securities held by the Director General, Postal
Services through the subsidiary General ledgers Accounts. When a stock certificate
of matured loan is sent to the Public Debt Office for cancellation, the amount should
be entered in the appropriate column and the amount of the securities discharged
should be deducted therefrom at the time of sending the quarterly intimation to the
Public Debt Office. The balance should be agreed with the corresponding amount of
outstanding securities shown in the half-yearly statement received from the Public
Debt Office.

NOTE 2.-- Discharged Stock Certificates (vide Paragraph 70 of the

Government Securities Manual) received with the monthly statement of discharge
securities should also be forwarded to the Public Debt Office for cancellation.

Maintenance of Security Holders' Accounts

1.17 Security holders' accounts are maintained in the loose ledger

sheets Form No. D.G. (PA)-248 which are kept in securely locked binders
grouped according to each loan and arranged serially according to numbers
 17
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
of Savings Bank Accounts in each Post Office under each Circle. Bound
ledgers are also maintained separately for Posts and Telegraphs employees
and contractors.

Entries in ledger accounts are made for the following transactions

under the attestation of the Branch Office-in-charge of the Section ;-

1.Tendered for Safe Custody.

2.Delivery out of custody.

3.Sale of Government Promissory Notes kept in Safe Custody.

4.Discharge of Securities.

1.18 Ledger accounts are opened and posted in accordance with the
following rules:-

(a) The name of the Post Office the number of the Savings Bank
Account and the particulars of the loan in which investment is made should
be properly written in the space provided for those purposes. Transaction
detailed in Para 1.17 should be noted in proper columns with indications of
case mark in the "Remarks" column and a balance struck after each
transaction under the initials of the Branch Officer-in-charge of the Section.

(b) The designation of Departmental employees and the nature of work

or contract in the case of contractors should be entered in their accounts
along with the official designation of the Officers through whom the
securities are received.

(c) In the case of securities purchased through security deposit

accounts the words "Security deposit" and the designation of the Officer to
whom the Securities are pledged should be noted in red ink in the ledger
cards.

(d) When a certificate of exemption from or abatement of income tax

is produced by a depositor, a note thereof should be kept on the respective
ledger cards and the entries duly attested by the J.A.O.
 18
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
1.19 A transfer register should be maintained in Form No. D.G. (PA)-
249 separately for each Postal Circle and in respect of each loan or Bond.
Transfers of security holders' accounts from one Post Office to another
intimated through supplemental payment orders intimations from Post
Offices sale or deliver applications from Investors should be noted in the
register after carrying out necessary corrections in the names of Post
Offices and numbers of Savings Bank Accounts in tile ledger cards. Cases
of Corrections in the numbers of Savings Bank Accounts due to attainment
of majority by minor depositors and transfer of securities from Savings
Bank Accounts of deceased depositors to those of recognised claimants
should also be noted in the register and necessary corrections made also in
ledger cards. Transfers of Security holders' accounts affecting Post Offices
in two different postal circles should be noted in the register of the
transferring circle. The shifting of cards to proper binders for the disposal
of items noted in all the transfer register should be undertaken without any
avoidable delay in the presence of a J.A.O. who should initial the item in
the transfer register as soon as the particular card or cards are removed and
put in proper binders. The transfer registers should be submitted to the
Branch Officer for review on the 15th of every month.

NOTE 1.-- Ledger cards relating to Saving Bank Accounts of depositors who
are reported to have died should be removed to separate binders maintained for the
purpose.

NOTE 2.-- When the Government Security holdings of individual Savings

Bank depositor are completely sold or delivered and there have been no
transactions on their behalf during subsequent three years, the respective cards
should be removed from the loose leaf ledger and filed, in a separate binders of
closed cards arranged according to Circles and loans.

Check over the annual limit of investment in Government Securities

purchased through the Post Office

1.20 The check over the annual limit of investment prescribed in rule
46 of S.B. Rules in Section VI of the P.O. Guide of a S.B. depositor in
 19
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
securities kept in custody of the D.G.P.T. was exercised prior to 1-3-1965
through a running account maintained for the purpose in form No.
D.G.P.T.-252 in respect of each individual depositor. The facility of
purchase of Government Security having however been ceased w.e.f. 1-3-
1965 maintenance of this running account have lost most of their utility.
Despite this fact, the cards in the cabinet in custody of J.A.O. may still be
maintained until the loans cases are entirely settled/ finalised. Since the
holdings of the depositors in various loans are recorded in these cards, they
may be utilised as auxiliary records in addition to the usual loose-leaf
ledgers.

1.21 Requisition Slip in Form D.G. (PA)-255 in respect of

applications for sale of Securities delivered out of custody and repayment
of maturity received on behalf of individual investors should also be
prepared and used for taking out the cards of respective depositors. Before
the applications are finally disposed of the transactions should be posted in
the respective cards and the balance of holdings struck therein under the
initials of the J.A.O. The cards should then be replaced in the cabinets and
the requisition slips removed therefrom.

1.22 When the Savings Bank Account of a depositor having some

holdings in Securities in the custody of the Director General Postal
Services is transferred from one Office to another, the total amount of such
holdings should promptly be ascertained by reference to the relative card
maintained for the purpose of exercising the check over the annual limit
(vide Para. 1.20). Necessary corrections of the number of account and of
the name of the Post Office to which transferred should be carried out in
the card on the authority of the intimation received from the Post Office.
The card should immediately be placed in proper place in the cabinet of the
Post Office to which the account has been transferred.

Security deposits

1.23 Security deposits of Posts and Telegraphs employees and

 20
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
contractors when· they take the form of Government Securities received in
trust by an Administrative Officers of the Department, in accordance with
the rules in Chapter 14 of the Posts and Telegraphs Financial Hand Book,
Volume I should be dealt with by the Director General as far as possible,
according to the rules laid down in Chapter VIII of the Government
Securities Manual.

NOTE 1.-- One copy of the covering letter received with the Government
Securities tendered for safe custody should be returned duly signed by the Group 'A' or
'B' Officer in charge of the Section to the Officer tendering the (securities).

NOTE 2.-- Port Trust, Municipal and City Improvement Trust Debentures and
Securities issued by State Government deposited as security, are held in trust by the
Director General.

Calculation and Payment of Interest on Securities

1.24 Interest on Government Securities falls due half yearly, on the

following dates:-

Names of Govt. of India existing loans and bonds

Particu1ars of Govt. Securities Date of half yearly interest

5.5% compensation Bond 1999 - - 18th January and 18th July.
4.5% Loan 1985 - - - 11th January and 11th July.
5 % Loan1982 - - - 14th January and 14th July
5.5% Loan 1991 - - - Do.
4% Loan 1981 - - - 23rd January and 23rd July.
3% Conversion Loan 1946 - - 15th March and 15th Sept.
4.75% Loan 1989 - - - 14th April and 14th Oct.
5.5% Loan 2000 - - - 10th April & 10th Oct.
5.5% Loan 1999 - - - 29th April & 29th Oct.
4.5% Loan 1986 - - - 7th May & 7th Nov.
5.5% Loan 1995 - - - 10th May & 10th Nov.
3% Loan 1896-97 - - - 20th June and 20th Dec.
5.5% Loan 1990 - - - 30th June and 31st Dec.
5.75% Loan 2003 - - - 11th May & 11th Nov.
5.75% Loan 2002 - - - 14th January & 14th July.
 21
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
State- Loans
5.75P.C.W.B. Loan, 1982 - - 14th Jan. and 14th July.
6 P.C. Maharashtra S.D. Loans 1985 - 28th Feb. and 31st Aug.
6.5%P.C. Loan 2000 - - - 30th July and 31st Dec.

1.25 One week before the half yearly interest on each loan or bond
falls due, inconverted Notes from the Stock are, forwarded to the Public
Debt Office for drawing interest in Form No. D.G. (PA) 210-A with
forwarding letter in Form No, D.G, (PA)-210 and Government Promissory
Notes are received back along with interest warrants. Stock Certificates are
not required to be so presented but interest warrants in respect of different
classes of securities held in the form of stock certificates are duly received
from the Public Debt Office on due dates. An intimation of the amount of
interest due on different classes of securities converted into stock
certificates is duly received from the Public Debt Office. On receipt of the
interest warrants from the Public Debt Office, the gross amount should be
checked and the warrants sent to the Public Accounts Department of the
Reserve Bank of India under cover of a memo in Form No. D.G. (PA)-258
for realisation and credit of the amount in the India portion of the Bank's
account under the head Account between concerned Pay and Accounts
Office and Director of Accounts (Postal), Calcutta.

The interest warrant received from the Public Debt Office include
interest on four accounts, namely:--

1.Government Security held on behalf of Saving Bank depositors.

2.Security deposits of Postal employees and contractors.

3.Security deposits of Telecom employees and contractors.

4.Director General's imprest of Government Securities.

As regards interest on stock certificates, a separate page should be set

apart for each half year at the end of the stock Day Book. In the first
column should be entered the description of the loan, in the second column
the due date on which interest accrues during the half year and in the third
 22
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
column the amount outstanding on the due date. The date of dispatch of the
interest warrants should be entered in the column for that particular loan
and the entry attested by the Group ‘A’ or ‘B’ Officer in charge of the
Section.

NOTE.-- To ensure that all interest warrants in respect of Government Promissory

Notes are sent to the Bank, the amount of interest noted in the Bank's credit slip Form
D.G. (PA) 209 which should be initiated by the Group A or B Officer.

1.25A. Before the half yearly interest on any loan or bond falls due,
the gross interest on the holding of each depositor in that loan or bond,
income tax and net interest should be calculated and posted in the proper
columns of the ledger card Form No. [D.G. (PA)-248] with particulars of
the half year and the number of the interest payment order noted against
the item. Interest on all transactions (sale, safe custody and delivery)
effected within a fortnight before the close of the half year is adjusted at
the time of disposal of these applications. Such transactions should not
therefore be taken into account for the purpose of calculation of half yearly
interest.

Interest payment order should be prepared in Form No. D.G. (PA)-

228(b) from the ledger cards in Quadruplicate of which two copies, one for
the S.B. Control Organisation of the respective P.O. and the other for P.O.
records, along with a form of certificate of credit in Form No. D.G. (PA)-
228(a) and certificates of deduction of income tax in Form D.G. (PA)-263
should be sent to each Postmaster under cover of a forwarding letter in
Form No. D.G. (PA)-228 for credit of the net amount of interest noted
therein to the depositors Account. Of the remaining two copies, one should
be sent to the Postal Accounts. Office concerned with a forwarding memo
in Form No. D.G. (PA)-231 while the other is retained as Office copy.
These payment orders should be despatched to Postmasters five days prior
to the close of the half year to which they appertain. A manuscript register
is maintained to effect a reconciliation of the total nominal value in each
loan or bond for every half year on which interest has been advised with
 23
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
the amount held in stock excluding holdings of deceased depositors in
respect of the said lean or bond. This register should be submitted for the
Accounts Officer’s review 10 days after the issue of Interest Payment
Orders.

NOTE 1.-- In the case of an Income-Tax free loan the amount of interest to be
intimated should be calculated without deduction of Income Tax.

NOTE 2.-- In case an intimation of death of a depositor is received from the Post
Office, the fact should be noted in the depositor's ledger card and the running account
and the advice of the half year's interest should not be issued. The accumulated interest
should be passed for payment in cash after receipt of the application from the recognised
claimant regarding the disposal of securities and the Postmaster General’s orders.

1.26 On receipt of interest payment Orders so sent in duplicate the

Postmaster will deliver one copy of the same to his S.B. Control
Organisation. In the case of an account transferred to a Post Office in a
different circle or in the same circle the Postmaster will note the particulars
in the space provided below the certificate in Farm NO. D.G. (PA)-228(a)
and return the certificate to the Director of Accounts (Postal), Calcutta. A
supplemental payment Order in Farm No. D.G. (PA)-229 should be advised
by the Director of Accounts (Postal) Calcutta (Govt. Security Section) to
the Past Office where the Savings Bank-Account has been transferred with
an additional copy thereof for the Savings Bank Control Organisation of
that Past Office. A copy of the supplemental payment Order should also be
sent to the Accounts Office concerned when amounts of interest on
Government Securities advised therein are finally credited by a Post Office
in different circle or in the same Circle.

1.27 When a Mohamedan depositor refuses to take interest on

Government Securities, a proper note should be kept in the ledger card and
the interest as it falls due should be credited to the head “1201 Postal
Receipts, 7-other receipts, 2-PostaI Receipts-Other items". If, however,
interest is claimed afterwards, it will be allowed with effect from the month
succeeding that in which the application is received.
 24
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
1.28 The balance on which interest is payable in respect of
Government Securities held an behalf of a Savings Bank Depositor, should
be checked with the depositor's ledger account before interest is advised to
the Postmaster for credit to the depositor’s Savings Bank Account. The
J.A.O. should before issue of the interest payment orders, test-check a few
items in the ledger accounts.

1.29 The interest payment orders should be entered in a register

maintained in Form No. D.G. (PA)-232 and despatched with the
distinguishing number assigned to each Post Office in a Circle. Before
despatch of interest payment orders an agreement should be effected
between the closing balance of the Government Securities on which interest
for the period in question is advised and that of the preceding half year by
taking into account all transactions occurring thereafter. An agreement
should also be effected between the total holdings of depositors and the
balance shown in the Stock Day Book. The dispatch register should be
reviewed by the J.A.O. seven days after the close of the half year to which
the interest payment Orders appertain and the Branch Officer in July and
January each year. On receipt back, the certificates of credit should be
examined to see if the Postmaster have certified that necessary postings
have been made in the depositor's accounts. When such postings could not
be made on account of transfer of accounts to other Post Offices, whether
within or outside the Postal Circle, it should be seen that necessary
intimations have been furnished to Post Office where the accounts have
been transferred. In the case of accounts transferred to other Post Offices
whether within or outside the Postal Circle, supplemental Interest Payment
Orders should be prepared in quadruplicate in Form No. D.G. (PA)-229 and
despatched in the usual way within three days from the date on which the
certificates are received back. In case the certificates of posting interest are
not received back within a fortnight from the date of despatch from the
Postmasters, a reminder should be issued in Form No. D.G. (PA)-230.
When intimations regarding credit of interest to depositors Savings Bank
 25
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
Accounts have not been received from the Post Office where those
accounts have been transferred, a reminder should be issued in Form No.
D.G. (PA)-230(a) after a fortnight from the dates of issue of those
intimations.

1.30 Trust Interest payment orders relating to Postal and - Telecom

employees and contractors will be made out in Form Nos. D.G. (PA)-234
and 235 particulars being taken from a register maintained in Form No.
D.G. (PA)-227 and communicated to Heads of Circles and other officers to
whom the Securities are pledged, for payment for the amounts to the parties
concerned, five days before the close of the half year to which the order
relate, so that payment may be made on the date on which interest becomes
due. The checks prescribed should also be exercised before issue of these
payment orders. These registers along with the Despatch Register of
Interest Payment Orders should be reviewed by the J.A.O. at the time of
issue of payment orders. Such payments, appearing in the cash accounts
should be taken by the Accounts Office to the head “Trust Interest
Account.” A list of these payments should be furnished by each Accounts
Office to the Government Security Section in Form D.G. (PA)-236.

A broadsheet showing the out standings under the head “Trust Interest
Account” should be maintained in manuscript by the Government Security
Section and reviewed by the Accounts Officer at the end of the third month
following.

NOTE.-- Income tax on interest due on the Security investment of Government

servants and contractors is calculated at the maximum rate. Commission is also charged
in the case of Securities, deposited by the contractors which were not purchased through
the Post Office. A Certificate of deduction of Income Tax in Form D.G. (PA)-263 is
furnished along with the interest Payment orders.

1.31 The amount of interest (gross) on Government Securities drawn

from the Public Debt Office should be adjusted by means, of the following
transfer entry.
 26
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
Dr.

8661-- Suspense Accounts 2. Suspense Account (P&T) 6. Other

transactions.-(13) Cash Settlement Suspense Accounts (VI) Account with
Accountant General, West Bengal.

To

8661-- Suspense Accounts

5. P&T Investments-Cost of Govt. promissory Notes Investment

certificates held in imprest.

1. Post Office savings Bank Investment Account.

(c) Interest on the imprest of Government Promissory Notes.

(d) Interest on Govt. promissory Notes due to living Savings Bank

Depositors.

(e) Interest on Government Securities held in the Savings Bank

Account of the deceased depositors.

(Commission deducted from the interest on Government Promissory

Notes).

The amount of interest payable to Savings Bank Depositors and

Departmental employees and contractors for their security deposits (vide
para 1.30) is credited to the Head (a) 02l--Taxes on Income other than
Corporation Tax, Government Security “Tax and (b) Savings Bank
Deposits” or “Trust Interest Account” Or “Exchange Account between
India and Burma Accounts between the Director of Accounts Postal
Calcutta and the Comptroller of Postal and Telegraphs Accounts-Burma
Items adjustable by Burma Miscellaneous” of Posts and Telegraphs
Remittance, Nagpur Postal Accounts Office”, according as the payment
relates to “Savings Bank Depositors in India” or “Departmental employees
and contractors” or “Depositors in Burma” or “Depositors in Aden”, by
debit to the head. 5. P&T Investments--cost of Govt. promissory Notes and
Investments. I. Post Offices Savings Bank Investment Account. (d) Interest
 27
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
on Govt. promissory Notes due to living Savings Bank Depositors.

Payment of Sale Proceeds or Discharge Values of Securities and

Interest Accrued thereon after the Death of a Depositor.

1.32 Interest on Government securities falling due on or after the date

of death of a depositor or their sale proceeds or discharge values should not
be credited to the Savings Bank Account of the deceased depositor. The
total amount should be advised to the Postmaster in Form Nos. D.G. (PA)-
260(a), 260(b) as the case may be for payment in cash to his legal heir as
determined by the Postmaster General through the Post Office where the
Savings Bank Account of the deceased stands open.

Sanctions received for the disposal of securities held by a deceased

depositor should forthwith be noted in the register maintained in manuscript
as well as in the personal ledger card, of the deceased so that no further
interest may be advised for credit to the Savings Bank Account of the
deceased depositor. The register should be submitted to the Accounts
Officer for his review on the first working day of the following month.

NOTE.-- In the case of death of a holder of Government Securities in the safe

custody of the Director General, Postal Services, in the shape of security deposit (but not
through any Savings Bank Deposit Account) where the conditions laid down in Clause
(2) of rule 30 of the Indian Securities Rules 1935 are not fulfilled the Manager, Reserve
Bank of India will determine the claims of the heirs of deceased holders in accordance
with the provisions of Section 19 of the Indian Securities Act (X of 1920) and clause 1 of
rule 38 ibid, as the powers of the (defunct) Controller of the currency are not exercised
by him.

1.33 When an intimation of death of any security holder is received,

the date of death and other particulars should be noted in a manuscript
register and the relevant card or cards should be shifted to the deceased
depositor's Binders (vide Note I below Para 1.19) and each entry in the
register should be attested by the J.A.O. It should then be examined to see
whether any interest has been advised for credit to his Savings Bank
Account after the date of his death. If such credit has been advised, the
 28
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
Postmaster of the Office where the Savings Bank Account of the deceased
stands open, should at once be addressed in Form No. D.G. (PA)-289 to
cancel all such amounts of Interest on Government Securities from the
Savings Bank Account of the deceased depositor and a copy of the letter
sent to the Accounts Office concerned along with a statement showing the
amount of interest written back in the accounts of the Circle concerned.
Necessary re-adjustments in accounts should promptly be made by crediting
“Post Office Savings Bank Investment Account-Interest on Govt. Securities
held in the Savings Bank Accounts of deceased depositors” and debiting
“Savings Bank Deposits (deduction from credit) and 021--Taxes on Income
other than Corporation Tax-Government Security Tax (deduction from
credit).”

When the amount of interest held over and written back is advised to
the Postmasters for payments in cash to the claimants of the deceased
depositors such amount is forthwith adjusted by the Government Security
Section by debit to the head “Post Office Savings Bank Investment
Account-Interest On Government securities held in the Savings Bank
Accounts of deceased depositors” and credit to the head “Post Office
Savings Bank Investment Account-Proceeds of Government Securities sold
on behalf of claimants to deceased depositors” accounts and “021-taxes on
Income other than Corporation Tax-Government Security Tax."

If the sale proceeds of Securities of a holder have been credited to his

account after his death, the Postmaster should at once be addressed to
cancel the credit from the Savings Bank account of the deceased depositor
and a copy of the letter sent to the Account Office concerned. Necessary
readjustment in amounts should be effected by crediting “Post Office
Savings Bank Investment Account-Proceeds of Government Securities sold
on behalf of claimants to deceased depositor's Accounts and debiting
Savings Bank Deposits (deduction from credit)".

The proceeds of Securities of a deceased holder sold on the authority

of the Postmaster General should when advised to Postmaster for payment
 29
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
in cash, be credited to “Post Office Savings Bank Investment Account-
Proceeds Of Government Securities sold on behalf of claimants to deceased
depositors account” and “0021--Taxes on Income other than Corporation
Tax-Government Security Tax” and debited to the head “Post Office
Savings Bank Investment Account cost of Government Promissory Notes in
the Imprest” and “Interest on the imprest of Government Promissory
Notes”. The proceeds of Securities of a holder, who dies before the issue of
sale intimation to the Postmaster, should not be advised for credit to the
Savings Bank Account of the deceased but should be adjusted as above.

A register should be maintained in manuscript in which all

transactions of write-back of interest on Government Securities and cash
payments should be noted to watch payment and correct adjustment. Each
entry in the register should be attested by the J.A.O. in charge.

1.34 Cash payments on account of sale-proceeds of Government

Securities and interest accruing thereon after the death of a depositor
appearing in the schedule of unclassified payments in the Post Office
accounts should be classified by the Postal Account Office concerned under
the head “Savings Bank Investment Account-Proceeds of Government
Securities sold on behalf of claimants to deceased depositor's accounts”.

A statement in Form No. D.G. (PA)-261 showing the details of cash

payments mentioned in Para. 1.32 and 1.33 should be prepared in the
Postal Account Section of each Postal Account Office from schedules of
unclassified payments and consolidated statement for each postal Circle
forwarded to the Government Security Section by the 25th of the month
following that to which the transactions relate. The number and date of the
pay orders and the detailed head under which' the amount have been
adjusted should invariably be quoted against each item.

Receipt and Disposal of Securities

1.35 All Government Securities received should be carefully examined

and entered in a register of securities received and disposed of in Form No.
 30
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
D.G. (PA)-242 under the attestation of the Accounts Officer in Charge of
the Section. These securities should be sent to the Public Debt Office for
examination of endorsement or renewal as the case may be, duly entered in
the Day Book maintained in Form No. D.G. (PA)-209 along with s memo in
duplicate in Form No. D.G. (PA)-210. Suitable notes should be recorded
against the numbers of those securities in the register referred to above.
One copy of the memorandum is retained by the Public Debt office while
the other will be returned the same day, duly endorsed in acknowledgement
of the securities. This register is reviewed by the Accounts Officer on the
15th of each month.

1.36 The acknowledgements should be presented at the Public Debt

Office on the due dates noted below:-

(a) Issue of warrant for interest only. After 7 working days.

(b) Renewal, sub-division or consolidation of notes After 9 working days.

(c) Enfacement of a Note, Inland or London. After 3 working days.

(d) Registration of a document After 1 working day.

1.37 On receipt back of the securities after examination or renewal,

their return should first be noted against the original entries in the Day
Book (Form No. D.G. (PA)-209). The securities should then be brought on
to the Stock Day Book (vide para l.40) through the Intermediate Day Book
(vide para 1.39) under the initials of the Accounts Officer. Securities
received back with objection memoranda should be returned to the Officers
concerned for compliance with the requirements of the Public Debt Office.

NOTE l.-- Securities tendered for re-enfacement will not be brought on to the
Intermediate Day Book. They should be returned to the Postmaster direct, after re-
enfacement.

NOTE 2.-- When Government securities are returned by Postmasters as

undeliverable, they will be entered in the stock Book of undelivered securities
maintained in Form D.G. (PA)-262. The undelivered Stock is verified by the Accounts
Officer on the first working day of each month. They will remain in the name of the
holders until they are requisitioned, for by them. The acknowledgement of these
 31
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
securities when delivered to depositors is duly noted in the register (Form No. D.G.
(PA)-242) which is reviewed by the Accounts Officer on the 15th of every month.

1.38 When Securities are deposited by Departmental employees and

contractors for 12 months or less, or when they are deposited for more than
12 months but the depositor does not desire to draw interest thereon during
the period, they should remain in the name of the depositor and be entered
on the intermediate Day Book and transferred to Stock Day Book (Form
No. D.G. (PA)-244] on a separate page maintained for the purpose, vide
Para. 1.39 and 1.40. The words "No interest" should be entered prominently
at the top of the ledger card of the depositor.

Intermediate Day Book

1.39 In the Intermediate Day Book [Form No. D.G. (PA)-243] are
entered all securities (Government Promissory Notes or Stock Certificates)
received from the Reserve Bank of India as well as those received from
Heads of Circles and other departmental officers for sale or safe custody. In
the latter case the Securities are entered in the Intermediate Day Book only
after examination of the endorsement or renewal. The securities are then
transferred to the Stock Day Book [Form No. D.G. (PA)-244].

Stock Day Book

1.40 All Government Securities (GP Notes and Stock Certificates)

entered in the Intermediate Day Book (vide para 1.39) are transferred to the
Stock Day Book which is maintained in Form No. D.G. (PA)-244
separately for Government promissory Notes and Stock Certificates.
Entries relating to Securities, mentioned in Para 1.38 i.e. Departmental
employees and contractors should be made in the receipt side in a separate
page of Stock Day Book and when they are returned or sold they should be
charged off on the issue side. Each entry in the Stock Day Book, both on
the receipt and issue sides, is attested by the Accounts Officer. The Stock
Day Book is balanced monthly. The closing balances as well as the balance
under each loan in the Stock Day Book are verified by the Accounts
 32
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
Officer-in-charge of the section on the first working day of each month by
actual enumeration of Government Securities in the custody of the Director
General, Postal Services.

1.41 In the Stock Day Book separate columns are provided for
different loans. It shows on the receipt side the amount of Securities held
by the Director General and on the issue side are entered, in detail the
amount of all securities returned, sold or converted. When Government
Promissory Notes of higher denominations or Stock Certificates as the case
may be, are sent to the Public Debt Office for sub division into Government
Promissory Notes of smaller denominations, they are not entered on the
issue side of the Stock Day Book, but are shown in the Day Book Only.

When there is an accumulation of Government Promissory Notes in

the Director General's Stock, they are sent in convenient batches to the
Public Debt Office to be converted into Stock Certificates. Government
Promissory Notes of each loan are converted into Stock Certificates of the
same loan. They are sent to the Public Debt Office with a forwarding letter
in form No. D.G. (PA)-210 duly entered in the Day Book [Form No. D.G.
(PA)-209].

NOTE.- The Notes sent to the Public Debt Office for conversion into Stock
certificates must bear the following endorsement:--

“PAY TO THE PRESIDENT OF INDIA.”

1.42 A separate register (known as Denomination Register) showing

the number of Government Promissory Notes of each denomination of each
kind of loan or bond held in Stock after each day's transactions should be
maintained in Form No. D.G. (PA)-247. The balances in this register at the
end of each month under each loan or bond should be verified with the
balances exhibited in the Stock Day Book.

1.43 On the 1st April and 1st October each year, an officer belonging
to the Outside Audit Department of the Office of the Accountant General,
West Bengal, verified the balance of Government Promissory Notes and
 33
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
stock certificates held by the Director General, Postal Services and
furnishes a certificate of verification along with an abstract of the verified
stock.

Monthly Reconciliation of sale and interest on securities

1.44 When all intimations of sale of securities and interest payment

orders for one complete month are issued the total amount on account of
sale of securities as also of interest for each Postal Circle is separately
worked out from manuscript registers maintained in the Government
Security Section and forwarded to Postal Accounts Offices concerned
embodied in statements [in Form No. D.G. (PA)-238] not later than the 3rd
day of the second month following that to which the figures relate, in order
to reconcile these figures with the total of the amounts advised through
several intimations of sale and interest payment orders. Any discrepancy
detected by the Account Offices in the course of this reconciliation should
be communicated to the Government Security Section of the office of the
Director of Accounts (Postal) Calcutta, for re-adjustments, if necessary
along with the details of each intimation of purchase sale and interest
payment order by summation of which the total figures for the month are
arrived at in the Postal Account Offices,.

1.45 A register in Form No. D.G. (PA)-241 should be maintained in

the Govt. Security Section for the purpose of effecting a monthly
reconciliation of sale. This register should be submitted to the Accounts
Officer for review at the end of the each month.

Half Yearly Verification of Balances in Depositors' Accounts

1.46 The total holdings in different loans and bonds of each depositor
on the 30th September and 31st March each year should be compiled in
Form No. D.G. (PA)-251 from ledger cards separately for each Postal
Circle. The total holdings in each loan and bond thus arrived at should be
 34
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
verified with the Stock Day Book, vide para 1.40.

1.47 The J.A.O. in Charge of the Govt. Security Section is personally

responsible for seeing that this verification is regularly made and that the
ledger abstracts are submitted to the Accounts Officer on due dates,
namely, 1st February and 1st August, each year.

Annual Adjustment of Gain or Loss

1.48 The cost of balance of Govt. Promissory Notes in the Imprest in

each loan on the 31st March of each year should be calculated at the last
available market rate of the financial year or at the average cost whichever
is less.

If the total cost so arrived at for all the loan taken together is more
than the net Detail Book balance under the head “Savings Bank Investment
Account-Cost of Govt. Promissory Notes in the Imprest” the excess
represents profit, and if less, loss. The profit or loss so worked out should
be passed on to the Central Revenues Accounting authority by debit or
credit to the head mentioned above.

In order to work out the average cost of Govt. Promissory Notes

referred in the preceding paragraph a register in Form D.G. (PA)-202
should be maintained in which columns 1 to 18 should be filled in monthly
and progressive totals worked out. Whenever any estimate of profit or loss
is required to be calculated for information of the Central Revenue
Accounting authority or when profit or loss is required to be passed on to
him at the end of the year calculation required in the matter is to be made
on a page of the register, set apart for the purpose.

The net Details Book balance at the close of the year under the head
“Interest on the Imprest of Government Promissory Notes” represents the
interest earned by the Imprest during the course of the year and should be
passed on to the credit of the Central Revenues accounting authority in the
March Final Accounts.
 35
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
NOTE.- The Reserve Bank of India furnished the Director of Accounts, Postal,
Calcutta daily with a statement showing mean rates for securities of different loan and
bonds.

Statistical Returns and Publications of Accounts

1.49 A general account of transactions relating to Government

Securities on behalf of Savings Bank depositors only is required by the
Director General Postal Services for incorporation in the Annual Report on
the operation of the Post Office Savings Bank. This account should be
compiled in Form No. D.G. (PA)-253 maintained in manuscript and
despatched to the Director General of Postal Services on 20th September.

1.50 A monthly statement showing details of approximate figures of

sale of Government Securities with interest thereon effected on behalf of
Savings Bank depositors and the approximate figures in connection with
G.S. transactions effected through the intervention of the Reserve Bank of
India is rendered to the Director General Postal Services (P.A. Wing) on the
16th of the month following that to which the transactions relate.

1.51 A monthly abstract of transfer entries effected by the Government

Security Section is compiled in Form D.G. (PA)-519 and forwarded to the
Postal Account Offices concerned for inclusion in their accounts on the 18th
of the month following that to which those entries relate. A “nil” abstract
should invariably be sent to an Account Office if in any particular month
there is no account adjustment affecting any Postal Circle under the
jurisdiction of that postal Accounts Office.

1.52 A monthly statement in manuscript showing the total amounts of

debits passed on to the Pay and Accounts Office Min. of Fin (DEA) through
the relevant Account of the Director of Accounts (Postal) Calcutta in respect
of the discharge of the Government Securities held in the Custody of the
D.G.P.S. on behalf of Savings Bank Depositors should be sent to Pay and
Accounts Office Min. of Finance (DEA) by the first week of the second
month following.
 36
Chapter 1 GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
1.53 A statement (English & Hindi version) showing particulars of
Government Securities held by the Director General Postal Services on
behalf of departmental employees and contractors should be compiled in
Form 20 of the Government Security Manual and despatched to the Publisher
Gazette of India Old Press Building Civil Line, Delhi on or before the 5th
Feb. every year for publication in the Gazette of India (Part II).
NOTE.-- The name of postal Office Saving Bank depositors should not be published
in the account but the total amount held on their behalf should be exhibited in one entry “
saving Bank depositors”.
 - 37 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

CHAPTER II
POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

General Principles

2.1 To facilitate the investment of small amounts, the

Government of India have instituted a series of National savings
Certificates of Rs.5, 10, 15, 100, 500, 1000, 5000 and 10,000 which the
sums of certificates of denomination Rs. 5, 10, 15 are not in sale, can be
purchased at all post office doing Saving Bank business up to the limits
fixed by the Government of India. The certificates are redeemable on
presentation in accordance with the rules in the Post Office guide.

NOTE.-- Prior to the introduction of the KVP with effect from 1.4.88 6 year NSC
VIIIth issue with effect from 5.5.88 the P.O. Certificates detailed below were being
issued. Their sale was discontinued from the dates noted against each. They were
however, allowed to be retained at the option of the bolder, for a further period as
indicate against the series concerned with interest even after the date of their maturity:-

1. 5 Year Cash Certificates 14-6-47

2. 10 Year D.S.C. - 30-09-43

3. 12 Year N.S.C. - 31-05-57 Maturity period extended by 5 Years.

4. 7 Years N.S.C. - 31-05-57 Do.

5. 5 Year N.S.C. - 30-06-53 Maturity period extended by 7 Years

and again by 5 Years.

6. 10 Years N.P.C. - 31-05-57 Maturity period extended by 5 Years.

7. 12 Years N.P.S.C. - 14-11-62 Do.

8. 12 Years N.D.C. - 14-03-70 Do.

9. 10 Years N.S.C. (I Issue) 14-03-70

 - 38 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

10. 7 Years N.S.C. (II Issue) 31-12-80

11. 7 Years N.S.C. (III Issue) 31-12-80

12. 7 Years N.S.C. (IV Issue) 30-04-81

13. 7 Years N.S.C. (V Issue) 30-04-81

14. 6 Years N.S.C. (VI Issue) 01-04-89

15. 6 Years N.S.C. (VII Issue) 01-04-89

16. N.S.P.C. - 31-12-80

17. 5 Years N.D.B. - 20-04-81

18. 10 Years S.S.C. - 01-09-90

19. I.V.P. - 15-07-99 Interest is not payable for IVPs’ after

the date of maturity.

2.2 The rules governing the issue and discharge of Cash

Certificate, Defense Certificates and National Savings Certificates etc. are
contained in the relevant rules issued by the Government of India.

Rules prescribing, the procedure to be followed in Post Offices in

dealing with P.O. Certificates, and also for the accounts to be maintained
by Post Offices and to be rendered by them to the Postal Accounts Offices
will be found in Chapter 9 of the Post and Telegraphs Manual, Volume VI.
Part II.

2.3 Monthly journals of P.O. Certificates issued and discharged

are received in the Postal Accounts Office from the Post Office, the
journal of discharges being supported by the Certificates themselves. The
amounts of these journals representing the receipts from the sale of P.O.
Certificates and the payments made on their redemption are also included
in the monthly cash accounts submitted to the Postal Accounts Office. The
 - 39 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

procedure followed in the checking of these accounts and of the discharge
certificates is described in this chapter.

2.4 The main check in the Postal Accounts Office is conducted

through a Stock and Issue Register of P.O. Certificates which is
maintained in Form D.G. (PA)-323. One register for each Head Post
Office and for each denomination of all series, or one Register for all
denominations of one or more series for each Head Post Office as may be
convenient, should be used. In it is entered, from the Post Office issue
Journal against the number of the P.O. Certificate, month and year of issue
of each certificate.

Similarly when a P.O. Certificate is discharged and received in the

Postal Accounts Office, the interest included in the amount paid to the
holder is checked with reference to the date of issue and discharge as
noted on the certificate and the Week (Month & Year) of discharge is
noted in the Stock and Issue Register against the number of the P.O.
Certificate in the column provided for the purpose. The total amounts of
issues and discharges are verified each month with the figures in the
Detail Book, vide para 2.39.

2.5 The outstanding credit under the head Post Office 5 year
P.O. Certificates, 10 Year Defence Savings Certificates and National
Savings Certificates etc. which is kept open in the books for three
financial years after the period of their original or extended maturity, as
the case may be, for each series will thereafter lapse to Government and
be transferred to Government by credit to Minor Head “0075-00-101-
000001-unclaimed Deposits” under Major Head “0075-Miscel1aneous
General Services 00-101-Unclaimed Deposits”. This does not however
preclude the subsequent payments should claims arise.

Sectional Arrangements, Distribution of Work etc.

2.6(a) The P.O. Certificates Section is divided into the following

groups:-
 - 40 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

(i) Checking Group.

(ii) Accounting Group.

(iii) Miscellaneous Group.

(b) (1) Each of the checking group is entrusted with the checking of
journals of P.O. Certificate issued and discharged, posting in Stock and
Issue Registers, proving, re-issuing objection etc. and other miscellaneous
work mainly connected with the checking.

(2) The Supervisor will be generally responsible for the work of the
item workers in his group. He will allot, in consultation with the J.A.O.,
the Post Offices to the officials in such a way that each is given full work
for the month as per prescribed formula and see that they complete all
stages of work within the prescribed due dates. He will check every item
in the objection statement or half marginal reference prepared by the item
workers with the original documents, initial them and submit them to the
J.A.O. who will pass the half marginal reference and submit the objection
statement to the A.O. where necessary. He will receive the inward letters
and replies to the half marginal references and deal with all
correspondence relating to the Group. He will see that the Stock and Issue
Registers are properly maintained and that the Journals and invoices are
properly filed by the item workers.

(3) The supervisor will also concurrently review the work of item
workers covering all stages including postings and checking of
transaction, proving classification etc. the entries in the registers, lists and
vouchers being initialed (with date) by him. The result of review should
be noted in the diary in form D.G. (PA)-444 which should be submitted
daily to the J.A.O. and weekly to the A.O. He is also responsible for the
proper up keep of the records in his group.

(c) The Accounting Group is entrusted with the following duties and
will be in charge of a senior Accountant.

(i) Postings and preparation of the Circle Balance Sheets,

 - 41 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

(ii) Preparation of all statistics,

(iii) Preparation of all periodical statements in respect of P.O.

Certificates,

(iv) Maintenance of Transfer Register,

(v) All adjustments relating to transfer transactions and

reconciliation with Detail Book figures.

(d) The miscellaneous group consists of checker or checkers who are

independent of each other. Each checker or entrusted with one or more
items of work mentioned below:-

Issue or declarations, warrants of payment on safe Custody

acknowledgements, maintenance of objection book etc

When a P. O. Certificate is requisitioned for, a check slip in Form

D.G. (PA)-319-A showing the particulars of the P. O. Certificate as well
as the number and date of the letter with which it is sent, will be prepared,
signed by the checker in charge and placed in the bundle. The particulars
of the certificates will also be entered in a register Form No. D.G. (PA)-
319 and the date of despatch and receipt of the certificate noted therein.
The register should be reviewed weekly by the J.A.O. and monthly by the
A.O. For this purpose a list of outstanding items should be drawn at the
end of the register by citing the serial number on each page of the register.

2.7 The J.A.O. and the A.O. will see that the checker perform
their duties properly. They should review every month the accounts and
other work in the section with a view to see that the supervisors and
checker have done their work properly and also check the classification
slips. The J.A.O. should note in his diary in form No. D.G. (PA)-444 the
result of the examination and the mistakes found and submit it to the
Account Officer weekly and to the Head of the Office on completion of
each months review.

NOTE 1 -- A register in manuscript should be maintained in the Section to watch

the completion of review by the Supervisors and J.A.O. by the due dates. This register
 - 42 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

should remain the personal custody of the J.A.O. and should be submitted to the A.O.
in-charge on the 21 st of each month, for review and selection of denominations of each
class of certificates for every Head Post Office to be reviewed by the supervisors and
the J.A.O. respectively.

NOTE 2 -- A certificate on the following lines under the dated initials of the
checkers, supervisors and the J.A.O. should be recorded on completion of months
review in the review diary before its submission to the A.O. in-charge.

“Certified that the checking and review of vouchers and returns marked for check
and review/required to be checked and reviewed for the month __________________
have been completed and objections if any raised as a result of such check and review
have been issued”.

2.8 The register of irregularities maintained by the portioners

under para 2.17 shall also be scrutinised by the Group Checkers,
Supervisors/Reviewers and the J.A.O.s while conducting review to see
that the irregularities of the kind are properly entered therein and prompt
action has been taken as indicated in para 2.17.

2.9 The A.O. In-charge of the Cash Certificates Section should

keep a register of allotment of post review of checking of all post offices
in form M.S.O. (T)-5. As soon as the checking and current review of
months accounts are over the register should be put up to the Director/Dy.
Director who will enter the names of the Post Office or offices to be
reviewed during the Internal Check. The reviewing officer should submit
to the Director/Dy. Director a report of the review in form SM15.

NOTE -- If necessary a senior JA.O. who is not in-charge of Cash Certificates

Section may be asked to take up this review.

Due Dates

2.10 The following due dates should be observed for the

completion of several items of work (including issue of objection
statements and checking memoranda):
 - 43 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

(a) Checking and posting of Monthly - Next Month

Journals.
-11 th of the following Month of account.
(b) Proof of Posting
-29 th of the following Month of Account

(c) Completion of Posting of Registers of

Issue and Discharges [Form No. D.G. -25 th of the following Month of Account
(PA)-337 & 338].

(d) Monthly adjustment of fees--

(i) realised in stamp on account of

payment of NSC or other P.O.
Certificates through Village Postmen.
Next Month following the month of account.
(ii) preparation of Classification slips.

17th of the following month.

(e) Agreement of the proof sheet with the

5 th of the 3 rd month following.
figures in Form D.G.(PA)-337 & 338.

(f) Preparation of the Circle balance sheet

D.G. (PA)-339 and Agreement of Broad
15 th of the 3 rd month following.
sheet of Proof sheet balances D.G.(PA)-
339-E.

(g) Annual verification of balances 31 st October

Progress Report

2.11 The statement [Form No. D.G. (PA)-320] on the state of

work of each member of the Section should be prepared by the checkers
concerned, reviewed by the J.A.O. daily and submitted every Monday to
the Account Officer-in-charge with such comments as the J.A.O. may
think necessary.
 - 44 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

Accounts submitted by Post Offices.

2.12 Each Head Post Office send the following documents duly
entered in a P. O. Certificate Vouchers list [Form CC.-31-A] to the
Accounts Office on the dates mentioned herein:-

(a) Monthly Journals of National Savings Certificate /N. D. Bonds

issued (sold) and delivered to investors-Forms CC-18 and
18(S).

(b) Monthly Journals of Cash Certificates, Defence Savings

Certificates and National Saving Certificates etc. discharged
(paid)-Forms CC. 19 and 19(S).

(c) Monthly Journals of discharges (i.e. repayments) of P. O.

certificates in safe custody [Forms CC-19 and 19(S) with
headings suitably altered].

(d) Monthly summaries of National Savings Certificates issued and

Cash Certificates, Defence savings Certificates and N.D.
Bonds, Savings Certificates discharged, [Forms CC-30 and 31].

NOTE 1 -- A separate journals required for each denomination of P.O.

Certificates issued and discharged.

NOTE 2 -- Jouma1& similar to (a, (b) are also sent by each sub-post office
through its Head Office.

NOTE 3 -- Immediately on receipt the bundles should be carefully examined by a

senior checker or at the discretion of the J.A.O. to see whether all the returns and
vouchers mentioned in the voucher list [Form CC-31-A] have been received correctly.
The Checker should record a certificate “checked” under his dated initial on each
voucher list checked by him. If there is any discrepancy, it should be brought to the
notice of the Postmaster concerned and settled as early as possible. If the above
examination is not possible immediately on receipt of the bundles, they should be kept
under lock and key in the custody of responsible persons, preferably the J.A.O. of the
Cash Certificate Section, till the examination is taken up at the time of checking or on
an earlier date.

NOTE 4 -- The journals in respect of certificates cancelled or spoiled before

issue, duly supported by the certificates marked cancelled or spoiled by the Postmasters
 - 45 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

are also received with issue journals. The voucher list examined should after check set
each such certificate immediately perforated in his presence.

Verification of credits and debits on account of P.O. Certificates

issued and Discharged with the Figures in the Cash Account.

2.13 As soon as the monthly Cash Accounts are received from the
Post Offices, the Postal Accounts Section will compile a statement in
Form D.G. (PA)-322 showing the amounts credited and debited therein On
account of sales and discharges (Principal and Interest) of Post Office
Certificates respectively and send it by the 15th of every month to the
Cash Certificates section where figures will be compared with the amounts
shown in the Monthly summaries of Issues and Discharges and steps
should be taken to settle as adjust discrepancies, if any. (See Para. 2.39
and 2.65).

Examination of Summaries

2.14 The Monthly summaries of P. O. Certificates issued and

discharged [Forms CC- 30 and 31] received with the Monthly account
should be carefully checked by the item-workers with the Monthly
journals at P. O. Certificates issued and discharged. Summaries for the
monthly account should, after check be made over to the checker for
postings in the Abstract of P. O. Certificates issue and discharged [Form
No. D.G. (PA)-337] in respect of issues and in the Register of Discharges
[Form No. D.G. (PA)-338] in respect of discharges, vide Para 2.28 and
2.29.

Checking of Journals of P.O. Certificates Issued

2.15 In checking the Issue Journals, it should be seen that:-

(i) Each item in the Journal has an entry number against it, and
that these entry numbers run in a consecutive series for each
denomination each month, so that the quotation of the entry number
and month will at once enable any issue to be traced.

(ii) The serial letters are always clearly shown before the serial
 - 46 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

number.

(iii) The issue price has been realised at the prescribed rates.

(iv) The totals are correct.

(v) The irregularities regarding purchase in excess of the prescribed

limit, when noticed are pointed out, and

(vi) The irregularities in connection with the use of the proper Form,
when detected, are pointed out.

Any omission or discrepancy should be noted and entered either in

an objection statement or in a half margin memorandum (See para 2.55).

Checking of Journals of P.O. Certificates Discharged

2.16 The Monthly Journals of discharges (Forms CC. 19 and

19(S) should be examined to see:-

(i) that all the particulars required by the form are given;

(ii) that the entry numbers run in a consecutive series for each
month;

(iii) that each entry is supported by a paid (discharged) P. O.

Certificates or Safe Custody receipt if any voucher is wanting,
it should be called for, a check slip in Form. No. D.G. (PA)-
319-A being prepared and kept in the proper place;

(iv) that the amount shown in the column for “Interest” is correct
with reference to the dates of issue and discharge of the
certificates; and

(v) that the totals of the journals are correct

NOTE l -- On completion of check of an issue of discharged Journal, the checker

will write the words checked by ……………… on the last sheet of the journal signing
the entry and dating his signatures.

NOTE 2 --If a discharged certificate is not received with the list, it should be
called for through an objection statement.
 - 47 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

2.17 It should be seen that there are no erasures or alterations etc.
in the summaries and the journals of certificates issued and discharged,
and if there be any, the same are duly authorised by proper attestations.
The irregularities detected as a result of the above check should be entered
in a manuscript Register by the portioner concerned under his dated
initials. The group checker will pick out from the register the items of
issues and discharges in respect of which unauthorised corrections, over
writings, erasures or alterations etc. have been noticed and immediately
issue special references to the Postmasters through form D.G. (PA)-325-B
after keeping a note thereof in the register.

The endorsement of the form D.G. (PA)-325-B may be dispensed

with at the discretion of the A.O. in case the irregularities are of minor
nature and non-persistent.

2.18 In checking a discharged P. O. Certificates it should be

seen:-

(a) that where the signature is decipherable, the name signed is the
same as that shown in the certificate;

(b) that the certificate is receipted by the payee for the amount
including interest, if any, received by him and that his signature
on the reverse of the certificates is dated;

NOTE -- In the case of P.O. Certificate is issued in joint names, it should be seen
that the provisions of the P.O. Certificates Rules have been fulfilled.

(c) that the P.O. certificate is impressed With the round and
oblong money order stamp. If however, an omission is detected,
the Postmaster should be asked to write the word "Discharged"
in red ink across it, over his signature with date;

(d) that when a P. O. Cash Certificate is discharged at an office

other than that at which it is registered, the requirements of the
Post Office Cash Certificate rules have been complied with. In
cases where payment is made without pre-verification from the
 - 48 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

office of registration; it should be seen that an advice of
payment in Form CC-10 is received and that the certificate
printed on its reverse bas been duly signed by the Postmaster of
the office of registration. The advice of payment should, after
check be filed with the relevant discharged certificate for
preservation. In case an advice of payment relates to more than
one Certificate, the advice should be attached, to one of the
certificates concerned but a remark regarding its receipt should
simultaneously be made on the rest of the certificates also,
indicating thereon the number of the certificates to which it has
been attached.

NOTE -- The advices of payment received in the Section should in the first
instance be entered in a separate manuscript register as per specimen given below the
record clerk and the same should be delivered to the portioner concerned after obtaining
his dated initials in column 7 of the register in token of receipt. Columns 8 and 9 should
be filled up by the portioner at the time of filling the advices of payment with the
relevant paid certificates.

REGISTER OF ADVICE OF PAYMENT

Serial no. No of advice of payment and From whom received

the date of its receipt
1 2 3
Particular of certificate covered by the Office of
advice of payment issue Office of payment
Serial no.(a) Denomination(b) & Date
4 5 6

Dated initials of the portioner Particulars of the certificate with which

A.P. has been recorded

Serial No. Denomination

(a) (b)
7 8

Dated initials of the portioner in token of filing the A.P. Remarks

9 10

In the first week of each month a pending list should be prepared by the record
 - 49 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

clerk in the register itself. The pending list should show portion-wise, the serial No. of
advices of payment received up to 15th of the previous month but not disposed of. The
register should be submitted by 7th of each month to the sectional J.A.O. through group
accountant/supervisor and quarterly to the Accounts Officer in charge. While reviewing
the register, the group Accountant/Supervisor and the Sectional J.A.O. should also
check the correct disposal of a selected number of advices of payment and attest the
entries in the remark column in token of the check.

(e) that in the case of a deceased investor, proper sanction for

payment has been received;

(f) that in the case of a minor holder proper sanction to the

payment has been received.

NOTE l -- Copies of sanctions issued by officers higher than Postmasters, to

payments of P.O. Certificates held by minor or deceased holders, will on receipt be
filed after scrutiny in a guard file. The expenditure on account of the discharge of such
certificates will be checked against the copies of the sanctions in which the particulars
of the payment will be noted by the Accountant and attested by the reviewer/J.A.O.

NOTE 2 -- on receipt of a sanction authorising payment of P.O. certificate to the

heirs of a deceased holder Without the production of a succession certificate or other
legal evidence and where there is no nomination on record it should be seen that the
sanction contained a certificate by the sanctioning authority to the effect that the
current value of the P.O. certificate(s) held by the deceased holder does not exceed Rs.
100, 500, 1000, 5000, 10000 as per claimants statement in the claim application.

(g) that when a minor's holding has been paid at an office other
than the office of registration, the P.O. certificate has been pre-
verified by the latter office. If an omission is detected in this
respect the P.O. certificate should be got verified by the office
or registration.

(h) that payment is received by the minor himself the word “ex-
minor or ex-minors in the case of joint holdings” is written
below his signature on the reverse of the P. O. Certificate under
the signature of the Postmaster;

(i) that payment of P.O. certificates purchased in the name of a

teacher out of the amount at his credit in the Teachers'
 - 50 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

Provident Fund Account, has been made only to the person
authorised by the Local Government or Administrator
controlling the fund;

(j) that when the value of a discharged P.O. Certificate is paid to a

person authorised by the holder a letter of authority is furnished
along with the discharged P.O. certificate and that the signature
of the messenger also is obtained on the reverse of the P.O.
Certificate.

Any discrepancies or omissions in any of these respects should be

noticed either through an objection statement or through a half marginal
memorandum. A check slip in Form D.G. (PA)-319-A should be prepared
and kept in the proper place when a discharged P.O. Certificate is sent to a
disbursing officer for removal of any irregularity noticed therein.

NOTE 1 -- As the discharge of P.O. Certificates at an office other than the office
of issue has to be posted, in the issue and stock register of the office of issue, the
discharge certificate should be filed with the discharged list of the office of issue for
the week of discharge.

NOTE 2 -- After exercising the above checks the discharged certificates should
be enfaced checked with a rubber stamp over the dated initials of the checker.

2.19 In the case of payment of Postal Certificates through village

Postman as prescribed in para 554 of P&T Manual, Volume VI. Part II it
should also be seen that:-

(i) the application for discharge and warrants of payment have

been received along with the discharged certificates.

(ii) the value of stamps affixed On each application for discharge is

equivalent to M.O. Commission payable on the amount of the
certificate(s) if the same had been remitted by M.O. and that the
certificates bear on their reverse the signature of the paying
village postman with his full designation and date.

NOTE 1 -- The certificates which can neither be discharged nor delivered back to
 - 51 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

the holder shall be received in the Postal Accounts Office for safe custody. The
procedure prescribed in para 2.67 should also be followed in such cases.

NOTE 2 -- The amount of fees realised by the village postman in the shape of
Postage stamps, the details of which will be available from the warrant of payment
received along with discharged certificates and for the monthly intimations in respect of
cancelled and destroyed certificates submitted to Postal Accounts Office with monthly
returns should be adjusted by a monthly consolidated transfer entry by crediting ‘155-
Postal Receipts-order Receipts-Commission realised on post office certificates paid
through village postman’ and debiting ‘155-Postal Receipts Sale of Postage Stamps (b)
Deduct-Refund of postage stamps’.

[Orders contained in this note will apply in respect of the commission realised
during the year 1958-59 and onwards].

Stock and Issue Register of P.O. Certificates

2.20 As prescribed in para 2.4 the Postal Accounts Office should

maintain a set of registers in Form D.G. (PA)-323 either for each
denomination of all series for each Head Post Office or for all
denominations of one or more series for each Head Post Office to record
the supply, sale and redemption of the certificates. One register in each set
should be set apart for each denomination of P. O. Certificates of all series
or for all denominations of one or more series and the pages in each
register should be numbered and provided with an index in Form No. D.G.
(PA)-324. Different coloured ink may be used in different financial year,
for posting in Stock & Issue Registers.

2.21 Blank P.O. Certificates are supplied to Post Offices by the

Postal Stock Depots and consolidated list Of certificates issued to Post
Offices is sent to Postal Accounts Office twice a month one for period
from 1st to 14th and the other from 15th to the end of the month vide Rule
377(4) of the posts and Telegraphs Manual, Volume VIII. On receipt of
the consolidated list the serial number of each P.O. Certificate entered in
the consolidated list should be separately entered in the proper column of
the Stock and Issue Register for the particular denomination, one line
 - 52 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

should be reserved for each number and care should be taken that the
numbers are entered serially for each of denomination. When the
consolidated list has been completely posted in this manner, the word
“Posted” should be noted on it over the dated signature of the poster and
the consolidated list, pasted into a guard file, a separate file being
maintained for each Circle. The posting of consolidated list in the Issue
Register should be attested by the J.A.O. Similarly when original invoices
of P.O. certificates returned to Postal Stock Depots are received from the
post office with the necessary Certificates as required by Rule 532 of
Posts and Telegraphs Manual, Volume VI, Part II, the numbers in the
Stock and Issue Registers should be neatly scored out in red ink by the
poster and attested by the J.A.O. In respect of the original invoices
received for the supply of P.O. Certificates by one Head Office to another,
the same procedure should be followed in deleting the entries from the
register of the supplying post office. Entries of the P.O. Certificates
should also be made in the Stock and Issue Register of the receiving Post
Office by the poster and attested by the J.A.O.

2.22 After the Journals of P.O. Certificates issued have been

completely checked as prescribed in para 2.45, the number of the week,
the month (abbreviation) and the year in which each P.O. Certificate was
sold will be stamped or written in ink in columns 2 and 6 of the Stock and
Issue Register against the entry of the number of the Cash Certificate.

NOTE -- As soon as an intimation regarding the attachment of a Post Office

Certificate by a Court of Law is received in, the Postal Accounts Office from the
Postmaster, suitable note should be kept in red ink in the Stock and Issue Register
under the attestation of the J.A.O. Any corrections to the entries in the Register should
be attested by the J.A.O.

2.23 After the discharged P.O. Certificates have been checked as

described in para 2.18 they should be serially arranged. The date of
discharge (week month and year) should then be posted in the register, as
in the case of “Issues” in columns 3 and 7.

At the time of posting of Discharges in the Stock and Issue Register,

 - 53 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

the date of issue as shown in discharged P.O. Certificate should be
compared with the Month of issue as entered in the register. The office of
payment should be noted in the Register in the case of P.O. Certificates
discharged at an office other than that of issue and in cases where
discharges are accounted for in a month other than that of payment, the
month of account should also be noted.

NOTE -- In the case of discharged declaration it should further be seen that the
procedure in para 2.51 is followed.

2.24 On completion of posting of a issue or discharge journal in

the Stock and Issue Register, the poster will write the words “Posted by
(name of the poster)” on the last sheet of the journal signing the entry and
dating his signature. Any discrepancy between the serial numbers of P.O.
Certificates taken up for posting and those entered in the Stock and Issue
register will be reported in a half margin memorandum.

NOTE l -- As the stock and Issue Registers are very important records, it is
essential that entries of particulars should be carefully made. Any corrections to the
entries in the Register should be attested by the J.A.O.

NOTE 2 -- Issues and discharges which have not been posted in the Stock and
issue register for any reason should be entered in the Register of Un-posted
Issues/Discharges in form D.G. (PA)-338-A. (Part I) and their subsequent posting in
that stock and issue register watched through this register. One such register should be
maintained for each class of certificates and for each Head Post Office or group of
offices as may be found necessary, separately for issues and discharges. Where a regis-
ter is in use for a group of offices separate set of pages should be allotted for each Head
Office. Each register should have attached to it an Abstract in form No. D.G. (PA)-338-
A (Part II) showing the number and amount of items kept un-posted in each month, the
number and amount of issues/ discharges posted during the month and the closing
balance at the end of each month. The particulars of item, kept un-posted and those
subsequently c1eared should be entered by the journal checkers. Where copying of
details of individual items is not considered necessary (for instance, credits for which
preliminary receipts have been issued and which remain un-posted for want of serial
numbers of certificates issued etc.), the total number of such items and the total value
thereof may be entered. The register should be maintained by the Supervisor of each
checking group and Submitted to the sectional J.A.O. and B.O., by the 25th of the next
month following the month of account.
 - 54 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

The balance sheet clerk should, before signing the consolidated abstract of issues
and discharge in form D.G. (PA)-32l-A, see that the number of un-posted items shown
therein with the monthly total shown in the register of un-posted items.

At the end of each financial year the outstanding items in the register
of un-posted items should be totalled and the total agreed with the closing
balance of March shown in the abstract and a certificate of agreement
recorded over the dated signature of the supervisor. While reviewing the
register for March, the Sectional J.A.O. should see that the above
certificate has been recorded by the Supervisor.

A statement in the form indicated on the next page showing the

progress in posting the un-posted issues and discharges during the quarter
ending March, June, September and December of each year should be
submitted to the Postal Wing of the Postal Directorate by the end of the
month following the quarter.

Proof of Posting

2.25 After the issues and discharges for a month have been posted
in the Stock and Issue Registers, the total number of issue and discharges,
are posted on each page should be counted and the number entered in the
Proof Sheet (Form No. D.G. (PA)-321) in appropriate columns. After the
number of issues and discharges of all the pages have been entered in the
proof sheets, they should be totalled and the totals agreed with the figures
of issues and discharges, shown in the register in form D.G. (PA)-337 and
338 respectively for the month. To facilitate the agreement, the details
should be worked out in form No D.G. (PA)-321-A. The proof sheet
should then be handed over to the Supervisor for review. The J.A.O.
should check the entries of the proof sheet from the Stock and Issue
Registers. Irregularities discovered in the review should be noted in the
review Diary, similarly check should also be exercised in the case of safe
custody transactions.
 - 55 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

Transfer of P.O. Certificates and Issue of Duplicate Certificates in
Lieu of Lost P.O. Certificates between different persons.

2.26 When a P. O. Certificate is transferred from one person to

another the Head Postmaster issues in the name of the transferee a fresh
certificate bearing the same date of maturity as that of the original
certificate which with the endorsement of the original holder on its reverse
is sent to the Postal Accounts Office (vide Rule 561 of the Posts and
Telegraphs Manual Volume VI). Suitable entries should in such cases be
made against the numbers of both the P.O. Certificates in the Stock and
Issue Register.

In the case of a declaration already issued by the Accounts Office in

lieu of a lost P.O. Certificate the original declaration received from the
Postmaster should be cancelled in P.A.O. after verification with the entries
in the Register of Declarations and the Stock and Issue Register.

Balance Sheet

2.27 A numerical Balance Sheet showing for each Circle, the total
number of P.O. Certificates sold by Post Offices in that Circle, but
remaining undischarged at the end of each month, relating to each year of
issue, should be maintained in Form D.G. (PA)-339. Separate pages
should be allotted for each official year. The column for issue is posted
from the Abstract of Issues and Discharges [Form. No. D.G. (PA)-337]
mentioned in Para 2.28 and the discharges are posted from the classified
abstract of discharged P.O. Certificates [Form D.G. (PA)-339-B] referred
to in Para 2.38.

To ensure that the postings in Balance Sheet are correctly made a

broadsheet in Form No. D.G. (PA)-339-E should be maintained in addition
according to series of issue. The opening balances at the commencement
of each year should be copied from the broadsheet for the previous year,
and the monthly issues and discharges according to series of issues are to
be posted therein from the Proof-Sheets [Form D.G. (PA)-32l] and an
 Upto 19 ……………………19 19……………….19 19…………………19 19………………..19

Series of Post office Clearanc Clearanc Clearanc sheet.

Opening Clearance Closing O.B O.B
O.B. e during C.B e during C.B e during C.B
certificate
Balance during the Balance . .
CHAPTER II

Rs. the Rs. the Rs. the Rs.

Rs. Quarter Rs Rs. Rs. Rs.
Quarter Quarter Quarter

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

5 Years C.C
10 Yrs D.S.C
5 Yrs. N.S.C
7 Yrs N.S.C
12 Yrs N.S.C
10 Yrs N.P.C
- 56 -

12 Yrs N.PSC
12 Yrs N.D.C.
10 Yrs N.S.(F.I.)
POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

7 Yrs N.S.C.II Issue

7 Yrs N.S.C.III Issue
7 Yrs N.S.C.IV Issue
7 Yrs N.S.C.V Issue
5 Yrs N.D. Bond
NOTE: Figures for each series of certificate should include the value of unposted items of all the denominations and of all circles
under the accounts jurisdiction of each Postal Accounts office
agreement effected monthly with the figures shown in the Circle Balance
 - 57 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

Similar agreement should be effected in the case of safe custody
transactions also. As the figures shown in the Circle Balance Sheet are
according to years of issues, the numbers shown against different years of
issue under one series are to be added together to effect an agreement with
the figures shown in the broadsheet which together with the Circle
Balance Sheet should be submitted to the Branch Officer every month.
Adjustments made in March Final Accounts and journal entries should
also be entered in the broadsheet and the figures agreed with those in the
Circle Balance Sheet.

Register of Abstract of Issues and Discharges

2.28 To facilitate consolidation of P.O. Certificates issued and.

discharged in a Circle, Abstracts and Registers in Form No D.G. (PA)-337
and 338 are maintained as explained below:--

Issues are posted in the Abstract in Form D.G. (PA)-337 from the
checked summaries for the last week of the month and the “Discharges”
are posted from the “Register of Discharges” in Form No. D.G. (PA)-338
are explained in Para 2.29. The total of the figures thus arrived at
represents the issues and Discharges for the whole Circle for the month. A
reconciliation should be effected between these figures and those shown in
the Detail Book (see para 2.39).

Register of Discharges

2.29 As P.O. Certificates are sometimes discharged in an Office

different from that of issue or registration, the journals of the discharges
of one office may include payments of certificates originally purchased at
another office. Adjustment must therefore be made so that the entries of
discharges for each Head Office may eventually relate only to P.O.
Certificates sold at it. These adjustments will consist in deducting from
the total under the head “Discharges” in the monthly Summary the totals
of amounts paid on account of certificates originally issued by other
offices either in the jurisdiction of the same Accounts Officer or in that of
Foreign Accounts Offices and adding to it the amount of P.O. Certificates
 - 58 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

received in transfer from other Accounts Offices. The net total arrived at
represents the number and amount of P.O. Certificates discharged on
account of its own issues.

2.30 If the Offices of issue and payment are all in the same Postal
Circle, the amounts deducted from the total discharges of the paying office
will be added to the discharges under the several issuing offices the sum
of the minus entries being equal to the sum of the plus entries.

Each such adjustment should be noted in the Form D.G. (PA)-338

but no transfer entry will be necessary.

2.31 If the offices of issue and payment are situated in different

Postal Circles but under the same Accounts Office, a transfer entry
debiting and crediting the respective circles should be made, which will
appear in the Detail Books of the respective circle through the Head “Cash
Certificates Remittances (same Accounts Officer)”.

2.32 If the paying Post Office is in a different Accounts Circle

from that of the Post Office that issued the certificate, the debit in the
accounts of the paying office should be passed on to the Accounts Officer
of the issuing Office by crediting the head “Payments of Cash Certificates
and Bonus on P.O.C.C. (Deduct from Debit)” and debiting “Cash
Certificates Remittance (other Accounts Officer)”. The remittance
accountant will check the advice of transfer. Post the P.O. certificates in
the Transfer Registers concerned and hand them over to the item workers
who should check and deal with them in accordance with the rules relating
to checking of discharged P.O. Certificates. The month of adjustment
should be posted in the column “Discharges” and the period of discharge
(the date, month and year), with the name of office of payment noted in
the remarks column in the Stock and Issue Register.

NOTE -- A statement of the debits passed on to the other Accounts Offices, as

referred to above, should be prepared monthly and sent out to the Accounts Office
concerned by the 29th of the next month following the month of account, in the manner
laid down In Para 6.12 of the Postal Accounts Manual Volume I.
 - 59 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

2.33 Separate Registers showing particulars of discharged P.O.
Certificates transferred from one office to another in the same Circle or in
different Circles under the same Accounts Officer or in different Accounts
Circles should be maintained in D.G. (PA)-328. The registers should be
reviewed monthly by the J.A.O. and submitted to the Branch Officer for
inspection.

NOTE -- In the case of P.O. Certificates issued in one office and discharged in
another office within the same Postal Circle it will not be necessary to post the Interest
in Form D.G. (PA)-328.

2.34 In cases where fresh P. O. Certificates are issued in lieu of

P.O. Certificates issued in another Accounts Circle, the Accounts Office
in whose jurisdiction fresh P.O. Certificates are issued should send the
cancelled certificates to the Accounts Office in which they were originally
issued and call for the transfer of the credit. The latter office after making
a scrutiny of the cancelled certificates and a note of cancellation against
the relevant entries in the Stock and Issue Register should transfer the
credit and retain the cancelled certificates. The Accounts Office receiving
the credit i.e. the Accounts Office which has issued fresh P.O. Certificates
should also make, a note of the cancellation of the original P.O.
Certificates against the entries relating to the fresh certificates in the Issue
Register. For reconciliation purposes, the liability as to the year of issue
of the fresh P.O. Certificates should be considered as the year of original
issue and not for the year in which the credit has been transferred and
accounted for: when the credits are transferred, the new certificates should
be marked off distinctively in the issue registers and when calculating the
total outstanding Of the year, the total of such P.O. Certificates should be
distributed to the various years of issue of the original P.O. Certificates
which they have replaced.

NOTE -- The instructions contained in this para will also apply to certificates
transferred to a Post Office under another Circle but under the same Accounts Office.
In such cases the credit transfer will be affected through the head “CC-Remittance-same
Accounts Office”.
 - 60 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

Partial Discharge of Cash Certificates

2.35 The procedure followed in Accounts Offices in Posting and

proving of partially discharged Cash Certificates is the same as the one
followed in the case of P.O. Certificates discharged in full. The
correctness of the principal and interest paid for the portion of the nominal
value discharged is checked. It is also seen whether P.O. Certificates of
the same old issue are issued for the balance. While posting the date of
discharge in the stock and issue Register, a note should be made in the
remarks column against the Cash Certificates partially discharged, thus:-

“Partially discharged for Rs…………………. Cash Certificates

No............................ Issued in lieu of the undischarged value”.
For purpose of posting in Forms D.G. (PA)-337 to 339-B, the
partially discharged P.O. Certificates should be treated as
though it was fully discharged but as the money value of the
P.O. Certificates noted in the Abstract and Register in Form
No. D.G. (PA)-337 and D.G. (PA)-338 will not agree with the
total amount of discharges as noted in the money columns of
the same Abstract and Register, a suitable note explaining the
difference as due to partial discharge should be made in the
Register against the names of P.O. concerned. A similar
procedure is followed in preparing classification slips in Form
No D.G. (PA)-339-A. The fresh P.O. Certificates issued are
collected together in the “Issue side” of Form No. D.G. (PA)-
337 for the whole Circle without showing money values in the
money column, classified according to the several quarters and
years of issue and posted in the Circle Balance sheet. The P.O.
Certificates issued are shown as plus entries against the
quarters under the denomination concerned. The money value
of the balance of the undischarged P.O. Certificates shown in
the Balance Sheet will thus agree every month with the balance
shown in the broadsheet. No Account adjustment is made on
 - 61 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

this account unless the P.O. Certificates is discharged in a
Circle other than the Circle of its issue in which case the credit
in respect of the undischarged portion is transferred through the
Head “P.O. Certificates Remittance” to the Circle in which the
P.O. Certificates is partially discharged (See para 2.34.).

NOTE.- Credits appearing in Post Office Schedule of unclassified receipts on

account of fees realised for partial discharge of a Post Office Certificates (vide rule 32
of Post Office Savings Certificate rule, 1960) should be classified to the Head “8661-
Suspense Account-Pay and Accounts Officer concerned”.

Exchange of P.O. Certificate of Lower Denomination for P.O

Certificates of Higher Denomination and Vice Versa

2.36 It should be seen in checking whether P.O. Certificates of the

same series are issued as those of exchanged and whether the nominal
value of the P.O. Certificates issued in exchange is exactly equal to the
nominal value of the P.O. Certificates exchanged. Suitable notes of
cancellation or old P.O. Certificates and issue of fresh Cash Certificates
should be kept in the Issue Registers against the respective serial numbers.
Such transactions should be collected together in Form D.G. (PA)-337 for
the whole Circle by means of plus and minus entries i.e. certificates
exchanged are shown as minus entry against the quarter under the
denomination concerned and the P.O. Certificates issued are shown as a
plus entry against the quarter under the denomination concerned.

The net result of the above transactions as worked out in Form No.
D.G. (PA)-337 for the whole Circle is than posted in the Circle Balance
Sheet. No account adjustment is made in the Detail Book.

NOTE. - Credits appearing in Post Office schedules of unclassified

receipts on account of fees realised for conversion from one denomination
to another. (Vide rule 32 of Post Office Savings Certificates Rule 1960)
should be classified to the head “8661-Suspense Account-Pay & Accounts
Officer concerned”.
 - 62 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

Classification of discharged P.O. Certificates according to years of
issue and the Preparation of the Classified Abstract of P.O.
Certificates Discharged

2.37 After the discharged P.O. Certificates of an office relating to a

month have all been posted in the Stock and Issue Registers, they should
be sorted by denominations according to years of issue. The number of
P.O. Certificates discharged should then be entered in a slip in Form D.G.
(PA)-339-A and, the total number shown in the slip under each
denomination should be agreed with the number of P.O. Certificates
arrived at by actual count and also with the number shown in column ‘Net
total’ in the register of P.O. Certificates discharged (Form D.G. (PA)-
338). The slip should be initialled by the item worker and handed over to
the supervisor who should also agree the totals with the figures shown in
the Abstract of P.O. Certificates issued and discharged Form D.G. (PA)-
337. The supervisor will check the classification slips in detail and initial
them in token of having checked them.

NOTE 1 -- P.O. Certificates that have matured (i.e. completed in 10 Years period
from the dates of issue) before the current year need not be classified according to
quarters of issue as they cease to earn interest any further. P.O. Certificates held under
Rule 6(4) (b) of the Post Office Certificates rules and discharged after 15th June 1952
should be classified according to years of issue only.

NOTE 2-- In the case of offices where there are no transaction of discharges the
preparation of separate classification slips in form No. D.G. (PA)-339-A or 339(F) by
clerks is not necessary. The balance sheet checker should transcribe the “Nil”
transactions from the consolidated abstract of issues and discharge (Form D.G. (PA)-
321-A) prepared by the clerks.

2.38 When all the slips have been received from the checkers of
groups duly checked, they should be arranged in alphabetical order of the
post offices in each circle by the Balance Sheet Clerk, who should post
these figures in the Register in Form D.G. (PA)-339-B so as to facilitate
the postings in the Circle Balance Sheet.

NOTE -- See Note 2 below Para 2.37

 - 63 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

Reconciliation with Detail Book

2.39 A register should be maintained for each Postal Circle in form

No D.G. (PA)-329 for effecting an agreement between the amount of P.O.
Certificates issued and discharged as booked in the Circle Detail Books
and these compiled from the journals of issues and discharges. The latter
should be posted from the Register in Form D.G. (PA)-337. As regards the
former, the Book Section should send to the Cash Certificates Section as
soon as the accounts of a month have been closed, a statement showing for
each Circle, the total amounts of issues and discharges and interest and the
additions and deduction resulting from transfer entries. The difference, if
any, between the two sets of figures should be clearly explained in the last
column of the register which should be reviewed by the J.A.O. and
submitted to Accounts Officer every month.

2.40 At the end of the year, after the accounts for March final have
been closed, a certificate in the following form should be furnished to the
Director of Accounts (Postal) Calcutta (Government Security Section) :-

“Statement of balance under the head, ''Post Office Certificates”

“…………year…............ Certificates” for………….. Circle for the year
...........”

(1) Opening balance

(2) Cost of P.O. Certificate issued during the year (as per Detail
Book).

(3) Total of 1 & 2.

(4) Cost of P.O. Certificates discharged during the year (as per Detail
Book).

(5) Closing balance.

Certified that the closing Balance as shown above has been verified
with the balance shown in the Circle Balance Sheets.

2.41 The Director of Accounts (Postal), Calcutta (Government

 - 64 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

Security Section), should, after check, consolidate the figures for the
whole of India and send a copy to the Director General Postal Services
(P.A. Wing) for agreement with the General Abstract.

NOTE-- Adjustment made in Journal entries under the head P.O. certificates
year certificates should be communicated to the D.G.P.S. (P.A. Wing) through
revised statements.

2.42 Just after the accounts for March Supplementary have been
closed, an annual report on the issue and discharge of Post Office
Certificates together with statements showing details as to number, value
and bonus of certificates issued and discharged in each Postal Circle,
separately for each denomination should be furnished to the G.S. Section
of the Director of Accounts (postal), Calcutta. In the report, the general
result of Postal Certificates operation during the year as compared with
those of the preceding year should be reviewed briefly and the reasons for
the difference if any with the booked actual and other information which
may appear to be interesting and relevant should also be given.

2.43 The Director of Account (Postal), Calcutta should after check,

consolidate the figures for the department and Communicate them to the
P.A. Wing of the Postal Directorate by 31st August.

The Postal Accounts Wing will send it to the concerned section

under the Director Savings Bank in the Postal Directorate along with the
statement showing the Savings Bank and Government Security
transactions on the 20th September each year with comments on the
general position of the various kinds of investments made through the Post
Office.

Annual Verification of Balances

2.44 An annual verification is undertaken to prove that all the

transactions of the Head Post Offices in the Circle during the year have
been correctly taken into the Stock and Issue and safe Custody Registers.
The verification consists in agreeing the balance at the close of the year as
shown in the Balance Sheet of P.O. Certificates not discharged up to the
 - 65 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

31st March Of the year as exhibited in the Broadsheet of Proof Sheet
balances (Form D.G. (PA)-339-E).

The correctness of the monthly posting in the Stock and Issue

Registers is proved in the manner indicated in Para 2.25.

2.45 After the figures in the Broadsheet of Proof Sheet balances have
been agreed with those in the Circle Balance Sheet (see para 2.27) in
respect of transactions of a year, the balances as shown in the latter should
be compiled in Form D.G. (PA)-339-D according to series and years of
issue and denomination, and the totals of each series should be worked out
in it and verified with the corresponding figures in the broadsheet. The
total amount of balances outstanding should also be worked in the
“Remarks” column of the form and agreed with Detail Book Figures, any
differences between the figures being explained.

The annual verification would be completed by the 31 st October of

each year and a certificate to the effect that the balances (specifying the
amounts of balances) have been verified, should be sent to the Director
General, Postal Services (P.A. Wing) on that date.

2.46 Every sixth year the verification of balances should be done by

actual count from the Stock and Issue Registers, the recopying of the
Stock and Issue Registers being also taken up at that time so that it may
facilitate the counting of undischarged P.O. Certificates for the purpose of
verification.

The verification of balances is done in two stages viz., (i) counting

of the issues outstanding in the Stock and Issue Registers, and (ii)
reconciliation of differences, if any, between the actual count figures and
the figures in the broadsheet of proof sheet balances. The two stages of
work should be entrusted to different persons and the counter should be a
person other than the one who is responsible for the maintenance of the
Stock and Issue Registers.

“The counting done by the counter should be checked by the

 - 66 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

Supervisor by independently counting the undischarged certificates in the
Stock and Issue Registers. He should record (over his signatures) the
result of his checks on the counting sheets prepared by the counter,
reconcile the differences, if any, and then submit them to the Sectional
Junior Accounts Officer.”

Thereafter, differences, if any, between the actual count figures and

the figures in the broadsheet of proof sheet balances should be
investigated with a view to rectification by the reconciler. He should
record (i) full explanations of the differences, and (ii) how they were
adjusted.

The Sectional J.A.O. should personally check, with reference to the

basic records, the correctness of the explanations of the differences given
by the reconcilers.

Exception-- In the case of 12 years N.S.C. and N.P.C. and other series issued
thereafter, the verification should be done once in 3 years while the recopying of the
registers should continue to be done once in 6 years.

2.46A Deleted

List of Unsold P.O. Certificates

2.47 Lists of P.O. Certificates remaining unsold in P.O. on the 31 st of

March of each year are received in the Postal Accounts Office at the latest
by the 30 th April each year except in the case of Calcutta General Post
Office and Port Blair H.O. from whom such lists are received in the Postal
Accounts office by the 31 st May and 15 th May respectively. The entries in
the list should be compared with these in the Stock and Issue Registers
and any discrepancies noticed should be settled in communication with the
Postmaster concerned. The lists should be completely cheeked by the 31 st
August each year, the progress made in checking being, watched through a
register and the check subjected to review by a supervisor. The J.A.O.
should also review each list. This check is an important means of
detecting fraudulent issues within one year of the transactions.
 - 67 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

NOTE-- A report in the form given below showing the progress in settling the
discrepancies noticed as a result of comparing the Post Office statement of unsold
certificates with the postings in the Stock and Issue registers during the quarter ending
31 st March, 30 th June, 30 th September and 31 st December of each year should be
submitted to the D.G.P.S. (P.A. Wing) by the last days of the month following the
quarter.
 Upto 19 …………19 19……………….19 19…………………19 19………………..19

Type of Post office C

Clearance Clearance Clearance Clearance
certificate O. . O. C. O.
during the during the during the C.B O.B during the C.B
CHAPTER II

B. B B. B B.
Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter
.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

5 Years C.C
10 Yrs D.S.C
5 Yrs. N.S.C
7 Yrs N.S.C
- 68 -

12 Yrs N.S.C
10 Yrs N.P.C
12 Yrs N.PSC
12 Yrs N.D.C.
POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

10 Yrs N.S.(F.I.)
7 Yrs N.S.C.II Issue
stock and issue register for the quarter ending

7 Yrs N.S.C.III Issue

7 Yrs N.S.C.IV Issue
7 Yrs N.S.C.V Issue
Report on the progress in setting the discrepancies noticed as a result of

NOTE:
5 Yrs NFigures
D Bondfor each series of certificate should be the total of all denominations and of all circles under the
comparing the P.O. statement of unsold certificates with the posting in the

jurisdiction of each Postal Accounts office

 - 69 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

Note The register mentioned above should he maintained in the two parts as indicated
below :--

PART I
Register to watch the receipt of lists of unsold P.O. Certificates and progress
in checking thereof for the year -----
S. No Name of Date of Initial of Date of No of
The P.O. receipt of the completion discrepancy
Of the list recipient of the check items noticed in
Of the list the list
1 2 3 4 5 6

Initials of No. and Date of

Reference calling for the
Checker Supervisor J.A.O. Lists wanting on 30th April Remark
7 8 9 10 11

Part II
Register Showing the progress in settlement of discrepant items of the
Year ------------------
S. No. Name of the O.B. of Discrepant No. of items settled/unsettled during
P.O. Items -----------------------------------------------------
April May June July August Sep
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

No. of items settled/unsettled during Particulars

Oct. Nov. Dec Jan Feb March of action Being taken

10 11 12 13 14 15 16
 - 70 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

2.48 When intimation is received from the Postmaster of the loss
theft or destruction before issue of a P.O. Certificate from or at the Post
Office, or after it has been issued and before delivery to the purchaser
(Vide Rule 565(2) of the Posts and Telegraphs Manual, Volume VI. Part
II) a suitable remark should be made against, the number in the stock and
Issue Register under tee J.A.O. initials, and a certificate of non-
encashment of the certificate should be issued to the Head of the Circle
concerned, inviting a reference to the Postmaster's intimation of loss etc.
of the certificate. A report of the loss etc. of the certificates should also be
made immediately by express letter to other Heads of Circles, stating the
full particulars of the lost, stolen, spoiled or destroyed certificates so that
the letter may notify the loss in their circular to prevent its encashment.

A similar report of loss etc. of the certificate from the custody of the
Accounts Office should also be made by Express letter to the Heads of
Circles.

Declaration in lieu of lost cash Certificates

2.49 Deleted

2.50 Deleted

2.51 When a declaration is received after discharge, the date of its

discharge should be noted in the relevant declaration register in addition
to the postings in the Issue Register concerned. After note, the relative
declaration case should be filed along with the discharged declaration. In
cases where more declarations than one are issued in a single case, and not
discharged simultaneously the declaration cases should be filed with the
declaration discharged list.

2.52 In respect of safe custody acknowledgement the declaration in

lieu thereof will be issued by the Circle Postal Accounts Office in Form
D.G. (PA)-331 in cases where acknowledgements have been reported as
lost by the holders, through the Postmaster. For issuing declaration
necessary verification may be made from the Registers of Safe Custody
 - 71 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

acknowledgements.

2.52-A When a Post Office Certificate for which Duplicate

Certificate has been issued is received in the Circle Postal Accounts
Office as per provisions of Rule 567(8) and 573(1) of Posts and
Telegraphs Manual, Volume VI (Part II) with the voucher list, the voucher
list examiner should, after check, get the Certificate perforated
immediately and hand it over to the Group Supervisor. The Group
Supervisor should submit the same to the Branch Officer through the
Junior Accounts Officer for destruction. The note of destruction will be
kept in the Stock and Issue Register. The Branch Officer should destroy
the Certificate and endorse a certificate “destroyed by me” in the remarks
column of the stock and Issue Register.

2.53 When a P.O. Certificate which has been spoiled in the P.O.
before issue is received from the P.O. with the monthly journal of P.O.
Certificates issued (Vide Rule 564 of P&T Manual Volume VI, Part II) it
should immediately be entered in the Register of spoiled certificates in
Form D.G. (PA)-333 and a remark “spoiled” made in the Stock and Issue
Register against the serial number of the Certificate by the voucher list
examiner. The Register along with the Stock and Issue Register should be
submitted to the J.A.O. for attesting the entry in the Stock and Issue
Register, and submit the Register (Form DG(PA)-333) to the Accounts
Officer for destruction of the Certificate. A.O. should destroy the
certificate and endorse a certificate “Destroyed by me” in the remarks
column of the Register.

If such certificates are received very frequently from any Post

Office, the Postmaster's attention should be drawn to them and a report
also made to the Head of Circle for suitable action.

Treatment of unclaimed balances· of P.O. Certificates

2.54 Unlike the other forms of Govt. Securities the unclaimed

balances of Postal Certificates should be transferred direct to revenue in
March Final Accounts of third year after the year's accounts in which the
 - 72 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

certificates mature. As an illustration, the balance of certificates maturing

in 1963-64 will become due for transfer to revenue in March Final
Accounts of 1967. In respect of each financial year, the outstanding as per
Circle Balance Sheet may be adjusted directly at Circle Postal Accounts
level only by credit to the Minor Head ‘101-Unclaimed Deposits’ under
the Major Head ‘0075-Miscel1aneous-General Services’. The outstanding
by actual count as per Stock and Issue Register shou1d, however, are
agreed with the balances as shown in the Circle Balance Sheets in the
financial year in which the final balance of a complete series is adjusted.

Subsequent payments in respect of these Post Office Certificates

should be posted in the Issue Register concerned and every month the
payments thus posted should be debited directly by operating the Minor
head ‘0075-Miscellaneous General Services-900 deducts refund’.

A broadsheet in respect of outstanding amounts of Post Office

Certificates booked under the Minor head ‘2-Uncllaimed Deposits’ under
the Major head ‘0075-Miscellaneous General Services” showing:-

(i) The amount credited to the Minor head ‘2-Unc1aimed

Deposits’ under the Major Head ‘0075’ in respect of each issue/series as
the case may be,

(ii) subsequent payment thereof in respect of each month, and

(iii) The resulting balance of each month, should be maintained

and attached to the first page of the Circle Balance Sheet.

Result of Checking

2.55 (a) Trivial irregularities e.g. entries in Issue Lists not made in
serial order etc. discovered during check should be entered in half margin
memorandum (Forms No. D.G. (PA)-325 and 325A), which will be
returned by Postmasters in original with their replies noted thereon.
Irregularities of an important nature should be entered in an objection
statement in Form D.G. (PA)-335 or in a half margin memorandum in
 - 73 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

Form D.G. (PA)-33G, as the case may be. These generally fall under
classes mentioned below:

(1) Objections due to want or incompleteness of vouchers etc. These

are removable on receipt of the voucher or on suitable
explanation.

(2) Objections all the score of excess payments or short credits.

These are removed on the amount being recovered. Until such
recovery is reported, the amounts are included under “Postal
Advances”.

(3) Amounts of excess recoveries from or short payments to

investors. These are liable to be demanded by the investors at
any subsequent time and should therefore be included under
“8446-Postal Deposits”.

(b) Short or overpayments of interest of Re. 1/- and less need not be
communicated to Postmasters. Recoveries of overpayments may be waived
by the Accounts Officer in charge and the order recorded on the back of
the discharged P.O. Certificates. Similarly short payments may also be
recorded on the back of the P.O. Certificates under the signature of the
Account Officer in charge, no action being taken for refund of the
amounts to investors.

(c) Short credits or overpayments on account of P.O. Certificates

exceeding Rs. 10 should be reported to the Head of the Circle.

2.56 When all attempts on the part of Post Office to pay the party or
parties concerned amounts short paid on account of interest on P.O.
Certificates prove unsuccessful the amounts objected to should be finally
adjusted by credit to “1201-Postal Receipts-other receipts 800 Postal
Receipts-Other items”, by debit to “8446 Postal Deposits-Short payments
on P.O. Certificates”.

2.57 Items of objections on account of over payments of sums

 - 74 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

exceeding Re. 1 but not exceeding Rs. 25 in respect of principal and/or

bonus/interest may be waived by Accounts Officer when the
correspondence thereon becomes protracted the recovery becomes
practically impossible and the items do not disclose any willful neglect of
duty on the part of any postal official and do not form one of a series
pointing to systematic fraud. Under similar conditions items exceeding Rs.
25 but not exceeding Rs. 75, items exceeding Rs. 75 but not exceeding Rs.
100, and items exceeding Rs. 100 may be waived under the orders of the
Deputy Director/Director of Accounts and the Postal Directorate (PA
Wing) respectively.

Objection Statements

2.58 The objection statement should be filled up as required in the

form, two copies being prepared on carbon paper. On completion of each
objection statement, the checker should submit it through the J.A.O. to the
Accounts Officer, who will sign the carbonised copy as laid down in Rule
94 of the Posts and Telegraphs Financial Hand Book, Volume I.

2.59 The approved objection statements should then be copied into

the circle objection book, Form No. D.G. (PA)-433 which collects
together for each circle, the amounts held under objection, the several
items for the month being numbered consecutively, in objection book.

2.60 Finally a reference should be made to the Register (Form D.G,

(PA)-436) posted in the Postal Accounts Section directly from the Cash
Accounts to see whether any item appearing in the P.O. Certificates
objection statement under issue has already been recovered or refunded.

If such a recovery or refund is traceable, the corresponding entry in

the objection statement should be cancelled, a note of the date of recovery
or refund being made against it and initialled by the J.A.O. The objection
statements should then be forwarded to the Postmaster concerned.

NOTE-- All the items in the Register of recoveries and refunds should be
scrutinised and adjusted before submission of the same to the Account Officer for
 - 75 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

review.

Return of Objection Statement

2.61 Postmasters are required to return an objection statement with

their explanations, not later than a fortnight from the date of which it is
received by them. A watch over the return of objection statements should
be maintained through the Circle Objection Book and reminders should be
issued whenever the return of an objection statement is delayed 4 days
beyond the time allowed, due regard being paid to the time spent in
transit.

2.62 If the explanation offered in regard to an objection is such as to

warrant the removal of the objection, its amount should be noted in the
column head “Finally passed”. Recoveries of overpayments and refunds of
short payments reported in the explanations should at once be traced in the
Register of Recoveries and Refunds prepared by the Postal Accounts
Section and, if traceable, the amount should be posted in the column
headed “Adjusted by recovery or Refund”. A brief note of the manner of
adjustment e.g. “On Postmaster's explanation” etc. should be made against
adjustments of amounts included under “Items Awaiting Clearance”.

2.63 Each entry of adjustment made in the Objection Book should

also be posted in the corresponding columns of the adjustment Register
[(Form D.G. (PA)-434)], and each entry, both in the Objection Book and
the Adjustment Register will be checked and attested by the J.A.O.

Closing the Objection Books

2.64 After all the objections relating to a month's account have been
posted; the objection book should be closed by pasting a printed “Closing
Slip” [(Form No. D.G. (PA)-435)] at the foot of the last page containing
an entry for the month. Each money column in the objection book and in
the adjustment Register should be totalled and the totals entered in the
proper cages of the closing slip.

NOTE-- The paid P.O. Certificates etc. received with the objection statements,
 - 76 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

should be handed over to the item workers concerned for proper filing who should
endorse a certificate on the objection statements to the effect that the documents have
been properly filed. The Junior Accountant should keep the objection statements
serially arranged in his custody till they are finally settled and sent to old Records at
the end of the year.

2.65 The total difference or errors found will then be adjusted by

transfer entries debiting and crediting the heads shown below:-

Name of Error Etc Account Heads

1. Short Credits in individual Debit “8553 Postal Advances over Payment on P.O.
P.O. Certificates or in the Certificates” and credit “802-Post office Certificate”
total of Journal

2. Excess credits on Debit “8002-107 Post Office Certificate” (deduct from

individual P.O. credit) and credit “846 Postal Deposits- Short
Certificates or on the total payments on Certificate
of Journal.

3. Overpayments on Debit “8553 Postal Advances Overpayments on

individual certificates or certificates” and (a) Credit “8002-107 {Post Office
on the total of Journal certificate Principal P.O. Certificates” (Deduct from
Debit).

(b) “8008-02 Interest Payments-Interest on “Saving

Certificates-Bonus on P.O. Certificates” (Deduct from
Debit).

4. Short payments on Debit (a) “8002-107 Post Office Certificates”

individual P.O. Principal.
Certificates or on the total
(b) “8008-02 Interest Payment- Interest on Saving
of Journal
Certificates” Bonus on P.O. Certificates” and credit
“8446 Postal Deposit-Short payments on P.O.
Certificates”.
 - 77 -

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

2.66 The brief amounts of credits and debits on account of “P&T

Advances Recoverable” and “P&T Deposits” shown in the objection book
should be reconciled with the amounts appearing in the Detail Book, brief
but clear explanations of the difference being given in the Broadsheets
maintained in the Section by Circles. The balances under these two heads
are also worked out month by month, in the Broadsheets of “Advances
Recoverable” and “Deposits”, which are submitted to the Accounts Officer
for review on the 30 th of every month.

Treatment of Undeliverable P.O. Certificates and Safe custody

Acknowledgement

2.67 When a P.O. Certificate or a safe custody acknowledgement is

returned by the Postmaster as undeliverable, the Accounts Office will keep
them in the safe custody of the Accounts Officer after noting the
particulars thereof in register maintained in manuscript for the purpose as
per specimen given below: - A note “In the Safe” should also be made
against the item in the Stock and Issue Register. The register should be
submitted to the Accounts Officer every time such a document is to be
kept in the safe.

Register of undelivered P.O. Certificate

No and date
of the letter
Serial No. Date of
Name of with which Name of
of PO Denomination issue of the
Office PO holder
certificates certificates
certificates
received

1 2 3 4 5 6
 78

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

No. and
date of Dated Initials
Register No Dated letter with
--------------------------
of the Initials which Remarks
J.A.O. A.O.
Certificates JAO/AO returned for
delivery to
investors

7 8 9 10 11

2.68 Unclaimed and undelivered cash and other certificates and safe
custody acknowledgements lying in the Custody of Accounts Offices
should be preserved for a period of 30 years from the date of their
maturity i.e. for 27 years after their value has been credited to General
Revenue under Para 2.54.

The Accounts Offices should prepare a list of all such Certificate etc.
which become due for destruction by the end of year and furnish the same
to the Postal Directorate in the first week of April for necessary action.
On receipt of a Postal Notice in this regard from the Directorate it should
be seen that the columns 1-9 in the Register, prescribed in Para 2.67 have
been duly filled in. The Certificates should then be destroyed in the
presence of the Accounts Officer the fact being noted in the said Register
of unclaimed certificates etc.

If any claim is received, the postmaster will forward the same to the
Accounts Office, referring to the relative D.G.'s P.O. circular certifying
what he has satisfied himself to the applicant's identity.

After verification with reference to the particular in the safe custody

register of unclaimed certificates etc. The Account Office will return the
documents with its authority for payment which show the amounts of
 79

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

principal and interest.

Record Arrangements

2.69 As soon as the postings of a month are completed and the

correctness of postings proved, the P.O. Certificates lists and the
discharged and cancelled P.O. Certificates pertaining thereto together with
those discharged at offices other than that of issue, will be tied in separate
bundles and arranged alphabetically and serially. The bundles should be
labelled with the name of the Head Post Office and the month of account.
They should be made over, once in six months to the Record Clerk who
will be responsible for their safe custody.

2.70 In order to safeguard against the loss of voucher in the old

record the bundles containing P.O. Certificates vouchers should be sealed
with wax in the presence of the J.A.O. by a special seal, kept for the
purpose by each J.A.O. of the C.C. Section (specimen-J.A.O./C.C.) before
handing over the records to Record Clerk. Thereafter only the sealed
bundles may be requisitioned from and returned to the Record Clerk
whenever required for reference in future.

The bundles should be opened and resealed after taking out; if

necessary the required voucher and keeping necessary check slip in its
place or vice-versa in the presence of the J.A.O. only.

In order, however to keep a record of as to by whom and for what

purpose the bundles was handled on subsequent occasions a separate label
card (D.G. (PA)-376-D), should be attached to the bundles.

Custody of Registers and Books Etc

2.71 The following important registers and books etc. are maintained
in the P.O. Certificates Section:-

-Register of lost P.O. Certificates.

-Register of spoiled certificates.

 80

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

-Register of undelivered P.O. Certificates.

-Register of P.O. Certificates sent out.

-Objection Books.

-Register of Transfer Entries.

-Register of reconciliation of P.O. Certificates figures with Detail

Book.

-Register of transferred P.O. Certificates.

-Issue Registers.

-Guard files of invoices of P.O. Certificates.

-Broadsheet of balances under “P & T Advances Recoverable” and

“P & T Deposits”.

-Proof Sheet Register.

-Register for watching the disposal of half yearly statements.

-Register of abstract of issues and discharges.

-Register of discharges.

-Circle Balance Sheet.

-Classification slips.

-Classified abstract of P.O. Certificate discharged.

-Manuscript Register of Advice of Payment.

-Compilation for the annual verification of balances.

-Broadsheet of Proof Sheet Balance.

Statistical Returns

2.72 The actual number of transactions separately under “Issue”

and “Discharges” to the end of September, November, January, February
and March each year should be sent so as to reach the PA Wing of the
 81

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

Postal Directorate by the 25 th of the month following the month of

Account.

2.73 The Book Section of the P.A. Wing of the Directorate

compile the figures from the above settlement and send them to the S.T.T.
Section of the Directorate by the end of the month following the month of
Account. The Book Section of the P.A. Wing of the Directorate should
also furnish the S.T.T. Section of the Directorate with a statement
showing the actual under “Issues and Discharges” by the first week of the
2 nd month following the month of Account.

NOTE -- The statement is sent through Book or Statement Section where the
figures are consolidates in Form No. D.G. (PA)-495.
 82

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

ANNEXURE I

The postings of Issues and Discharges in the Stock and Issue

Registers should be made in the following manner:-

(i) Issues and Discharges of the current months should be posted

in the Stock and Issue Registers as at present i.e. month and
years should be noted therein. The months may by indicated by
alphabet or by numerical numbers as may be convenient and
decided by the Head of the Office.

(ii) When un-posted Issues and Discharges of previous month; are

posted in the Stock and Issue Register in a subsequent month,
there should be a numerator and denominator (in the
second/third column). The numerator should show the month of
issue or discharge and the denominator the month of actual
posting in the Stock and Issue Register.

(iii) When certificates are issued in lieu of cancelled certificates or

for the undischarged value of partially discharged certificates,
the postings in the Stock and Issue Register should also be done
in the above manner. The numerator should show the original
month of issue and the denominator the month in which fresh
certificates are issued. A suitable explanatory remark should
also be made in the remarks column to show that the issues are
in lieu of cancelled or for the discharged value of partially
discharged certificates.

(iv) Similarly, when certificates are cancelled against the posting of

the minus issues in the Stock and Issue Register, there should
be suitable explanatory remarks in the remarks column of the
Stock and Issue Register.

(v) The Clerk should first post in the Stock and Issue Registers the
Issue and Discharges of the current month. Thereafter he
 83

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

should post therein the un-posted Issues and Discharges of

previous months which he can post in the current month. The
particulars of such items should be taken from the registers of
un-posted items. He should then note in the register of
cancelled certificates [form D.G. (PA)-34l] the particulars of (i)
all certificates issued in other P.Os. but cancel1ed in his P.O.
(ii) all fresh certificates issued in his P.O. in lieu of Certificates
issued by other P.Os. He should first post in his Stock and Issue
Register, the fresh certificates issued in his P.O. Thereafter he
should pass on the register of cancelled certificates together
with certificates issued in other P.Os. but cancelled in the P.Os.
which he is dealing with to other Clerks for posting the minus
issue for cancelled certificates or to the remittance clerks for
passing on the debit (according as the certificates were
originally issued in the same Circle or in a Foreign Circle).
Similarly, the certificates discharged in his P.O. but which were
issued in other P.Os. in the same Circle or Foreign Circle
should also be handed over to the Clerk concerned for
necessary action as described above. A few items of Issues and
Discharges of the current month may remain un-posted for
some reason or other. The details of such items should be
copied in the register of un-posted items. The remittance clerk
will hand over to the Clerk all the certificates received by him
from other Accounts Offices as paid or cancelled and adjusted
by him during the: current month. The discharges and
cancellations should be posted in the Stock and Issue Registers
with necessary explanation remarks as stated in paragraphs (iii)
and (iv) above.

(vi) When all the issues and discharges have been posted in the
Stock and Issue Registers, the posting will consist of:-
 84

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

(1) Issues:-

(a) Issues of the current month posted in the current month.

(b) Un-posted issues of previous months posted In the

current month.

(c) Plus issues in lieu of canceled certificates and for the

undischarged value of partially discharged certificates.

(d) Minus issues for cancelled certificates.

(2) Discharges:-

(a) Discharges of the current month posted in the current

month.

(b) Un-posted discharges of the previous months posted in

the current month.

(c) Paid in other P.Os. of the same Circle or it foreign

Circle.

(d) Partially discharged certificates.

The total posting for each P.O. and for each of the above four classes
would then be determined by the prover by counting the posting of each of
the four classes in the Stock and Issue Register and posting them in the
proof sheet [D.G. (PA)-321]. The postings therein should be separate for
each of the above four classes under both issues and discharges.

The total of the issues and discharges of all denominations (for each
P.O.) put together should after converting the numbers into money value
be agreed with the credits and debits respectively for that P.O. in
Government Accounts (i.e. the Detail Book figures). For this purpose, the
total postings for all the above four classes and for all denominations for a
particular class of certificates for a P.O. should be transcribed in the
agreement sheet [Form D.G. (PA)-343]. The credit and debit for the month
appearing in the Government Accounts (i.e. DB figures) will consist of (1)
 85

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

cash and (2) transfer entry figures. While the cash figures would be for
each P.O., the transfer entry figures appearing in the Detail Book are for
the circle as a whole and not for each individual P.O. The TE figures
(after P.O. wise analysis of the Circle's total transfer entry figures) for
each P.O. and the cash figures for that P.O. should be noted in [form D.G.
(PA)-342]. The total of the Cash and transfer entry figures of a month
should be agreed with the total money value of the postings made in the
Stock and Issue Register in that month. Differences, if any, between the
two sets of figures should be explained in the agreement sheet [form DG
(PA)-343] according to the different classes of reasons (for instance, un-
posted items, total etc.). The individual items constituting the difference
should be noted separately for credit and debit in a variation sheet [form
D.G. (PA)-343A] and the items which have corresponding differences in
the current month or previous months should be linked for instances (1)
when certificates are issued by P.Os. ‘A’ are discharged in P.O. ‘B’ in the
same Circle, there will be corresponding and equal differences between
the postings in the Stock and issue Registers and the Detail Book figures
for both the P.Os, (DB more in one office and DB less in another). (2)
Certificates issued in one office, but cancelled in another office (3) un-
posted item of previous months posted during the current month. For such
of these items which cannot be linked in this manner appropriate action
for settling the differences should be taken by the Clerk in whose Post
office the difference arises.

The agreement sheet in [form D.G. (PA)-343] and the variation sheet
in form D.G. (PA)-343A should be submitted to the Sectional A.O. every
month.

(vii) After the postings in the Stock and Issue Register of a month
are agreed in form ‘F’ with the credit/debit of the month
appearing in the Government Accounts the issues and
discharges (posted in the agreement sheet) of all the P.Os. in a
 86

CHAPTER II POST OFFICE CERTIFICATES

Circle should be posted in a broad, sheet [form D.G. (PA)-343].

When the figures of all the P.Os. in a Circle are posted, the
total money value of the issues and discharges for the Circle, as
a whole, should be struck and agreed with the Circ1e wise
credits and debits of the Government Accounts (intimated by
Book Section). The Broadsheet Worm DG (PA)-344] would
show the month's issues and discharges and the balance issues
at the end of each month both in numbers as well as the
amount. Therefore; even during the course of the year with the
help of the postings in form D.G. (PA)-43A it will be possible
to reconcile periodically the broadsheet balance in form D.G.
(PA)-344 with the ledger balance (the balance in Government
Account). Further, when the certificates issued and out-
standings in the Stock and issue Register are periodically
counted, the (counted) out-standings after valuation will be
compared with the balance in the broadsheet [Form D.G. (PA)-
344]. Also the annual review of balances (paragraph 2.44)
would be conducted with reference to the balance in the
broadsheet. The broadsheet should be submitted to the B.O.
every month.
 87

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

CHAPTER III
INLAND MONEY ORDERS

General Outlines

3.1 The issue and payment of money orders constitute one of the
main activities of the Indian Post Office. The rules governing the issue
and payment of money orders prescribed by the, Government of India or
the Director General and the rates of commission on money orders are
contained in the Post Office Guide Part I.

3.2 Money order transactions are permitted at all Head and Sub
Post Offices and also at certain specified Branch Post Office subordinate
to them. The accounts of the latter are, however incorporated in those of
the former and the Head Post Office is responsible for submitting
consolidated accounts at its own transactions and the transactions of its
subordinate offices. The results of checking conducted in the Postal
Accounts offices are communicated to the Head Post Office which is
responsible for seeing that prompt action is taken for settling the
objections raised or remedying the defects pointed out by the Postal
Accounts Office.

The procedure prescribed by the Director-General, Postal Services

for the maintenance of accounts in connection with money order
transactions in the Post Offices and for the submission of account returns
pertaining thereto to the Postal Accounts Office are given in Chapter 7 of
the Post and Telegraphs Manual, Vol. VI.

3.3 The checking of money order transactions is conducted in the

Postal Accounts Offices at Calcutta (West Bengal), Delhi (Delhi circle),
Chennai (Tamilnadu), Nagpur (Maharashtra), Hyderabad (Andhra
Pradesh), Patna (Bihar), Jaipur (Rajasthan), Trivandrum (Kerala), Cuttack
(Orissa), Lucknow (U.P.), Bhopal (M.P.), Bangalore (Karnataka),
 88

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Ahamedabad (Gujarat), Amabal (Haryana), Kapurthala (Punjab), Simla
(H.P.) and Chatisgarh (M.P. & Bihar) each having, under its jurisdiction,
one or more Postal Circles. The distribution is given in Rule 83 of the
Financial Hand Book; Volume I. in distinguishing one Postal Accounts
Office from another, the Postal Accounts Office for the local Postal
Circles is referred to in this Chapter as Home Postal Accounts Office and
the other Postal Accounts, as Foreign Postal Accounts Offices. Similarly,
the Postal Circles under the jurisdiction of the Home postal Accounts
Office referred to as Home Circles and those under the jurisdiction of
Foreign Postal Accounts Office as Foreign Circles.

3.4 The checking of money orders consists in seeing that for

every paid money order, there is credit, in some Post Office for an
equivalent amount and that commission is correctly realised. Each Postal
Accounts Office is responsible for the Check and adjustment of all the
money orders issued each month in the Post Offices under its jurisdiction.
The month of issue is considered as the unit of account.

3.5 Each Postal Accounts office receives lists of money orders

issued (referred to hereafter as issue lists) from the Head Post Offices
situated within its jurisdiction, the money orders being numbered in
consecutive series. It also receives lists of money orders paid (referred to
hereafter as paid lists) together with the paid orders, from all Head Post
Offices, whether within its jurisdiction or not, sorted according to each
month of issue.

NOTE -- All paid orders are impressed with distinctive stamps indicating the
account month and the Postal Accounts office of issue.

3.6 The issue list which are received un-totalled and the values
of the Paid Money Orders in respect of Paid Lists am independently
totalled by means of Comptometers and the machine totals are reconciled
with those shown by the Postmasters in the Abstracts of totals. The
 89

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

amount of commission realised is noted against each money order in the
Issue list and a check as to its correctness is exercised in respect of each
period of account. The paid money orders are sorted according to Head
and Sub Offices of Issue and in serial order for each office and month of
issue. They are then checked with the entries of credits in the issue lists
concerned and ticked off in token of check. Any discrepancies found are
adjusted by clearing the Indian Money Order Head (month of issue
concerned) to a debit head, “8553-Postal Advances-001-01 Postal
Advances-02-0001-Overpayment or Short credit on Money Orders” or
“8446-Postal Deposits-001-01-Postal Deposits-6-0001-Short payments or
Excess Credit on Money Orders” and the head Postmaster are addressed to
settle the objections.

3.7 Money Orders are current only for two months; the month of
issue and the next month, after which they become void (vide Rule 300 of
the Posts and Telegraphs Manual. Volume VI). Only money orders paid
within currency are entered in the Paid Lists referred to in Para 3.5. Void
Money Orders that cannot be paid are sent to the Home Postal Accounts
Office by the Post Offices of issue duly entered in a list (known as void
list) separately for each month of issue. These money orders are then
checked with the Issue list and filed. Void money orders paid are received
duly entered in schedules and the amounts of these orders are debited to
the Inland Money Order head. The vouchers are debit checked with the
Issue list or in the Register of unpaid money orders.

3.8 Deleted.

3.9 In the books of the Department, the total amount of the

Home Circle Issue List for a particular month is taken to the credit of the
head “Inland Money Orders--month of issues”. The total payments of
money orders by the Home Circle Post Offices are likewise taken in the
first instance to the debit of the same head for the months of issue
 90

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

concerned. But the amounts of money order paid in respect of Foreign
Circle issues are transferred through the “Money Order Remittance” head
to the Foreign Postal Accounts Offices concerned by reduction of the
debits under the inland Money Order head, so that the balance may
represent the debit on account of Home Circles issues only. Similarly,
payments transferred from the Foreign Postal Accounts Offices in respect
or Home Circle issues are debited to the Inland Money Order head by
credit to the “Money Order Remittance” head. The result of these adjust-
ments as well as the adjustment referred to in Para 3.6 and 3.7 will be to
bring together the credits under the head “Inland Money Orders” on
account of issues of the Home Circle Post Offices for a month and the
debits in different months corresponding to these issues. The difference
between the credits, and debits for a particular month of issue represents
the liabilities of Government as ascertained from the books of the
Department, the total credit being always more than the total debit.

3.10 If the totals of the unpaid void M.O.s together with the
amount of M.O.s detained by the Postmasters under Rule 289 of P&T
Manual Vol. VI-Part I represents liability of the Government\Department
of Posts.

3.11 The head “Inland Money Orders” relating to a particular

financial year is kept open in the books for three financial years (vide para
3.77) and the balance i.e. the excess of actual receipts over payments,
under this head will lapse to Government at the close of the third financial
year and be transferred to the revenue head “Forfeited Money Orders”.
This does not, however, prevent subsequently payments of the money
orders, should claims in respect of them be established.

Returns Due

The following accounts of Inland Money Order are rendered by each

Head Post Office to the Postal Accounts Office:-
 91

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

(l) Daily or Bi-monthly lists of money orders issued together with
the Non-payable Telegraphic Money Order requisitions to the
Home Postal Accounts Office.

NOTE: -- In the case of Bi-monthly lists, the 1 st period list embrace the
transactions from 1 st to 15 th and the 2 nd period lists from 16 th to the end of the month.
In the case of sub-offices the transactions of the period which can be incorporated in
the accounts of the Head Office from 1 st to 15 th and from 16 th to end of the month
constitute the 1 st period and 2 nd period lists.

(2) Daily or Bi-monthly lists of money orders paid together with the
paid money orders - to the Home Postal Accounts Office in
respect of money orders issued at Home Circle.

(3) Separate Daily or Bi-monthly lists of money orders paid together

with the paid money orders for the respective Postal Accounts
Offices for all Foreign Circles.

NOTE 1 -- The note under clause (1) above applies to the Bi-monthly lists of
money orders paid.

NOTE 2 -- Ordinarily two paid lists are received in each Postal Accounts office
from each Post Office, viz. one relating to the issues of the month of payment and the
other relating to the issues of the previous month. But, as the Head Office cash
accounts are, except in March, not kept open to receive credits and debits for the sub-
office transactions of the last few days of the months, payments may sometimes precede
credit. In these and similar other cases, a third Paid list is received relating to the issues
of the month following the month of payment.

(4) Bi-monthly abstracts of daily totals of money orders issued to the

Home Postal Accounts Office.

(5) Bi-monthly abstracts of daily totals of money orders paid in

respect of issues at Home Postal Accounts Office to the Home
Postal Accounts Offices.

(6) Bi-monthly abstracts of daily totals of money orders paid in

 92

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

respect of issues of each Foreign Postal Accounts Office to the
Home Postal Accounts Office.

NOTE 1 -- The abstracts show the details for each period. In the abstract for the
nd
2 period, the total for the 1 st period is brought forward and the monthly total struck.

NOTE 2 -- The abstract of daily totals of money orders paid is prepared for each
month of issue.

(7) A Monthly summary of money orders issued-to the Home Postal

Accounts Office.

(8) A Monthly summary of money orders paid in respect of money

orders issued in the Home Postal Accounts Office and money
orders issued in foreign circles to the Home Postal Accounts
Office.

NOTE 1 -- Pertaining to each month of issue there is a monthly summary of

money orders paid. The paid lists mentioned in Clause (2) & (3) are rendered to the
Home Postal Accounts Office. The paid summaries of money orders paid in respect of
issues at Home circle and money orders paid in respect of issues at foreign circles are
also sent to the Home Postal Accounts Office. The summaries relating to Home Circle
issue are described as “Home Summaries” and those relating to foreign circle issues, as
“Foreign summaries”. The figures of the Foreign summaries also appear in the home
summaries side by side with the Home Summary figures and consolidation is made, the
grand total of which should agree with the entry in the Cash Account.

NOTE 2 -- The summaries will be received in Postal Accounts Offices in

separate registered covers, addressed by the Head of Offices to the Junior Accounts
Officer of M.O. section (Summary Group). These should invariably be got impressed
with the date stamp of receipt and reviewed by the Junior Accounts Officer M.O.
Section himself under his dated initials. For this purpose, a separate date stamp should
be provided to the Junior Accounts Officer who should get it impressed on the
summaries in his presence. The summaries should then be made over to the summary
Group where those should be entered Circle-wise in a Register of summaries in his
presence. The summaries should then be made over to the dealing Junior Accountant.
 93

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

MONTH OF ACCOUNT

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl No. Name of the HO Due date of Particulars of the receipt of the summary
The receipt of -------------------------------------------------
Summary No of the letter Date of the Date receipt
With which received letter in section
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 2 3 4(a) 4(b) (c)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Delay in receipt to be adjusted Date initial of the junior Accountant Remarks
With reference Col. 4(c) receiving the summary
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 6 7
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The Register should be maintained separately for Issue Summaries

and Paid Summaries. After 5 th of the month it should be submitted daily to
the Junior/Assistant Accounts Officer, M.O. (Summary Group) weekly to
the Junior/Assistant Accounts Officer, M.O. Section and on 15 th and the
last day of the month to the Branch Officer to bring to his notice the
Number of Offices from which the documents have not been received
showing inter-alia, the action taken to call for the same. The submission
memo bringing out the position of outstanding and action taken thereon
may be constructed either at the beginning or at the end of the registers
separately from the main body. Telegraphic or D.O. reminders should
continue to be issued invariably to the defaulting offices till the returns
are received.

(9) Monthly lists of void money orders supported by unpaid money

orders that became void.

NOTE -- The lists are prepared by the Head Office of issue and submitted to the
Home Postal Accounts Office. The Office, at which the money orders are payable
 94

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

returns money orders that, cannot be paid within currency to the office of issue for
mission to the Postal Accounts Office.

(10) Separate schedules of void money orders paid, supported by the

paid void orders, one for each Postal Accounts Circle of issue.

NOTE -- Two separate schedules relating to the 1 st and 2 nd period lists of

payments are submitted by the Head Postmaster in covers addressed to the Money Order
section of the Home Postal Accounts Office.

With a view to bring to the Immediate notice of the Postmaster

concerned, the absence of a document, the portioners concerned should
examine the returns as soon as they are received in the Postal Accounts
Office to see that they have been received in a complete form. The daily
returns should be distributed to the Portioner's sufficiently in advance to
enable them to exercise this check. Watch over the receipt of the returns
should be kept through the distribution registers prescribed in note 1
below para 3.16 and para 3.26 of the Postal Accounts Manual, Volume II
on the day following the expiry of the due date of receipt of return, the
particulars of wanting returns from these registers should be noted in a
manuscript register maintained for the purpose (1) for watching the receipt
of returns from Home Circle Postal Accounts Office and (2) for watching
the receipt of returns from the Other Postal Accounts Offices as per
specimen given below:-

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. No. Period Name of Particulars of No. & date of Actual Date Date of Remarks
office returns not reference of receipt completion
received of checking
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The register should be submitted to the Accounts Officer in-charge
through the J.A.O. /A.A.O. in the first week of every month.
 95

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Dates for submission of accounts and completion of Check

3.13 The dates for the submission of the returns mentioned in

Para 3.12 are given in Chapter 7 of the Posts and Telegraphs Manual
Volume VI.

The due dates for completion of the checking of lists, abstracts and
summaries of money orders issued and paid, void list and schedules of
void money orders paid are as follows:-

(1) List of Money orders issued together

with First Period, abstract of dally 15th of the next mouth.
totals.

(2) List of money orders paid together

with the Second period, abstract of 28th of the next month.
daily totals.

(3) Monthly Summary of money orders

15th of the second month following.
issued.

(4) Monthly summary of Money Orders

15th of the second month following.
paid

(5) Compilation of figures in forms [D.G.

(PA)-424 to 426] and issue of objection End of the Second Month following.
statement.

(6) List of void Money Orders 20th or the fourth month foHowing.

(7) Schedule of Void Money Orders paid (First period 3 rd of the next month).

(Second period 18 th of the next month).

Checking of issue lists and issue abstracts

3.14 The issue list shows the serial number, amount and date of
 96

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

issue of each money order, the office of payment, and the commission
realised on the transactions.

In the Postal Accounts Office these issue lists are received un-
totalled although their totals are shown in the Abstract of daily totals and
consolidation sheets.

3.15 On receipt in the Section, the abstract of daily totals and

consolidation sheets accompanying the Issue Lists should he detached and
kept in the custody of the Checker, Issue List Section, so that the Machine
operators may not have access to them. The untotalled Issue Lists should
then be distributed to the machine operators, who should take up the lists
and cast totals in each sheet date by date, of the amounts of money order
with the help of the machine called “Comptometer”. When the transactions
of a day run over more than one sheet, the totals of the sheets may be
consolidated taking a grand total for the date concerned.

NOTE -- For this purpose a register in manuscript should be maintained by the

Supervisor, Issue List Group for each circle in which the names of Head Offices and
sub offices in that circle should be entered. The abstract checker should note the
opening, the closing number of each period in the register by a reference to the Issue
lists. The figures so entered in the register should be transcribed at the top of the
abstracts of the following period by the abstract checker concerned.

3.16 The Issue lists, after they are totalled by the Machine
operators should be made over to the Abstract checkers along with the
relevant abstract of daily total and consolidation sheets (See para 3.15).

An abstract checker should compare the totals of the Issue Lists with
those in the Abstracts, and in case of a discrepancy flag the sheet
prominently in which the discrepancy lies and include the discrepancies
detected by him in his daily progress report book. He should also see
whether any of the Issue Lists contains totals shown by P.M. in
contravention of Rule 248(3) of the P&T Manual Vol. VI for pointing out
the same to the Postmaster concerned. He should also see the totals of the
 97

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

abstract for each period noting the difference as a plus or minus entry
below the totals. The closing numbers of the previous list and the list in
hand of each office (Head and Sub Offices) will be entered by the Abstract
Checker at the top of the respective abstracts in order to see that the total
number money orders issued in a particular period for each Office (by
deducting the closing number of the previous lists from that of the list in
hand) agrees with that shown in the abstract. For this purpose a register in
manuscript should be maintained by the Supervisor, Issue List Group for
each circle in which the names of Head Offices and Sub Offices in Circle
should be entered. The abstract checker should note the opening and
closing numbers of each period in the register by a reference to the Issue
Lists. The figures so entered in the register should be transcribed at the
top of the abstracts of the following period by the abstract checker
concerned. The abstract checker should tick off the entries of the total
number of Money Orders in the Abstracts, in case of agreement. In case of
disagreement, however, he should check and verify by actual count the
number Of Money Order issued for each date and note the discrepancies
prominently by plus or minus entries as the case may be after ticking off
the entries of the numbers against dates that agree. He should also see
with reference to the closing number of the previous list that the
commencing number of each list is correct and examine the sequence of
the series of numbers of money orders issued, in the Issue List and see
that no break in the series of numbers has occurred. In case of such a
break, the Postmasters should be asked to explain the cause thereof.

The abstract checker should ensure that for each Telegraphic Money
Order issued, Telegraphic Money Order requisition in ordinary M.O. form
has been received along with the Issue List.

The Abstract checker should check commission on the Money Orders

in the issue Lists (vide Para 3.18). He should also see that the commission
has been correctly entered relatively to the amount of each money order in
 98

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

the Issue Lists, that the totals of the “Commission” column are correct and
that the omission of an entry of commission is duly explained by the
letters P.S. or T.S. (Postal or Telegraphic Service) or C.O.D. (trade charge
money orders) or F.R. (Family remittances). An additional check should
be exercised to see that the total commission credited in the Cash accounts
is not less than 2.88 percent and approximates to 3.2 percent of the total
amount of money orders issued. The check should be exercised on the
basis of circle figures, i.e. value of money orders including Postal Service,
Telegraph Service, etc. money orders and the actual commission realised
and credited.

While checking abstracts for the second period, the Abstract checker
should also compare the figures of the first period with those brought
forward from the first period into the abstract for the second period and
bring to the notice of the Postmaster concerned, all irregularities detected
in the course of examination.

The abstract checker should ensure that for each V-SAT money order
issued the original Money Order Form has been received along with the
Issue list.

The credit in the Issue list will be verified in respect of all the
original Money Orders Forms and an entry V-SAT is recorded on the Issue
List in manuscript. This check is exercised cent percent in all the Postal
Accounts Offices.

NOTE 1 -- A register in manuscript with suitable columns showing the

distribution of work among with the Abstract checkers should be maintained by the
Accountant submitted to the Accounts Officer-in-charge through the J.A.O. on the 9 th
and 25 th of every month.

NOTE 2 -- A check should be done by the J.A.O. at the end of the completion of
checking of Issue List, in order to see that the Abstract checker has carefully examined
the sequence of the number of money orders issued. The result of the check should be
recorded in his Diary referred to in Para 3.126.
 99

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

3.16(A) Regarding the procedure for checking the accuracy Of the
work of the Abstract Checker, viz. checking receipt of Telegraphic Money
Order requisition in the Postal Accounts Office in support of the relevant
entry in the issue List prescribed in Sub-paragraph 3 of para 3.16 see
Annexure I to Postal Accounts Manual Volume I.

3.17(A) The Supervisor of the Machine group will receive the Issue
Lists from the Abstract checkers and settle the discrepancies in respect of
the sheets which have been flagged by them. The discrepancies, when
checked by him will consist of two classes:-

(i) The operators mistakes, and

(ii) Real difference, viz. short or excess credit afforded by

Postmasters.

(B) He will make a note of all operators’ mistakes in the Error Book,
to be maintained by him, against the name of each operator. A separate
sheet may be used for each month and the number of mistakes committed
by each operator may be totalled each month till the official year is
closed. The operators may be given a chance of rectifying, out of office
hours the errors committed by them and the mistakes so rectified need not
be entered in the error book. The rectification of the errors should be
watched by the Supervisor, Machine Group. The Error Book should be
consolidated and submitted to the Director/ Dy. Director of Accounts
(Postal), through the J.A.O. and the Accounts Officer in Charge, on the 7 th
of every month (see also Para 3.30.A).

(C) He will note the real differences in the Abstract and the Issue
Lists prominently by plus or minus entries for issue Of necessary
objection by the Summary Examiner.

(D) After the completion of the day's work, he should enter in his
diary, the number and nature of the discrepancies settled by him and also
 100

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

the cases of real differences found by him or checking and the facts of his
making necessary entries in the Error Book or the Abstract as the case
may be. The Diary should be submitted to the J.A.O. daily and to the
Accounts Officer in charge every Wednesday.

3.18 For the purpose of the check of commission, a broad sheet

should be maintained with two sub columns for each month, one for each
period of account. The result of the check of Money Order Commission
and review by supervisor should be recorded in the broad sheet and
submitted to the Branch Officer for review on the 7 th and 21 st of the month
following the month of account.

3.18-A For the purpose of seeing that service money orders are
issued only for bonafide departmental purpose, a check should be carried
out monthly. The checker of the Debit Check Section should satisfy
himself by reference to the purpose of remittance as noted on the money
orders themselves that they have been issued for bonafide departmental
purpose. If the purpose of the remittance is not noted on a money order it
should be ascertained by a reference to the Postmaster concerned. Replies
when received should be examined to see that the issue of a service money
order was justified. The result or the check should be noted against the
entries in a broadsheet which should be submitted monthly to the Account
Officer through the J.A.O.

3.19 In examining the Issue Lists of Field Post Office or other

offices to which, by special orders, the system of issue of money orders
free of commission has been extended, the items against which the
distinctive letters “F.R.” are noted in the “Commission” column of the
Issue list, should be picked out and compared with the entries in the
statement received from the Postmaster in respect of such free
remittances. The commission realisable on the value of money orders
entered in the statement should be carefully checked and totalled. The
 101

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

total amount of commission together with the number of money orders
should then be entered according to each period of account in a register in
Form No. D.G. (PA)-401, the figures for each office being separately
noted. At the close of the month, the register should be totalled and a bill
made out. The amount of the bill will be debited to the Defence or other
Department concerned by per contra credit to the head “Money Order
Commission”. The bill together with the certificates of the Commanding
Officer will be sent to the Controller, Defence Accounts concerned with
the settlement account in which the debit is raised against him. The
register in Form D.G. (PA)-401 should be submitted to the Accounts
Officer for review on the last day of the month following the month of
account.

NOTE -- The procedure laid down in the Para will remain inoperative in peace
time.

3.20 Whenever any discrepancy is noticed, a communication in

Form No. D.G. (PA)-400 should at once be made to the Postmaster
concerned pointing out the discrepancy.

Review

3.20A (a) The Supervisor of the Issue List group should review
daily the work of the abstract checker and he should affix his dated
signature on each sheet examined by him. He should record the results of
his review in his diary in Form D.G. (PA)-444.

(b) He should also review daily the correctness of the check of

Money Order Commission of the Lists checked by the Issue List
examiners and include the fact of review in his diary.

3.20-B The M.O. issue abstracts of each month, as checked under

Para 3.16 should be reviewed by the Supervisor and also the J.A.O. to see
that the corrections made in the 1 st period abstracts at the time of check
have been correctly carried over to the 2 nd period abstracts.
 102

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

For this purpose, a manuscript register with suitable columns “should
be maintained and submitted to the Branch Officer”.

Check of issue Summaries

3.21 After completion of the checking of abstract for both the

periods by the Abstract Checkers, they are made over to the Summary
Clerks. Before the summaries are taken up for check the total value and
commission as shown herein should be agreed with the credit in the Cash
Accounts under the heads “Money Orders issued” and “Commission on
Money Orders issued” respectively and Junior Accountant of the Postal
Accounts Section should make the entries “Agreed” and initial them.

3.21-A (a) The checking of the summaries should be conducted in

two stages, viz. (1) the totalling by machine of the monthly totals of the
abstracts for the second period and (2) reconciliation.

(b) The machine totalling of the Summaries is not required. The

Machine operator will go on with totalling the monthly totals including
the plus and minus entries as shown in the II period abstracts for the Head
Office and all the Sub Offices under it and enter on slips of paper of a
convenient size the consolidated totals for each Head Office, of the
number, value and commission separately for inland and telegraphic
money orders. Thus in dealing with the abstracts the operator will have to
total 6 items for each office, for example, if a Head Office has 20-sub
offices under it, he will have to total 126 items, including those of the
Head Office.

NOTE -- For the purposes of outturn the number of items done should be actually
counted.

(c) The consolidated totals thus worked out are then compared by the
Summary clerks with the corresponding totals in the Summary. The
discrepancies that may then be brought to light, are due either to the
operator's mistakes or to wrong totals in the Summary or to short or excess
 103

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

credits in value or commission. The Operator's mistakes should be
recorded in an error book maintained for the purpose in the summary
group. The operator may be given a chance of rectifying out of office
hours the errors committed by him, and the mistakes so corrected need not
be entered in the “error book”. The discrepancies should be reconciled by
the Summary clerks by comparing the entries in the abstracts with the
corresponding entries in the Summaries.

NOTE 1 -- In working out the actual outturn, the number of offices in the
Summaries should be multiplied by 3 irrespective of the fact whether there is any
transaction in an office or not.

NOTE 2 -- Progress reports showing the number of summaries, the number

checked daily and the number outstanding should be maintained by the. Summary
Clerks.

3.22 Any discrepancy found in the totals of the lists and brought
out in the summary or discovered between the total of the summary and
the credit in the Cash Account should be brought to the notice of the Head
Postmaster in the form of an objection statement for adjustment if no reply
to the enquiry as per Para 3.20 has been received in the meantime.

NOTE 1 -- If there is a difference in the credits for value with a corresponding

difference in the credits for commission, such items will be entered in a Register in
form D.G. (PA)-401, and a single transfer entry made in a month for each Postal Circle
for the net difference.

NOTE 2 -- Difference on a particular summary or sums not exceeding Re. 1 will

be adjusted in the manner indicated in Para 3.56.

Statistics Of money orders issued

3.23 The figures of the summaries, after they are checked, will be
posted for statistical purpose in the Register of Inland money order
transactions for the month and Circle concerned (Form D.G. (PA)-402].

Check of paid lists

3.24 The paid list contains details of the date of payment,

 104

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

number, office of issue and amount of each money order, telegraphic and
non-telegraphic money orders being shown separately under respective
money columns. The money orders accompany the list arranged in the
order of the entries in the list. The money column of the list is totalled
daily and the total is transcribed in the Abstract of daily totals which
accompanies the list for each period. The abstract shows a total for the
period and the total of the first period is carried over to the Abstract for
the second period of the month to arrive at the monthly total. The monthly
totals shown in the Abstract for the second period of the month in respect
of transactions of the head office and its several sub-offices are then
transcribed into the Summary.

3.25(a) The examination of the paid lists is conducted in three

stages, viz. (1) the arranging of the paid money orders (2) the totalling by
machine, of the value of paid money orders and (3) the reconciliation. The
work in the first and third stages is done by non-machine worker while the
work in the second stage is conducted by machinists on a Comptometer.
The men employed to work in three stages are respectively called (1) the
arrangers, (2) the machine operators, and (3) the reconcilers, and
miscellaneous checkers.

(b) The work of reconciliation is done in two stages (i) reconciliation

of discrepancies and (ii) other incidental items of work by two sets of men
called reconcilers, and miscellaneous checkers respectively.

Arranging the paid money orders

3.26 On receipt of the Money Order Paid returns from the Post
Offices through the Record Department. the distributing checker in the
paid List Section will make over the Paid Lists together with the bundles
of Paid Money Orders and the Abstracts of daily totals, to the arrangers in
the usual way through a Distribution Register D.G. (PA)-406
 105

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

NOTE -- Paid Lists containing not more than 100 items should be made over,
together with the relative abstracts and Paid Money Orders, to the reconcilers for
examination by mental process without being handled by the arrangers and machine
operators.

3.27 The duties of the Arrangers are:-

(a) to see that the Paid Lists, the Paid Money Orders and the
Abstracts received are intended for the Home Postal Accounts
Office concerned;

(b) to compare the Paid Lists and Abstracts with the printed slip,
received with the paid returns, showing the names of Sub Post
Offices arranged alphabetically under the Head Post Office, and
to arrange accordingly if found misarranged;

(c) to separate the paid lists, the Abstracts and the Paid Money order
bundles of the different months of issue (current, previous and
next month);

(d) to arrange the paid money orders in order of their dates of

payment for each office (Head and Sub), the Money Orders
relating to Sub Office payments being also arranged
alphabetically; and

(e) finally to arrange the paid money orders in convenient batches of

50 to 100, separating slips being used to prevent different
batches being mixed up. This work is done in accordance with
the principles laid down in Para 3.28.

NOTE -- In the case of Post Offices rendering daily returns the work of the first
and third stages is done without the abstract of daily totals which is generally received
later.

3.28(a) In the case of being Head Offices, the Paid money orders
which are entered in 2 or 3 sheets of the paid list should form one batch
and a separating slip should be placed just after the money order relating
 106

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

to the last entry of the 2 nd or 3 rd sheet concerned as the case may be.

(b) In the case of the money orders paid by pay order in the Head and
Sub Offices and also in the cases of Revenue and Government Money
Orders the paid money order vouchers should be arranged in batches of 50
or so either by combining the vouchers of smaller pay order or R.M.O. or
G.M.O. lists Or by splitting up those of big pay order or R.M.O. or
G.M.O. in lists in convenient batches as clause (a) above, care being taken
that the last voucher in the batch corresponds with the last entry of the
sheet of the pay order or R.M.O. or G.M.O. list concerned.

NOTE -- The fact of combining and splitting up pay order, R.M.O. and G.M.O.
lists by the arrangers should be noted by them in the Paid List concerned, for
information of the Reconciler, this note being indicated simply by a horizontal line in
red ink drawn after the last item of each month.

(c) In the cases of Sub Offices, the vouchers should be arranged

according to dates of payment, when the number of money orders paid in a
day is about 50.

(d) In the case of big Sub Offices when the number of money orders
paid in a day exceeds 100, the money orders should be arranged as in
clause (a) above.

(e) In the case of Sub Offices with small number of transaction, the
vouchers relating to the entire period of account should be arranged in one
batch provided the number of money orders for that period is about 50. If
the number exceeds 100, the procedure in Clause (a) above should be
followed.

(f) In the case of money order paid returns relating to Foreign Postal
Accounts Circles, the money orders for the whole office (Head and Sub
Offices combined) should be arranged in one or two batches of about 50
vouchers, necessary care being taken to see that the last money order of
the batch corresponds with the last entry in the paid list sheet concerned.
 107

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

(g) In the case of offices where the number of paid money orders in a
day or for several days together does not exceed 100, vide Clause (e) and
(f), the arrangement of Money Orders in batches of 50 to 100 should be
made with reference to the Abstract of Daily Total where necessary :-

3.28A In the course of arranging an arranger should:-

(i) Ensure that the Bi-monthly abstracts of daily totals of money

orders paid in respect of issues of each Foreign Postal Accounts
Office along with the paid lists and money order vouchers are
received in the Home Postal Accounts Office for arranging

(ii) Issue calls, ordinary and telegraphic, in case of part of the paid
list or bundle of paid money orders be wanting.

NOTE -- A pay order or R.M.O. or G.M.O. list should be reckoned as a part of

the paid list for the purpose of this rule.

(iii) Issue letters to the Postmasters concerned, noticing irregularities

in the preparation and submission of paid list, paid money
orders etc.,

(IV) Bring to the notice of the Postmasters concerned or other higher

Postal officials, other irregularities which generally occur in the
preparation and submission of Revenue Money Orders and Lists
thereof.

3.29 When the arranging of the paid money orders is completed,

the arranger should place a slip [Form D.G. (PA) -405 duly filled in, on
each money order bundle containing not mare than 1,500 vouchers the
number of money orders in each bundle being ascertained with reference
to the total number of money orders entered in the abstract of daily totals.

The paid lists and abstracts should, after the arrangement is

completed be made over to the Distributing Checker for safe custody so
that the machine operators may not have access to them.
 108

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

A note should also be recorded in red ink under the initials (If the
arrangers on the back of the last page of the list showing the name of the
office of payment, the month or months of issue and payment, the period
or date of account and the number of money orders, thus:-

“Barrackpur-I Period May/June-500, the numerator denoting the

month of issue, and the denominator the month of payment”,

Totalling by Machine

3.30(a) On receipt of bundles of arranged paid money orders through

the distributing checker, the machine operators will go on with totalling
the values of paid money orders. Whenever a separating slip is reached or
the last batch in a bundle is finished the machine should be stopped and
the totals, as recorded therein, should be noted by dates or in lump, as the
case may be, against each (Head or Sub) Post office, on slips of paper of a
convenient size. In case, however of Head and Sub Offices, where the
daily transactions run through several pages in the Paid Lists and the Paid
Money Orders of a date are arranged in more than one batch, a
consolidated total for each date should also be cast by the operator. Thus
the machine operators will prepare an abstract of daily totals
independently of the totals shown by the Postmaster either in the paid list
or the Abstract of daily totals.

(b) Before or after using the machine, the machine operators are
required to see to the general outlook of the Paid Money Orders as to their
genuineness and to see that there has been no tampering with the dates of
payments of the Money orders. They are also required to see that no
money orders or a portion thereof has been so badly mutilated as to render
the money order valueless as documentary. Such money orders should be
entered in a register to be maintained in manuscript with suitable columns
and brought promptly to the notice of the Branch Officer-in-Charge
through the JA.O. in charge of the Paid List group, money order Section,
 109

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

for orders. Further action taken should also be noted in the register.

(c) The following classes of irregularities, which the machine

operators generally come across in their work, should be reported by them
to the post masters concerned.

(i) Indistinct impression or non-impression of oblong money order

stamp on payment.

(ii) Non-detachment of acknowledgement portion of money orders.

(iii) Non-entry of the value of the money order in the “Amount”

cage.

NOTE -- Cases in which memos of admission of payment are received instead of

paid money orders and do not contain the payee's signature should be brought to the
notice of the reconciler for report if necessary to the Head of the Circle concerned.

(d) In the “remarks” column of the daily report book the machine
operator should note the cases of disarrangement of money
orders by the “arrangers”.

(e) The bundles of Paid Money Orders together with the slips
containing machine totals should be made over to the
“Reconcilers” through the distributing checker.

Reconciliation of Discrepancies

3.30-A (a) On receipt of the bundles of Paid Money Orders together

with the slips showing machine totals, the Reconcilers should first
compare these totals with the totals shown by the Postmasters in the
Abstract of daily total and note the discrepancies, if any, in red ink, in the
manuscript slips prepared by the machine operators. The items that are
reconciled should be ticked off in the Abstracts in token of check.

(b) The reconcilers will then settle the discrepancies which are
generally due to the reasons noted below:-

(1) Excess totals by the operators over the Postmaster's totals, are
 110

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

due to:-

(i) Inclusion in total by the operator, of the Money Orders

issued in a Foreign Postal Accounts Circle, received with the
paid money orders bundle, mixed up with Home Circle
vouchers, without being charged in the Paid List.

(ii) Inclusion in total by the operator, of Home Circle vouchers

received without being charged in the Paid List.

(iii) Short charge in the Paid List on account of any particular

money order.

(iv) Mistake (short) in the total made by the Postmaster in the

Paid List or Abstract.

(v) Mistake in the total made by the machine operators. This may
be due to bad operation or to indistinct and illegible figures
on the Money Orders entered by Postmasters.

(2) Shortage in operators totals are due to: --

(i) Wanting Money Orders.

(ii) Excess charge in the Paid List on account of any particulars

money order.

(iii) Double charge on account of any particular money order,

one charges not being supported by a voucher.

(iv) Mistake (excess) in the total made by tile Postmasters in the

Paid List or Abstract.

(v) Mistake in the total made by the machine operators.

(3) Discrepancies, short Of excess may also occur on account of

misarrangement of money orders by the Arrangers. Such
discrepancies are generally settled with corresponding excess or
short total on some other date or dates.
 111

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

(c) After noting the discrepancies as in clause (a) above, the
reconcilers should localise the mistake, ascertain its nature and then
compare the entries in the Paid Lists with the relevant vouchers in respect
of the date or batch in which there is a mistake. In this way the
discrepancies due to the reasons mentioned in items (i) and (iii) of sub-
clauses (1) and (2) of clause (b) above are settled.

(d) The short or excess totals by the Postmasters or by the machine

operators are settled by checking the totals of the Paid Lists by mental
process.

(e) To facilitate check the reconcilers should see the note made by
the arrangers in respect of the arrangement of the Money Orders in the
Paid Lists, Consolidation sheets or Abstracts. The manner of settlement of
each discrepancy should be noted on the reverse of the relevant
manuscript slip prepared by the machine operators.

3.30-B The reconcilers are required to:-

(i) Compare the first period abstracts when dealing with these of the
second period and to check the grand total of the amount column
of the second period abstracts;

(ii) Notice irregularities to the Postmaster on receipt of a currency

expired money order along with currency money orders;

(iii) Report to the S.P.O. (in Form No. D.G. (PA)-404 cases, pointed
out by machine operator, in which memos of admission of
payment do not contain the payee’s signature unless the S.P.O.
has already intimated orders on them to the Postal Accounts
Office;

(iv) Notice irregularities to the Postmaster for the Home Circle

Money Orders and foreign Circle Money Orders received without
being charged & without properly arranged and issue enquiry
 112

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

memos, relating to the same to the Foreign Postal Accounts
Offices and enter such money orders in the Register in Form No.
D.G. (PA)-403 (b) maintained in the paid list group.

NOTE -- A suitable note should be recorded in such cases in the Issue list or the
Register of unpaid Money Orders (as the case may be).

These Money orders should remain in the custody of the distribution

checker in the paid list group and when the charges are traced in the
departmental accounts or are received with check slips from other Postal
Accounts Offices, the relative money orders lying in the Paid list group
should be debit-checked and filed with the relevant bundles relating to
Void Money Orders, Advice of Transfer etc. after making a note in the
column 10 of the register in farm D.G. (PA)-403(b).

The Register mentioned in clause (iv) above should be submitted to

the Branch Officer in charge by the 15th of each month with a memo. of
submission showing the outstanding as per previous month, number of
cases added as well as the number of cases disposed of finally during the
month and the closing balance, which should be agreed with the
outstanding cases in the register.

(v) Prepare check slips (Form D.G. (PA)-403 for the wanting
money orders and keep them in the proper bundle and call
for them from the Postmaster by issuing objection statements
in Form D.G. (PA)-403(a). The objection statement should
be prepared in triplicate wherein all the wanting money
orders detected by the reconciler should be entered. The third
copy should be retained in the paid list group duly pasted in
a guard file for verification of the wanting money orders
subsequently received from the Postmasters so as to facilitate
their transfer to “Objection Book Group” for settlement
outstanding objections.
 113

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

NOTE -- The paid money orders or Memos. of Admission of payments received
with objection statements in such cases should be filed with their respective objection
statements after necessary check as to the General Outlook genuineness etc. as
contemplated in para 3.30(b) and (c) ibid.

(vi) The wanting money orders vouchers relating to foreign Postal

Accounts Offices (other than cases for want of voucher in their
entirety from any Post Office) will be taken up by the Head of
the Office, on getting information from the Branch Officer
M.O. Section, demi-officially with his counterpart at other
Postal Accounts Offices with full details of the voucher as
available in the paid list. Such reference will be given top
priority by the other Postal Accounts Offices and the issue list
of the concerned H.O or its S.O.s will be verified. The result of
such verification will be communicated as quickly as possible.
The cases which appear prima-facie to be a fraud or other
irregularity will be taken up with the Postmasters Generals of
the relevant circles for investigation.

NOTE -- Manuscript Registers with suitable heads will be maintained for the
purpose of prompt despatch and disposal of communications - one to watch the receipt
of reply from other Postal Accounts Offices and another for sending the letters/D.O.
communications/Telegrams to other Postal Accounts Offices. The Register should be
put up to the Head of the Office on the last working day of every month.

(vii) Notice irregularities [Form D.G. (PA)-400] to the Postmaster in

case of discrepancies (Short or excess charges) in the Paid list,
adjusted by them by addition to or deduction from a subsequent
date's totals, instead of by charge or credit in the cash account;

(viii) Notice irregularity statement to the Postmaster for other

irregularities in respect of paid money orders and lists which
may be detected in course of examination.
 114

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

(ix) Note on the paid money orders concerned, the amount actually
charged in the paid list for the guidance of the debit checkers in
the case of short or excess charge found after comparison; and

(x) Note the result of his day(s) checking in the remarks column of
his daily report book.

3.30-C After the reconciliation of discrepancies is finished the paid

lists and the abstracts together with the bundles of paid money order
vouchers are made over to the miscellaneous checkers through the
distributing Jr. Accountant. The miscellaneous checker will enter daily in
a Memo [form D.G. (PA)-407] the number of paid orders to be transferred
to the Sorting Group, a separate Memo being used for each month of issue,
as well as for each month of payment. This distinction according to month
of issue will be apparent from the colour of the Form issued. The entries
in the Memo will be made from the details on the “Slip” [D.G. (PA)-405]
mentioned in Paragraph 3.29 above. The miscellaneous checker should
affix his initials against the entries made by him.

Miscellaneous Checking

3.30-D The miscellaneous checkers are required to: --

(i) fill up the gaps in the paid list, if any, in respect of the names
of the office of issue of money orders with reference to the paid
money orders;

(ii) Issue reference to the Postmasters for wanting lists and other
irregularities in connection there of;

(iii) Prepare in manuscript wanting paid lists, if any with reference to

the paid money orders.

3.30-E The Supervisor of the first and third stages of work in the
paid list Section will be to advise and help the arrangers and the
reconcilers in their work whenever they experience any difficulty. He will
 115

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

train any new men posted to these two sections in their work. Daily he
should fully review the work of the reconciler to see that the checking of
the postmaster's abstract of daily totals with those prepared by the
machine operators has been correctly done. He should also check carefully
in detail items of discrepancies noted by the reconcilers as “Machine
Operators” mistakes, entering the facts of these daily checks in the diary
to be maintained by him. He should in addition review the shoots of
Head/Sub office lists daily. He should also sign the sheets examined by
him. The diary should be submitted to the J.A.O. in-charge daily and to
the Group ‘A’ or ‘B’ officer in-charge every Wednesday.

At the end of the day he will collect from the reconcilers all the
operator's manuscript slips that have been completely examined and see
that the discrepancies noted therein in red ink have all been settled and a
note to that effect together with the manner of adjustment has been
recorded on the reverse of the slips concerned. In cases of doubt he should
go through the Paid List and Abstracts of daily totals and ascertain
whether the particular adjustment has been correctly made. He will
maintain the forecast register with reference to the rates or work of the
Paid List group. The mistakes of the operators in totalling the values of
paid money orders should also be noted by him daily in the Error Book of
Machine Operators maintained by the Supervisor, Comptometer group,
according to clause (b) of Para 3.17. The entries in it should be made with
reference to the remarks made by the reconcilers in settlement of the
discrepancies in the Operators slips. For this purposes he should open
separate columns in Error Book. The Memorandum of Money Orders to be
made over to Sorting group (see clause (iii) of Para. 3.30. (C) should be
collected, totalled and also initialled by the supervisor every day. In case
the total number of mistakes shown as due to machine operators' mistakes
fall short of 6 items in a day, the actual number available for the day
should be checked in detail.
 116

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

3.30-F In order to test the accuracy of work done in the Paid List
Group, the J.A.O., Paid List Group, should exercise the check prescribed
in Appendix I of the Postal Account Manual Volume I

3.30-G The J.A.O. in charge of paid list group should review the
work of each reconciler and also check the miscellaneous work each day
and report the result of his review in his diary in form D.G. (PA)-444
which should be submitted to' the Accounts Officer-in charge every
Wednesday.

3.30-H The procedure of review prescribed in para 3.20-B should

also apply to M.O. Paid abstracts to see that the work required under para
3.30 B (i) has been correctly done.

3.30-I The Postal Accounts Office, while sending returns to other

Postal Accounts Officers, should prepare an invoice, in triplicate,
indicating the name of the Head Office, the No. of vouchers and the
amount as per the abstract of daily total. One copy of the invoice should
be returned by the receiving P.A.O. acknowledging the receipt of paid
vouchers/paid lists/daily abstracts. These invoices should be given a
running serial. The acknowledgement should be watched and the
acknowledged copy on receipt should be filed with the office copy in the
sending Postal Accounts Office. (This takes effect from 1-4-1990)

Check of Summaries of Money Orders Paid

3.31 As stated in the Note to clause (6) of Para. 3.12 the

summaries of money orders paid intended for several Postal Accounts
Offices are all received together in the Home Postal Accounts Office,
separately for each month of issue. The checking of these summaries is
conducted in three stages, viz. (1) cross totalling by the machine of the
totals of the several columns of the Summaries, (2) machine totalling of
the monthly totals as worked out in the abstracts for the II period and
preparation by the operator of Consolidated total of amount and No. of
 117

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

money orders, and (3) reconciliation.

The work in the first and second stages is done by the machine
operator while the work in the third stage is done by non-machinists called
the Summary clerks.

3.31-A After getting certificate of agreement from the Checker

Postal Accounts Section, of the grand total with the charge in the Cash
Accounts as laid down in Para 3.33 below, the summary clerk will make
over the Home and Foreign Summaries to the operators for doing the first
stage of Summary Checking . A gross total of the totals in column 2 to 5
of the Home Summaries is struck by the machine operator and agreed with
the grand total in column 6 thereof as given by Postmaster.

In the case of disagreement, the differences should be reconciled by

a reference to the figures for all the Postal Accounts Offices as shown in
the Summary for the Home Postal Accounts Office and noted as a plus and
minus entry below the respective totals shown by the Postmaster in the
Home Summary.

3.31-B In the second stage of the work the machine operator in

respect of each Head Office and all its Sub-Offices strikes a total of the
monthly totals (including the corrections) as shown in the abstracts for the
IInd period separately showing the consolidated total of the number and
value of Inland money orders paid as well as of telegraphic money orders
and their value, so that if a Head Office has 20 Sub Offices under it, the
operator will have to total 84 items including those of the Head Office.
The number of items for outturn should, however, be obtained by actual
count as it may sometimes happen than no telegraphic money orders are
paid at a particular office during a certain period.

3.31-C The consolidated totals of the number and value of money

orders as prepared by the operator in the second stage [vide Para 3.31-(B)]
are compared by the Summary clerks with the totals in the Home Postal
 118

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Accounts Office columns of all the Summaries including the Foreign
Summaries. The discrepancies that may then be brought to light are due
either to the Operator's mistakes or to short or excess charges. The
operator's mistakes should be entered in the error book maintained for the
purpose in accordance with clause (c) of paragraph 3.21A. These
discrepancies should be reconciled by comparing the entries in the
abstracts with the corresponding entries in the Summaries. As no figures
relating to Telegraphic money orders appear separately in the Summaries
Consolidated totals relating to them as prepare by the operator are not
subject to further verification or reconciliation.

NOTE 1 - For the purpose of outturn, the number of offices in Summaries should
be multiplied by 2 irrespective of the fact whether there are any transactions or not, but
in the case of summaries checked in respect of money orders paid preceding credit only
those offices which have any transactions should be multiplied by 2.

NOTE 2 - The summary clerks should maintain progress reports showing the
number of summaries and extracts from summaries received and the number checked
daily by then and the number outstanding. In addition, the number of items dealt with
as per Note 1 should also be noted.

3.32 The Summary clerk should also see that the total shown in
the Foreign summary agrees with the corresponding total in the Home~
Summary. Any discrepancy noticed in the course of those verification
should be noted as a plus or minus entry below the total shown in the
Foreign Summary and 8, note of agreement made and initialled by him
against the total. He need not check the grand total by across totalling the
columns 2 to 5 but he will see that the grand total of each summary is
agreed with the charge in the Cash Account under the head “Money Orders
paid” for the month of issue concerned.

3.33 A certificate of agreement will be obtained from the checker

in the Postal Accounts Section who will mark the grand total “Agreed”
placing his initials below the entry in cases of disagreement if the
 119

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

aggregate charge in the cash accounts agrees with the aggregate amount as
exhibited in the summary the figures for each month of issue as entered in
the summary, should be posted by the checker in the Classified Abstract
irrespective of the amounts shown in the Cash Account, the remarks
“agreed with the cash account” being made in the summary under his
initials with date. When, however, there is a discrepancy between the
aggregate amount as entered in the Cash Account and that shown in the
summary, the amount of discrepancy should be taken in the Classified
Abstract against the head “Issues of current month” so that the total
amount included in the Classified Abstract on account of money orders
paid during a month may always agree with the total amount changed in
the cash account of the month. In cases of such discrepancies, the
following note should however, be made by the checker in the money
order summary against the total amount relating to the current month's
issues: Taken as Rs.……………………. in the Classified Abstract.

NOTE -- Any differences between the grand total of consolidated Home

Summary and the charge in the Cash account should be taken to relate to the Home
Circle figures, the Foreign Circle totals being regarded as having agreed with the cash
account.

3.34 The totals 0f the foreign summaries should be entered

separately for each Postal Accounts Offices in the Register [form D.G.
(PA)-409] The receipt of the invoice, in duplicate indicating the name of
the Head Offices, the No. of vouchers and the amount as per the abstracts
of daily total will be watched through a separate manuscript register. One
copy of the invoice will be returned to the Postal Accounts concerned,
after recording the acknowledgement under the signature of Summary
Accountant of the Money Order section concerned.

The register should be submitted to the B.O. in charge every month

(1st Monday of the month) with details of P.A.Os from where the invoice,
with vouchers and the amount had not been received for taking suitable
 120

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

action to call for them.

3.35 Deleted

3.36 For statistical purpose, the figures of Paid summaries (Home

and Foreign) relating to the total number and value of paid money orders
issued in the Home Circles are entered separately for office and each
Postal Circle of payment, in register to be maintained in Form D.G. (PA)-
402.

Sorting of Paid Money Orders

3.37 The work of sorting paid money orders is done to four

stages. First Stage-counting and sorting according to Head Offices of
issue, Second stage-Sorting according to Sub Offices of issue. Third stage-
arranging of the sorted orders under each head or sub-office according to
the serial numbers of the orders, Fourth and final stage-counting ,
bundling and labelling.

The sorting of paid money orders should be completed on the dates

noted below.

1st period ……………………28th of the next month.

2nd period ………………….. l5th of the second month following.

NOTE -- When the work of sorting paid money orders is taken up at Home Postal
Accounts Offices, the money order paid vouchers received from all other Postal
Accounts Offices pertaining to the month of issue are also mixed for sorting
simultaneously.

3.38 Each bundle of money orders received from the Paid number
lists group is examined by the Supervisor to see that the number of
vouchers shown on the slip placed on the top of the bundle agrees with the
corresponding entry in the Memo. [Form D.G. (PA)-407]. The supervisor
should note against each entry in the memo the name of sorters among
whom the vouchers will be distributed for the first stage of Counting and
 121

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

sorting according to Head Offices of issue, keeping in view the fact that
each sorter may get approximately the number of Money Order required
for a day's outturn. The vouchers will then be distributed among the
sorters for sorting.

A progress register for each sorter should be maintained in Form

D.G. (PA)-410.

3.39 The sorter will verify by actual counting, the number of

vouchers noted in the memo and then sort the money orders by Head
Offices of issue with reference to the money order name stamp impressed
at the top of each money order. The sorted bundles will be collected by the
distributors from each sorter, and after necessary entries have been made
in the progress register the sorted orders will be collected in a receptacle
for each Head Office.

NOTE -- In order to avoid the mixing up of money orders issued in one month
with those issued in another, the sorting in all stages is done by sets of men. If the
distribution of work requires the same man to deal with different months of issue, great
care should be taken at every stage of the work to keep one month's issues apart from
another month's bundles for one month being disposed of before those of another month
are taken up.

3.40 Each sorter is next allotted a certain number of Head Offices

and is required to sort the orders according to the several sub offices under
each Head Office and then serially arrange them for each Head or Sub
Office of issue. The distribution of Money Orders to various sorters is
recorded in the Distribution Broadsheet in form D.G. (PA)-410A. The
Broadsheet should be submitted for review to the Branch Officer in
Charge of the Section through the J.A.O. on 5 th of each month, after
recording a certificate of completion therein.

NOTE -- Illegibility or non-impression of oblong stamp on issue of

Money Orders render the Money Orders to be misarranged. The sorters
will make over all such Money Orders to the Head Sorter to decipher their
 122

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

correct offices of issues. Vouchers which cannot be so disposed of by the
Head Sorter will be entered in a register in manuscript and made over to
the Supervisor, Paid List Group, for finding out the names of the Office of
issues by referring to the paid lists. The offices of issue will be noted on
the vouchers which will then be made over along with the register to Debit
Check Group for disposal. The Assistant checker Debit Check Group, will
acknowledge the receipt of the vouchers in the register and return the
same to Sorting Group. Two registers, one for each period of account,
should be opened.

3.41 The orders for each Head Office including its Sub Offices
will next be counted by hundreds, placed crosswise and bundled, the total
number in each bundle being noted on a slip in Form D.G. (PA)-411
placed at the top and initialled by the Head Sorter, showing (1) the Head
Office of issue (2) the number of paid orders (3) the month of issue and
(4) the month of payment with the sorter's initials.

3.42 The number of orders contained in the bundle or bundles for

each Head Office, as shown in the slips, will then be posted by the Head
Sorter against the names of the respective Head Offices of issue in the
Sorting broadsheet [Form No. D.G. (PA)-412(a)] etc. A separate
broadsheet should be used for each month and Postal Circle of issue of
money orders. The totals of the Circle Broadsheets are consolidated at foot
of that for the “Principal” Circle and the grand total arrived at in the
broadsheet for the principal Circle is compared with the grand total of all
the Paid list broadsheets. The difference between the two totals is
explained in a separate sheet of paper and a report submitted to die Branch
Officer-in-charge through the J.A.O. In-charge.

NOTE -- Before the agreement of the Sorting Broadsheet is taken up, the Head
Sorter should see that the number of money orders according to Para 3.51-A has been
noted thereof by the J.A.O. Debit Check Group under his dated initials.
 123

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

3.43 The serially arranged bundles for each Head Office together
with the respective broadsheets for each period of payment are then made
over to the debit-checking group for check. The bundles and the broad
sheets are kept distinct for each month. For this purpose, the broadsheets
are maintained in three distinctive colours, viz. Brown, Red and Yellow.

3.43-(A) Each of the Head and the Assistant Head Sorters,

should maintain a diary to record his daily work. He should also review
the work of four Branch sorters daily by rotation. The result of the review
should be duly recorded in his diary which will be submitted to the J.A.O.
In-charge daily and to the Branch Officer every Wednesday.

NOTE -- The Director/Dy. Director of Accounts (Postal) may, at to his

discretion, allow a head sorter or an Assistant head sorter to review the work of two
sorters only instead of four.

Money Orders Mis-sorted by the Post Office.

3.44 It may happen that a money order issued within the area of a
Foreign Circle of Postal Accounts Office may erroneously be received
with the Paid List. The mis-entry of such an order in the Paid list is
detected in the course of sorting or by the debit checker. If the sorters
work properly, such money orders should inevitably be intercepted by
them, in which case the orders should be made to the Head Sorter. The
Latter will enter then in a register and send it along with the vouchers to
the Paid list group for verification of the charge. The Paid list examiner
will record a certificate of verification on the vouchers and make over the
register and the vouchers to the Supervisor, Reconciliation Group for
onward transmission to the Foreign Postal Accounts Office concerned.

The sorters may also come across money orders the offices of issue
of money orders and cannot, therefore, be properly sorted of oblong
 124

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

money order stamps required to be affixed at the time Of issue of money
orders and cannot, therefore be properly sorted. Such money orders should
be made over to the head sorter who should collect all such vouchers and
exercise a preliminary check with a view to finding out the office of issue.
In cases where he cannot so determine he should hand them over
personally, after counting to the Debit Check Group through a separate
transit register (vide specimen form shown below) entering therein the
total number of vouchers so sent. The vouchers should similarly be
returned personally by the dealing clerk of the Debit check group after
supplying the wanting particulars through the same transit register to the
sorting group, so that they may be kept in their proper place in the Money
Order bundle during the sorting stage itself. The vouchers that cannot be
returned by the Debit Check Group during the course of the same day
should be carried forward and shown in the Transit Register as the
opening balance for the next day, No balance should, however, be carried
forward after the end of the period concerned. Necessary action for the
final disposal of the balance of untraced vouchers till remaining with the
Debit Check Group should be taken as indicated in Para 3.49.A.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Form of the Manuscript Transit Register
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 2 3 4 5 6
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Period of Date Opening No. of MO. Sent Total No of MOs Traced
Account Balance DC by Sorting and returned back
to Head Sorter
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 125

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initials of
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Balance DC Misc Head Sorter Supervisor J.A.O.DC J.A.O. Sorting Remarks
Clerk D.C.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE -- In cases where paid Money Orders do not accompany the paid lists, the
check slips prepared under para 3,30B(vi) should be treated in the same way as paid
money orders themselves provisionally. The wanting vouchers or their equivalents
should be called for by the Postal Accounts Office in which the charges appear and
when received should be transferred to the Postal Accounts Office to which the debits
had already passed on.

3.45 The mis-sorted money orders and the wanting money orders
vouchers relating to foreign Postal Accounts Offices which appear prima
facie to be a fraud or other irregularity will be verified with reference to
the issue list concerned and the result of verification will be intimated to
the Postal Accounts Offices concerned as quick as possible.

Misclassified Money Orders

3.46 If, in the course of sorting, a money order pertaining to a

month of issue is found in a bundle of money orders relating to a different
month of issue, the money order win not be removed from that bundle, but
will be placed at the top of that bundle so that the necessary adjustment
may be made by the Debit checking group.

Exception -- Paid Void money orders wrongly charged in the Paid list, detected in the
course of sorting should be entered in a manuscript register and the made over to
the Void Group direct for debit Check adjustment and record along with other
paid void money orders.

NOTE -- Bogus money orders are also liable to be detected by the sorter at this
 126

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

stage. If the number assigned to such an order does not fall in the series in which the
genuine money orders are issued on that date, or the same number appears for two
money orders issued on a certain date, the sorter should at once take them to the Head
Sorter who should forthwith make them over through a transit register to be opened for
the purpose, to the Supervisor, Debit Check Section for necessary action.

Debit checking or checking payments against issues

3.47 Each debit checker will be allotted certain number of offices

for debit check and will receive from the sorting Group of the bundles of
paid money orders relating to his portion no matter in what months they
are issued, ,and sign the corresponding entries in the sorting broadsheets
in the column provided for the purpose. As the bundles are tied up in
hundreds and kept cross wise he will count the hundreds and tally the
number with the entry on the slip placed on the top of the bundle. He will
then sign the slip in the place provided for the purpose. If any discrepancy
is discovered, it will be brought to the notice of the checker in charge who
will settle the difference in communication with the Head Sorter.

Each debit checked will be allotted different offices in different

months. The selection of offices will rest with the J.A.O. in-charge of the
section and for this purpose a broadsheet showing the distribution of
offices among the debit checkers during the several months should be
maintained by him. The section should be so arranged that no debit
checker may be in a position to have any idea of the offices to be assigned
to him in a particular month.

NOTE -- When receiving a bundle of sorted money orders, the checker should
see whether the months of issue of money orders agree with the months noted on the
slips placed on the bundle.

3.48 If, in the process of debit-checking, it is found that certain

orders have been mis-sorted as to Head Offices of issue these will be
transferred to the proper checker by making entries in the plus and minus
columns of the broad sheet or sheets, as the case may be, his initials being
 127

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

taken against the plus entries, while the checker, who transferred such
orders will initial the corresponding minus entries.

3.49 If in the course of debit checking of money orders relating to

a month of issue, certain money orders relating to a different month or
issue are found, a note should be made on them of the incorrect month's
bundle with which they were received. They must, after check in the Issue
list concerned be transferred to the Assistant Checker for entry in a
register in form No D.G. (PA)-413 and for rectification of the
classification in the Paid Lists and of the cash account figures. The entries
in the register will be totalled, each month and a transfer entry made by
debiting the correct months of issue and crediting (by deduction from
debit) the months of issue under which they were wrongly classified in the
cash account.

Some Money Orders may also be found the credits for which cannot
be traced in the Issue lists in consequence of incorrect or illegible entries
in them or due to defective or incomplete particulars. Such money orders
which are called miscel1aneous money orders are made over to the
Assistant Checker who will make an attempt to check those money orders
against issues. If he fails in his attempts action should be taken to obtain
complete particulars of these money orders and then to debit check them.

The misclassified money orders after rectification and the

miscellaneous money orders after being debit checked should be made into
separate monthly bundles and arranged according to offices of issue.

3.49-A The miscellaneous debit checkers will also trace the office of
issue of the illegible money orders received from the sorting group under
para 3.44 with the help of issue list of the office and return the traced
vouchers to Sorting Group in the manner laid down in Para 3.44. The
vouchers that cannot be readily completed from the particulars in the issue
list should be sent to the paid list group for tracing the office of issue with
 128

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

reference to the paid list, through a separate manuscript transit register
showing the details of such money orders. The prompt return of these
vouchers by a paid list Group after noting the office of issue should be
watched by the Debit Check Group and the vouchers debit checked
thereafter. With regard to the vouchers still remaining unchecked,
reference should be made to the paying Post Offices for intimating their
offices of issue. Telegraphic references should be issued in cases of
money orders of Rs. 100 and above and half margin references marked
“Urgent” issued in other cases. The particulars of these vouchers as well
as the miscellaneous vouchers mentioned in sub-para 2 of Para, 3.49
should be entered in a manuscript register through which all subsequent
actions should be watched. A pending list should be prepared in the
register itself and submitted to the Branch Officer within 3 days of the
completion of debit check for each period. The final disposal of the money
orders will also be noted in this register.

3.50 The broadsheets will be retained by the checker in files

arranged according to dates of their receipt. When a month's accounts
have been finally checked, the broadsheets and money orders relating to
that month will be made over to the Record clerk; they should be
destroyed under the orders of the Director/Dy. Director of Accounts,
Postal after the prescribed period.

3.51 In debit checking a money order in the Issue List, the

checker will compare the number of the money order and the amount as
entered by the Post Office (in figures and in words) with the
corresponding entries in the Issue List, and mark against the amount in the
latter, the letter of the alphabet assigned to each individual checker with a
coloured pencil in token of having thus debit-checked the money order.
The entries in the Issue list for money orders paid, in different months
(which are received in separate bundles-see Para 3.41) will be ticked off
with different coloured pencil thus; Blue indicating payments in the
 129

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

months of issue, Green indicating payments in the next month.

The checker will also note any difference between the amount of the
paid money order and the credit in the Issue list in the remarks columns of
the list and issue an objection statement to the Head Postmaster pointing
out the short or excess payment.

NOTE 1 -- Money orders paid in the month preceding the month of credit will
also be debit-checked in blue pencil.

NOTE 2 -- The debit checker should take into account any red ink note made by
the Paid List examiner on the money order showing the amount charged in the Paid
List.

NOTE 3 -- When a difference is found between the amount of a money order and
the credit in the Issue list, the debit-checker will, before entering the difference in an
objection statement, re-check the total of that page of the issue list to satisfy himself
that the incorrect credit entered in the Issue List has been included in the total of that
page and that the total has been correctly accounted for in the consolidation. He should
also take into consideration any entries that may have been made by the Issues List
Examiner on the list.

NOTE 4 -- In debit checking, the telegraphic money order receipts are treated as
ordering money orders.

NOTE 5 -- Should the debit checker find any money order pertaining to a
Foreign Circle of Postal Accounts Office, he will hand it over to the Checker who will
transfer it to the Head Sorter, obtaining his receipts for the same on the Head Office
sorting broadsheet with which it was originally received.

NOTE 6 -- Should the debit checker find any money order marked “Duplicate”
he should see that necessary note regarding issue of duplicate as required by Para 3.62
appears against the item in the Issue List. Otherwise he should send a note to the clerk
dealing with intimation of issue of Duplicate Money Order for necessary action.

Should the original order be found in the course of debit-check, the checker will
transfer it, after check to the clerk dealing with cases relating to instructions of issue of
Duplicate Money Orders for necessary action.

3.51-A In order to test the accuracy of the work done in the Debit
check group, the J.A.O. should exercise the check prescribed in the
 130

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Appendix 1 of Postal Ale Manual Vol. I. The mistakes of debit checkers
found out at the time of the check should be entered in an Error Book
maintained for this purpose. The Error Book should be submitted monthly
to the Head of the Office through the J.A.O. and the Accounts Officer in-
Charge. The checker in charge of the correspondence group will submit to
the J.A.O. Debit check group, all cases in which a call or reference is
received for a particular money order reported as unchecked by the clerk
dealing with such calls.

3.52 The conversion of sterling value into rupee currency in

respect of Foreign sterling Money Orders is checked by the Examiner of
the Foreign money order list. The debit checker should take into
consideration any note or correction made by the Examiner or Foreign
Money Order lists either on the outward Money Order or in the inward
Money Order list and issue an objection statement, if necessary. The
conversion of the sterling value should, of course, be checked by the
checker and the J.A.O. when the objection statement is passed. If no note
or correction appears on an outward sterling Money Order, the amount of
value in rupee as noted by the Postmaster will be compared with the entry
in the Issue List.

3.53 It happens that the credit for a Telegraphic money order

cannot be traced in the Issue List in consequence of incorrect or illegible
entry of the name of the office of issue on the Telegraphic money order
receipt. Before issuing an objection statement for the non-credit of the
Telegraphic money orders the checker to whom such Telegraphic money
orders will be made over by the debit checker, will make an attempt to
find out the correct offices of issue by a reference to the Telegraphic
money order requisitions. If he fails in his attempts, he will issue a
telegram in Code Words “Greaca” in cases of Rs. 100 and above and half
margin references marked urgent in other cases, asking the office of
payment (Sub Postmasters being addressed direct instead of through the
 131

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Head Office) to intimate the correct office of issue by referring to the
postal confirmation of the Telegraphic money order advice. If the reply is
not satisfactory, the postal confirmation itself should be called for. If the
correct office of issue showing the credit for the Telegraphic money order
can not even then be found out, the charge for the money order should be
disallowed and the item placed under objection.

NOTE -- The cost of telegram issued in this connection is recoverable from the
Post Office Officials at fault and the Postal Accounts Offices should address the
appropriate punishing authority, viz. the Divisional Supdt. of First Class Postmasters,
as the case may be to determine whether recovery should be enforced or not.

Settlement of Discrepancies

3.54 Care should be taken to see that in cases of discrepancies,

the objection statement is issued to the Head Postmaster of the office of
issue Or payment, as the case may be When a discrepancy is noticed
between the credit and charge for a money order, the remitter's entry on
the money order as to the amount of remittance should be relied upon. If
the amount entered by the remitter agrees with the credit, then it should be
assumed that the amount paid is incorrect, i.e. the case should be treated
as one of short or excess payment, as the case may be, and the objection
statement issued to the Head Postmaster of the office of payment of the
money order. If, on the other hand, the amount entered by the remitter on
the money order agrees with the amount paid, then it should be assumed
that the credit afforded in the Issue List is incorrect and the case should be
dealt with as one of short Or excess credit of money order and the Head
Postmaster of the office of issue addressed to settle the objection. In the
case of Telegraphic Money Orders, the Telegraphic money order
requisitions should be consulted for the correct amount or remittance. In
the case of Value Payable money orders, however, the Head Postmaster of
the office of issue of the money order will be addressed for recovery from,
or refund to, the addressee of the value payable article, as the sender of
 132

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

the Value Payable article is entitled to the amount noted by him far
recovery on the article.

3.55 Sometimes on receipt of complaint from the remitter or the

payee of a money order, Postmasters make action for the recovery or
refund of the excess or short payment and adjust the amount in their
accounts, sending an intimation to the Postal Accounts Office. In such
cases, the credit or charge will be verified and the fact noted in the Issue
List by the checker, Debit checking group, against the money order
concerned, so as to attract the attention of the Debit-checker in the course
of his debit checking. No objection statement will be issued to the
Postmaster in such cases, but “not to issue” objection statement win be
prepared

Adjustment of small differences

3.56 “(1)Fees and other receipts other items” under 155-postal

receipts - other receipts, (2) Inland Money Orders-month of issue, (3)
Money Order Commission, and (4)355- Postal Services-B-Operation I-
Post Offices (10)Writes off/losses” as (1) 1201- Postal Receipts-008-00-
Other Receipts-02-22-01 Other Items (2) 8781 - Money Orders -001-01
Inland Money Orders - 000001- I Year of Issue (Current Year) (3) 1201-
Postal Receipts - 00l-02-01- Commission on Money Orders and Postal
Orders -000l- Commission on Money Orders (4) 3201-02-101-02- Opening
and Upgrading of Post Offices -0064- Writes off/Losses.

NOTE -- When a case of difference not exceeding Re. 1 noticed during checking
of Revenue Money Orders, has been brought to the notice of the party concerned and it
is found that the party does not choose to take any action in the matter, the objection
may be withdrawn in the manner contemplated in Para 3.103.

Time Allowed for checking paid orders

3.57 Checkers receive money orders in fortnight bundles from the

Sorting Group, and a fortnight is allowed for the disposal of the batch.
 133

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

The number received by each checker and his daily outturn as well as the
balance in hand are daily recorded in a progress report book in Form D.G.
(PA)-415.

The debit checking of the paid money orders should be completed on

the date shown below:-

Paid money orders received with the first 15 th of the second

Bi-monthly List of money orders paid month following.

Paid money order received with the Second 28th of the second

Bi-Monthly List of money orders paid month following.

Errors and Omissions

3.58 Errors or irregularities discovered in checking the paid

orders will be noted in coloured pencil on the money order and issue list,
as the case may require, and will be communicated to Postmasters for
necessary action for remedying the irregularity.

Recording Paid Orders

3.59 As the checker completes the check of the paid money

orders, he will record the bundles of money orders pertaining to each head
and sub-offices of issue and month of issue and payment in the forth
nightly bundles as received from the Sorting Group.

If an objection statement is issued pointing out discrepancy between

the credit and the charge on account of a Money order, the money order
will be stitched or securely fastened to the objection statement as an
enclosure, a check slip [Form D.G. (PA)-403] being prepared and signed
by the checker in charge and placed in the bundle. Such money orders, on
their return, will be filed with the case relating to the objection statement.
In place of every money order removed from the bundle of recorded
vouchers, a check slip must be prepared by the person who wants it to be
 134

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

removed. The checkers will be held personally responsible for any money
order found missing from a bundle in their charge, without a check slip
being placed in lieu thereof.

Transfer/destruction of issue lists

3.60 After the issue lists are fully checked by the debit checkers
in the debit checking group; those issue lists should be made over to the
Record clerk. The issue lists should then be destroyed under the Orders of
the Director/Dy. Director after the prescribed period of preservation.

Review

3.61 The work of each debit-checker should be reviewed by the

Checker Supervisor and the JA.O. Money Order Section.

Duplicate money orders

3.62 When an intimation is received Of the issue of a duplicate

order in lieu of an Original order lost before payment, the clerk who
received such intimation will refer to the issue list, Register of unpaid
Money Orders or Register of Forfeited Money Orders as the case may be,
and see that the original order has not been noted as paid. If he finds that
the original Order has been paid, he will at once telegraph to the office of
payment Or send an express letter in Form D.G. (PA)-443 as may appear
necessary stopping payment of the duplicate. If it has not been paid, he
will note the fact of the issue of a duplicate in red ink against the entry in
the issue list. Register of unpaid Money Orders or Register of Forfeited
Money Orders as the case may be, Should the original order be found
afterwards in the course of debit check, the checker will transfer it after
check to the clerk who deals with cases relating to intimation of issue of
duplicates, for such action as may be necessary.

On receipt Of a request from the Postmaster under Rule 291 of the

P&T Manual, Volume VI for the payment Of a duplicate Money Order
 135

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

after the expiry of one year from the date Of issue, a reference should be
made to the register of Unpaid Money Orders or Forfeited Money Orders
to verify whether the credit for the Money Order is outstanding. If the
Money Order has not been paid previously permission to the payment will
be accorded in Form No. D.G. (PA)-443-A.

Duplicate Money Orders which are sent to the Postal Accounts office
as unpaid after issue should be retained and reissued later on when
required for payment.

NOTE 1 -- The diarist will make over to the dealing clerk, the intimation of
D.M.O.s and also the request for granting permission to make payment of D.M.O.s
received from Postmasters under rule 291 of P&T Manual. Volume VI. The number of
intimations received by the D.M.O.s clerk should in the first instances be noted in lump
in the index in form D.G. (PA)-415-B which is maintained at the beginning of the
register in Form D.G. (PA)-415-A. The dealing clerk will then index them in detail in
the register in Form D.G. (PA)-415-A which will also show the category to which the
D.M.O. intimation relate. This information is to be embodied in the “Remarks” column
of the Form D.G. (PA)-415-A by drawing manuscript columns for indicating the
sections to which the irregularity pertains. As the intimations are disposed of, they are
sorted according to the nature of irregularities (viz., stop payment/other irregularities)
involved in each case and then recopied in the separate sections of the same register. At
the same time the relevant columns to indicate the number of intimations of each
category in the index in Form D.G. (PA)-415-B will be filled up day to day from the
categorisation of the intimations.

The register should be submitted for review of the Group A or B Officer in

charge of the section every Monday through the J.A.O. in-charge who should ensure by
a test check that all the D.M.O. intimations made over by the diarist are duly indexed
by the D.M.O. Checker. For the purpose of Branch Officer's review a list of out
standings in respect of the irregularities should be drawn up at the end of the register
citing the serial numbers of the out standings.

NOTE 2 -- A statement of irregularities in the issue of duplicate Money orders

should be sent to the Head of the Circle every month .

NOTE 3 -- For re-issue of original Money Orders after the expiry of one year
from the date of issue. See note 1, under Para 3.78.
 136

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Void money orders

3.63 “Void Money Order” is a money order not paid within the
period of its currency i.e. on or before the last day of the month following
the month of its issue.

List of void money orders

3.64 Void Lists (Form No. MO-l9) are prepared only by Head
Offices of issue and include such unpaid void money orders as were issued
either by the Head Office or any of its sub offices. Void money orders
relating to the issues of other Head Offices are returned to the Head
Offices of issue to be included in their void lists. Thus each Head Office
submits only one void list to its own Accounts Office, and the money
orders appear in the list in serial order. The void lists are due for
submission to the Accounts Office on the 16 th of each month, and include
money orders treated as void at the end of the month following that of
issue. Separate, void lists are submitted of the money orders issued in each
month (also see Para 3.70).

3.65 Void lists are dealt with in the miscellaneous group of the
Money Order Section where they are first examined with the void money
orders that are received therewith. If any money order entered in the list is
missing or if a money order be received in excess, the fact should be
brought to the notice of the Postmaster. An explanation of the absence of
an order should be called for unless accounted for by a remark in the void
list. The examination of the void lists should be completed within one
week of their receipt.

NOTE -- Should a void money order of a Foreign Circle be erroneously included

in the Home Circle list, will be struck out therefrom and such void money order will be
forwarded to the Postal Accounts Office concerned, where its entry will be supplied in
the appropriate Void list and it will then be dealt with in the ordinary course. The error
should also be pointed out to the Postmaster concerned.
 137

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

3.66 Credit in respect of each void money order should then be
verified with the entry in the Issue list. The letter (R) should be marked in
red pencil against the amount of the order in the Issue List to indicate that
the money order has been received in the Accounts Office as unpaid void.

No account adjustment will be necessary for the unpaid void money

orders and their amounts will continue to remain under the Inland Money
Order head for the month of issue.

The unpaid void orders will after check, are kept arranged in bundles
or convenient size for each month or issue according to Head Offices of
issue in alphabetical order so that they can be easily traced for reissue
when payment is claimed.

3.67 A review of unpaid void money orders received in a month

should be conducted by the Supervisor and Accountant of the Void group.
The Reviewer should, in addition to seeing that the provisions in Para 3.64
and 3.65 have been observed generally, check whether credit in respect of
each void order has been verified with the corresponding entry in the issue
lists and the letter “R” has been marked in red pencil against each item.
Late receipts during a month in respect of void orders relating to previous
months should receive particular attention. The result of the review should
be recorded in the diaries maintained by Supervisor and the J.A.O. The
check exercised by the supervisor and the J.A.O. in the course of a month
should also be noted separately in the J.A.O., diary at the end of the month
and the diary submitted to the Accounts Officer-in-charge for review on
the following day.

Payment of money orders detained under orders issued by a Court of

Law or otherwise

3.68 Under the provisions contained in Rules 277 (5) and 297(2)
of the Posts and Telegraphs Manual, Volume VI, Part I. unpaid money
orders (within currency expired) are received along with a copy of the
 138

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Prohibitory Order. All such money orders should be entered in a
manuscript register noting therein also the particulars of the prohibitory
Order. Necessary note should also be made in red ink in the issue list or
the Register of Unpaid money orders as the case may be. The copy of the
Prohibitory orders and the unpaid M.O. should be kept in the personal
custody of the J.A.O. of the money order Section.

The manuscript register should be submitted to the Branch Officer

whenever there is a transaction and also on the last day of the month. On
receipt of an order for payment, these money orders should be reissued
just like other unpaid money orders, necessary note of re-issue being made
in the Register prescribed above and in the issue list in the case of money
orders with currency. The money orders after payment will be received
after being charged in the paid void Schedules or with Paid Lists
according as the money orders are paid as void or within currency. The
date of payment of money orders paid within currency should be
ascertained from the paid money orders in the Debit Check Group and
noted in the register of re-issued money orders.

3.69 The void list and the list of Money orders detained by the
Postmasters under rule 29 of P&T Manual vol. VI, part 1, will be arranged
alphabetically according to Head Offices and bound together to constitute
the Register of Unpaid money orders. There will thus be separate volumes
for each circle.

3.70 Void unpaid money orders received by the Post-master of the

office of issue after the submission of the void list will be forwarded to
the Postal Accounts Office with covering letters. These money orders
should be entered in the void lists and checked from the issue lists. After
check they should be filed in the proper place in the bundles of void
unpaid orders.
 139

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Payment of Void Money Orders

3.71 Although a money order is technically ‘Void’ if not paid

within currency, there is no bar to its being paid, if payment is possible. In
such cases, the payment is treated in the Post Office accounts, not as a
money order payment, but as an void MO payment and is debited in the
accounts by the Postal Accounts Section to the “Inland Money Order”
head in respect of Home Postal Accounts Office issues and to “Money
Order Remittance” in respect of Foreign Postal Accounts Office issues.
The classification is advised by the Money Order Section, before the
posting of the Classified Abstract.

3.72 On receipt of the schedule of void money orders paid, with

the paid money orders, the sub-checker in the Money Order Section will:-

(a) See that the particulars of the money orders agree with the
entries in the schedule and then tick off each entry in the
schedule;

(b) Verify whether each entry in the list is supported by a money

order and if a voucher be found wanting make a reference to the
post master calling for the voucher, keeping the amount under
‘items awaiting clearance’ in the Objection Book and preparing
a check slip in lieu of the money order and placing it in the
bundle.

(c) Check tile totals of the schedule.

(d) If any money order issued from a Foreign Postal Accounts

Circle be wrongly entered in the Home Circle schedule or vice
versa, correct the entry by scoring out the item from the wrong
schedule and inserting it in the proper one and recast the total
of the schedules.

(e) compare the totals of the Foreign Postal Accounts Circle

 140

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

schedules with the entries in the Home Postal Accounts Circle
schedules, mark the total “agreed” and initial the entry.

(f) forward the Foreign Postal, Accounts Circle schedules to the

Foreign Postal Accounts Offices concerned together with the
paid money orders and relative advices of transfer, number and
date of the advice of transfer being noted against the respective
entry in the column “Remarks”.

(g) sort the paid money orders of each head office in respect of
Home Postal Accounts Office schedule according to months of
issue and serially, and prepare an abstract in red ink at the
bottom of the last sheet of the schedule showing the number
and amount of M.O. according to different months of issue.

(b) send the void schedule for each period with the classification
noted on its back to the Checker of the Postal Accounts Section
who will initial the total of the schedule, marking it “agreed”
after verifying with the charge in the cash account under void
money order paid and return the void schedule to the Money
Order Section. The Jr. Accountant of the Postal Accounts
Section should note in the remarks column of the cash account
the classification given on the void schedule for each period
and incorporate the same in the Classified Abstract for the
month concerned.

(i) post the total for each month or year of issue and for each
Foreign Postal Accounts Office against the head office in the
Register in Form D.G. (PA)-416. The register should be
submitted to the Branch Officer for review through the J.A.O.
every month.

(j) re-sort the paid void money orders far each period according to
Head Office and Sub Office of issue and arrange them serially
 141

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

and debit check them in the Issue list. Paid void money orders
of any month of issue received after the register of unpaid
money orders has been prepared should, however, be debit-
checked in the register and not in the Issue list. Each item so
checked should be marked with the letter “V” in blue pencil.
Items debit checked in the register of unpaid money orders
should, however, be marked with the letter “V” in ink and a
note of payment be made in the columns provided for the
purpose.

(k) place the paid money orders, after debit check, in separate
bundles for each Head Office and each month of issue,
irrespective of the date of payment.

NOTE 1 -- Any mis-classification between months of issue found in the course

of debit-check should be rectified.

NOTE 2 -- If during the course of debit check a Money order paid after the
expiry of one year from the date of its issue is found, it should be seen that the previous
permission of the Account Office as required by Rule 291(1) of the Posts and
Telegraphs Manual, Volume VI, had been obtained.

Paid void orders received from Foreign Account Offices

3.73 On receipt of void paid orders from Foreign Postal Accounts

Offices, the clerk will compare them with the schedules accompanying
them, check the total of the schedules, sort the money orders according to
Head Office and Month of issue, classify the amount for each month or
year of issue and record them in a register in form No. D.G. (PA)-417. this
register will consolidate money orders paid voucher for each month of
issue from all Foreign Postal Accounts Offices. This register should be
submitted to the Branch Officer through the J.A.O./A.A.O. for review
every month.
 142

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

3.74 The clerk will then resort the paid orders according to Head
Office and Sub-Office of issue, arrange them serially and debit-check the
orders in the Issue List or n the register of unpaid orders, if the latter has
already been prepared, marking against the entry the initial letter of the
name of the Accounts Office and the month of adjustment in the Home
Accounts Office thus:-

M. June “27.

For items debit-checked in the register of unpaid money orders, a

note of payment should also be recorded in the column provided therein.
The instructions in clause (k) of Para 3.72 and the note there under will
also apply in the case of these money orders.

Review

3.75 The work of each debit-checker of void money orders should

be subjected to a review in the same way as the work of a debit-checker of
money orders paid within currency, vide Para 3.61. The results of the
review should be recorded in the diaries maintained by the J.A.G. and the
Accountant.

Recoveries from wrong payees and payments to right Payees of money

orders

3.76 Credits and debits appearing in the schedules of classified

receipt and payments on account of recoveries from wrong payees of
money orders and their subsequent payments to the right payees should be
taken to the detailed head “Recoveries of wrong money order payments”
under the head “Deposits” in the Postal Accounts Section. That Section
will enter the amounts in a register of deposits [Form D.G. (PA)-70] and
watch their subsequent adjustments as in the case of “Other deposits”. The
total credits and debits posted in this register will be agreed with the
 143

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Detail Book.

NOTE 1 -- As payments to the right payees are generally made after recoveries
of the. amounts from the wrong payees, credits will, as a rule, precede the debits m
such cases. If, however, a payment is made to the correct party under orders of the
competent authority before recovery of the amount from the wrong payee, the charge
should be held in the Objection Book of the Postal Accounts Section under
“Departmental Advances”.

Note 2 -- Recoveries/Payments on account of excess/erroneous/short payments of

individual M.O.s appearing in the P.O. accounts relating to the issues of Foreign Circle
Postal Accounts Offices will be finally adjusted under the head, “I.M.O” in the
accounts of the circles in which the transactions occur, and their particulars will be
intimated to the concerned Postal Accounts Offices through a monthly R&R statement
in the existing form. No advice of credits/debits on this account will be exchanged
among the Postal Accounts Offices.

Transfer of balance from inland money orders to forfeited money

orders

3.77 Deleted.

Re-issue of Void Money Orders

3.78 On receipt on an application in a Postal Accounts Office for

the re-issue, of a void money order, it should be seen that the void money
order is one that was issued within that Circle of Postal Accounts office
and if not, the application should be transferred to the Postal Accounts
Office concerned. A reference will then be made to the register of unpaid
Money Orders (see Para 3.69) to see if the money order is still out-
standing as “void”. If the register shows an entry which corresponds with
the particulars given in the application and it is found that the original
void money order was received the money order will be re-issued in
favour of the person named in the application, whether he is the remitter
or the payee or a person named by either of them.

In case of Value Payable Money Order, the payment in respect of

 144

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

which is to be made under the orders of the court, to the court sender or
addressee of the Value Payable article, the Money Order may be re-issued
in favour of the court/sender or addressee of the Value Payable article, as
the case may be. If, however, the payment of Value Payable Money Order
is ordered to be made to more than one party, the Money Order may be re-
issued in the name of the postmaster of the office or issue.

NOTE 1 -- On receipt of a request from the Postmaster under Rule 291 of the
Posts and Telegraphs Manual, Volume VI, Part I for the payment of an original Money
Order is, it should he called for and the Postmaster requested to apply for its re-issue
under Rule 301 ibid. The Postmaster concerned should also be asked to explain the
circumstances in which the Money Order was not sent to the Postal Accounts Office as
unpaid void after the period of its currency.

NOTE 2 -- Applications for re-issue of unpaid within currency Money Orders

held by Postal Accounts office under Para 3.66 ibid are also received and disposed of in
the same way as void Money Orders.

3.79 Should the particulars given in the application order or

request disagree with those recorded in the register of unpaid money
orders or the issue list, the Postmaster will be asked in a letter in Form
No. D.G. (PA)-419 to explain the difference. A note of the number and
date of this reference will be kept in the register of unpaid money orders
or the issue list.

3.80 If the money order, the re-issue of which is requested, has

been paid within or after the period of currency or if authority for
repayment to the remitter in a foreign country has been communicated to
the office of exchange or if it has been re-issued already, the facts as
known should be communicated to the Postmaster.

3.81(a) Foreign inward money orders held as void should not, as a

rule be re-issued in favour of any person other than the payees without the
assent of the Indian office of Exchange through which they were
originally advised. In no case a foreign inward money order can be
 145

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

reissued six months after its issue. In such cases the Postmaster should be
asked to obtain the assent of the Indian Office of Exchange.

(b) Applications for the re-issue of void money orders will

ordinarily be received through Postmasters (vide Rule 301 of the Post and
Telegraphs Manual, Volume VI). Applications made by remitters or
payees direct to a Postal Accounts office should be forwarded to the
Postmaster of the office of issue of the money orders for necessary action.
A money order will not be re-issued in favour of the heir of the deceased
remitter or payee unless the claim is acknowledged by the competent
authority (or by the original payee Or remitter if surviving).

(c) Void money orders sent out on requisition will not be re-
issued until they are received back.

(d) When the payee or remitter of a void inland money order

applies for its payment to him in a country or place outside India with
which money orders can be exchanged, the money order will be re-issued
by the Postal Accounts office on the Indian Office of Exchange concerned,
with instructions to that office to cash the order and after deductions from
the amount a fresh commission at the rates applicable to inland money
orders or outward foreign sterling money orders, as the case may be, to
advise a fresh order for the balance to the settlement, country or place of
payment.

3.82 On the acceptance of an application or the re-issue of a void

money order, the void money order is re-issued by making an endorsement
on it or on a separate slip [Form No. D.G. (PA)-420] pasted to it. Re-
issued orders are numbered in an annual series & entered in a register
[Form No. D.G. (PA)-421], the fact of re-issue being also recorded in the
Register of unpaid money orders against each original money order.

The re-issued money orders will be examined by the J.A.O. of the

Money Order Section and after being passed by him will be placed before
 146

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

the Accounts Officer for signature. Re-issued money orders will be
transmitted to the Office of payment in registered covers without any
forwarding letters. An intimation in Form No. D.G. (PA)-419 should be
sent to the Officer applying for the re-issue, should he not be the
Postmaster of the Office of payment.

NOTE -- For re-issue of Prohibitory Money Orders, see Para 3.68.

3.83 Re-issued money orders, if paid, are not accounted for in the
ordinary lists of money orders paid, but in the schedule of void money
orders paid referred to in Para 3.71. The void money order clerk, on
receipt of such lists, will note the payments of the re-issued orders in the
void list and transfer the vouchers to the Re-issue clerk who will note the
payments in the register of re-issued money orders [Form D.G. (PA)-421],
and record the vouchers.

Re-issued orders, if not paid, are returned to the Accounts Office

where they are held as void. A letter in Form No. D.G. (PA)-422 should be
issued to the Office of payment regarding the disposal of re-issued money
orders not received as paid or void.

NOTE -- For re-issue of Prohibitory Money Orders, see Para 3.68.

CONSOLIDATION OF TRANSFER ENTRIES MADE IN THE

VARIOUS GROUPS OF THE MONEY ORDER SECTION

3.84 Transfer entries of adjustments made in all the money order

sections will be consolidated and copied in an abstract of Transfer entries
which will be sent to the Book Section for incorporation in the accounts.

Review of In checked Items

3.85 Deleted.

3.86 The total of the register of unpaid money orders referred to

in Para 3.82 will represent the amount of unpaid orders outstanding.
 147

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Before arriving at the total amount of out standings at the end of a month,
care should be taken to see that all the money orders charged for in the
accounts up to and including that month are debit-checked. The amount
adjusted and the month of adjustment will be entered in the columns pro-
vided for the purpose. The total amount adjusted in a month will be
compiled separately and entered at the end of the register. A broadsheet
will be maintained showing the amount of unpaid orders, the amount
adjusted and the outstanding balance at the end of each month for each
circle.

The register relating to the current period together with the

broadsheet should be submitted to the Branch Officer through the J.A.O.
in charge for review every month by the 10 th of the 5 th month following
the month of issue.

Compilations

3.87 The totals of the Summaries of Money Orders issued and

paid compiled according to Postal Circles in Form D.G. (PA)-424 and
D.G. (PA)-425. The figures in column 5 of these forms are verified with
the corresponding figures in the Detail Books. Both the Form D.G.(PA)-
424 and 425 also provide for a compilation of the differences between
Summary and Cash account figures.

NOTE -- In compiling these statements any “Errors in accounting shown at the

foot of the Summaries should be verified with the Objection Books or other registers
through which they have been adjusted.

3.88 Deleted

3.89 Abstracts of mis-sorted money orders relating to the month

of issue in hand sent to, and received from other Postal Accounts Offices
should be prepared in the existing manner, excepting that no debits on
account of such M.O.s will be passed on through the “M.O.R.” heads.

3.90 A statement of actual short payments and over-payments on

 148

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

money orders as well as of mis-sorted money order advised by Foreign
Postal Accounts Offices is also prepared in Form D.G. (PA)-428 from the
Issue lists for verification of the adjustments made on their accounts with
the Objection Books or other registers through which they have been
adjusted.

3.91 An abstract of adjustments on account of differences shown

in Forms D.G. (PA)-424, 425 and 426 and in the statement of actual short-
payments or over-payments on individual money orders picked out from
the Issue list should be prepared, and incorporated in a general statement
of differences and adjustments which will be verified with the adjustments
previously made by the several Accounting Groups. The general statement
of differences should be submitted at the end of the 5th month following
the month of transaction to the Branch Officer-in-charge through the
J.A.O. in-charge of the M.O. Section.

Money orders ledger

3.92 Deleted

3.93 Deleted

3.94 Deleted

3.95 Deleted

Results of Checking

3.96 The general rules and principles laid down in Para 3.43 of
the Postal Accounts Manual Volume I should be followed in the
maintenance of Objection Books. The maintenance of a separate register
in Form S.Y. I5, is however, not necessary to watch the return of
Objection Statements relating to money orders transactions as this should
be done through the Objection Books. The more detailed procedure
applicable in the case of money order objection is described in Paras 3.97
to 3.110.
 149

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Errors found in Checking

3.97 The following errors are found in the course of checking of

money orders:

(1) Erroneous payments (i.e. short-payments or over-payments) on

account of money orders and short or excess credits on account
of commission.

(2) Differences between the summation of details and totals of the

issue and the said lists or summaries,

(3) Differences between abstracts and summaries.

(4) Differences between total of list of summary and cash account

figures.

NOTE 1 -- The term “Over-payment” includes every payment which is in excess

of the credit of value given in the Issue list. 1t includes therefore:

(a) a payment in excess of the credit whether the credit is correct or erroneous;

(b) a double payment (in this case the second payment should be shown as an
error in accounting);

(c) a payment, the corresponding credit for which is omitted from the Issue list
through fraud or error.

NOTE 2 -- The term “Short-payment” includes every case in which the payment
falls short of the credit in the Issue List.

3.98 In addition, to the checks prescribed under several paras to

this Chapter, it should be seen that there are no erasures or alterations etc.
in the several documents received at different stages of check and if there
be any, whether they are duly authorised by proper attestation, If
otherwise the irregularity should be brought to the notice of the
Postmaster through half margin memo in form No. D.G. (PA)-400 keeping
a note thereof against each unauthorised corrections.
 150

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Intimation of Errors

3.99 Whenever any difference which falls under one of the classes
referred to in para 3.97 is discovered or whenever it is .necessary to order
the recovery or the refund of an erroneous payment, or to intimate short or
excess credit on account of commission to the Postmaster, an objection
statement in Form D.G. (PA)-432 will be prepared and issued in duplicate.
Objection statements for wanting M.O.s will be issued in Form D.G. (PA)-
431l as provided for in Para 3.30 B (vi). The amounts of overpayments
should be taken to the head “(1) P & T Advances Money Order
Overpayments” and (2) “P & T Deposits - Money Order short payments”
as “(1) 8553-postal Advances -001-01 Postal Advances-02-0001 -
Overpayment or Short credit on Money Orders” and “(2) 8446- Postal
Deposits-OO 1 -01- Postal Deposits -6-0001- Short payment or Excess
credit on Money Orders”

NOTE -- In urgent cases or in cases of suspicious payments, telegraphic

intimations are issued in advance of the objection statement prescribed in this para.

3.100 Objection statements are sent out to enable the postmaster to

take prompt measures for the recovery of Money overpaid (or short
collected from the party concerned), or from the person at fault (as the
case may require), or the refund of money short paid (or over collected) to
the person to whom it is due or for the submission of any wanting
vouchers, etc. and it is most important that they should be issued without
delay.

NOTE.-In cases where the replies to the Objection Statements indicate that the
wanting MOs have already been sent to the Postal Accounts office but are not traceable
as having been received in the Postal Accounts office, further reference in form D.G.
(PA)-403-C, should be issued so that the Postmaster may either obtain the Memo of
admission of payment or take action as laid down in Clause (3) of rule 299 of the P&T
Manual, Vol. VI.
 151

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Recoveries and refunds

3.101 In issuing the objection statements, the Postmaster should be

definitely instructed to show the receipts and charge (on account of
recoveries and refunds) in the schedule of unclassified receipts and
payments respectively. If any item of recovery or refund is shown in the
list of money orders issued or paid the money order checker should cancel
the entry in the money order list and alter the total of the summary,
making an explanatory note at foot of the summary for the guidance of the
checker of the Postal Accounts Section, who should correct the cash
account accordingly and enter the amount in the register of recoveries and
refunds referred to in para 3.116.

3.102 Each objection statement should be carefully scrutinized

before it is issued. In the following cases, as also in other cases in which it
may be thought necessary, copies of objection statements should be sent to
the Heads of Circles or their special attention should be drawn to them:-

(a) Overpayments exceeding Rs. 10 on account of money orders.

(b) Short credits exceeding Rs. 10 on account of money orders.

(c) Absence of credits for money orders.

(d) Wrong totals of money orders issued and paid lists when the
difference exceeds Rs. 10.

NOTE -- All cases of double payments of money orders arising out of the issue of
duplicate money orders or otherwise, or of overpayments on money orders or of short
credits in the total of money order Issue lists, or of excess charges in the total of paid
lists involving Rs. 50 or more, should be investigated thoroughly by Postal Accounts
Offices. See that adequate disciplinary action has been taken against the officials
responsible for the irregularity and that there has been no attempt at fraud. Cases, in
which there is indication of an attempt at fraud, should be fully investigated
irrespective of the amount involved.

3.103 Items of objection on account of short credit or

 152

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

overpayments of sums exceeding Rs. 1 but not exceeding Rs. 5 in respect
of either value or commission should be waived by a Group A or B officer
when the correspondence thereon tends to become protracted, and the
items do not indicate any postal official and do not form one of a series
pointing to systematic fraud. Items exceeding Rs. 5 but not exceeding Rs
25 and items exceeding Rs. 25 but not exceeding Rs. 50 may under similar
circumstances be waived under the orders of the Director/Dy. Director of
Accounts (Postal) and the Postal Dte (P.A. Wing) respectively.

The entries in the register should be attested by the J.A.O. in charge

of the Section and reviewed by the Group A or B Office monthly. Excess
credits in value or commission or short payments on money orders of sum
exceeding Rs. 1 may be adjusted under the group A or B officer to the
revenue head “1201-Postal Receipts-008-00-Other Receipts-02-22-01-
Other Items”, if it is found, after correspondence, that the Postmaster
could not effect payment of the sum to the part concerned. There is no bar
to payment of the amount when claimed subsequently.

3.104 The difference between the figures of the sum money orders
and the cash account will not be known to the Money Order Section until
the summary is returned by the checker of the Postal Accounts Section,
who will note on it, in red ink, the difference (if any) between the total of
the summary and the credit or debit in the cash account. The money order
Section will take this difference against the manuscript heading “Error in
Accounting” to be introduced in the summary to make the summary agree
with the cash account. The adjustment of the difference taken against
“Error in Accounting” will rest with the Money Order Section, which
should take it to “(1) 8553-Postal Advances-001-01 Postal Advances-02-
0001-Overpayment or Short Credit on Money Orders and (2) 8446- Postal
Deposits-001-01-Postal Deposits-6-0001-Short Payments or excess Credit
on Money Orders” and take steps to have the amount recovered or
refunded, as the case may require.
 153

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

NOTE -- Difference on a particular summary of sums not exceeding Re. 1 will be
adjusted in the manner indicated in Para 3.56.

Objection Book

3.105 The Objection Book will be maintained in Form No. D.G.

(PA)-433 separately for dealing with the issue of different months and
each Circle should have its own set of books. As each head office
objection statement for a period is ready for despatch, it will be copied
into the Objection Book. When all the objection statements of a Circle
have been so copied, the Objection Book will be closed by pasting a
closing entry slip [Form No. D.G. (PA)-435] at the bottom of the last page
for the month.

NOTE I -- In offices where the number of items under objection is not large, the
Deputy Director/Director may, if he finds it more convenient, authorise the
maintenance of only one book in Form D.G. (P A)-433 with a separate column in
manuscript for the entry of the month of issue in respect of each item of objection.

NOTE 2 -- As from May onwards, the year of issue and not the month of issue is
the account unit for Money Order issues of the previous financial year, a separate
Objection Bock will be maintained in the Money Order Section in respect of objections
relating to the issues of the previous year. But after all the monthly Objection Books up
to June Accounts are closed, unadjusted items of the previous year will be copied into
the yearly Objection Book referred to above and adjustments in respect of those items
recorded therein.

3.106 To close Money Order Objection Book, two transfer entries

must be prepared for each circle, in respect of the monthly total of the first
two money columns, clearing the head, “8781- Money Order -001-01
Inland Money Orders-000001-I Year of issue (Current Year)” by debit and
credit, respectively to the head “8553- Postal Advances-001-01 Postal
Advances-02-0001-Overpayment or Short Credit on Money Orders” and
“8446-Postal Deposit-001-01-Postal Deposits-6-0001-Short Payments or
Excess Credit on Money Orders”.

3.107 Except in the case of adjustment of amount shown as “error

 154

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

in accounting” in the Summaries of money orders issued (vide Para
3.104), all adjustments which effect the head “Inland Money Orders”
must, as a general rule, be made by an addition to, or deduction from, the
head on the payment side.

NOTE -- When it is discovered that the Postmaster's credit on account of the

value and commission of Value Payable or other money orders is short or excess under
one head, and vice versa under the other, the adjustment of this mistake should be made
in the same manner as in the case of the exception referred to in this Para.

Adjustment Register

3.108 An adjustment register will be maintained in Form D.G.

(PA)-434. The total of money columns of each month's adjustment register
will be deducted from the total balance of the amounts under objection. It
is therefore necessary that the adjustment register should be closed
simultaneously with the Objection Book.

3.109 An abstract of objection will be kept in Form No. A.T.M.-

131. A general abstract of all Objection Books should be prepared in order
to bring together the amounts, under-

(1) Objected to during the month.

(2) Adjusted during the month.

(3) Balance under objection.

NOTE -- The opening balance to be posted in the first column of the New Year’s
abstract of objections in Form A.T:M.-131 will be the March Final balance of the
previous year's abstract.

3.110 A broad sheet of the debits and credits of the “8553-Postal

Advances-001-01 postal Advances-02-0001-Overpayment or Short credit
on Money Orders” and “8446-Postal Deposits-001-01-Postal Deposits-6-
0001-Short payment or Excess credit on Money Orders” will be
maintained in form No. M.S.O. (T)-129 and M.S.O. (T)-111 respectively.

NOTE -- The balances shown in the Broadsheet of P& T Advances Money Order
 155

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Overpayments should, for the purpose of verification and control, be resolved half
yearly into items of actual transactions in a register in Form No S.Y.-285, which should
be reviewed by the Accounts Officer. In the analysis of balances under P&T Advance,
M.O. overpayments the Director/Dy. Director may, at his discretion, dispense with
details by individuals items relating to the immediately preceding half year.

Appropriation Accounts

3.111 Detailed instructions on this subject will be found in Chapter

6 of the Postal Accounts Manual, Volume I. All cases of Money order
frauds and embezzlements, wrong payments and double payments
involving Rs. 100 and above etc. will be included in the register referred
to in para ibid.

Cash Account Entries and Account Objections

3.112 The Cash Account of each Head Post Office shows the
following entries on account of money orders, viz, under Receipts (1)
“Money Orders issued” (2) “Commission on money orders”, and under
Payments (3) “Money Orders paid”. The figures for money orders paid
will also be distributed and exhibited in the inner column separately for
the three months of issue, i.e. for the previous month, the current month
and the following month. All items will be posted against the
corresponding heads in Classified Abstract (but see Para 3.113).

NOTE -- The Commission on Field Service money orders is not

included in the credit in the Cash Account, but is adjusted in the Postal
Accounts Office vide Para 3.19.

3.113 Deleted

3.114 Deleted

3.115 Besides the entries in the body of the cash account referred
to in Para 3.112, there may be sundry entries under unclassified receipts or
unclassified payments in rectification of overpayments or short-payments
of money orders, and the checker of the Postal Accounts Section will
 156

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

carefully examine the schedules with a view to tracing out such credits or
debits and -deal with them under the following rules:--

(a) Recoveries of over-payments should he credited to “P&T

Advances Money Order-Over-Payments”.

(b) Charges on account of short-payments should be debited to

“P&T Deposits-Money Order-Short-payments”.

(c) Charges on account of void orders should be debited to the

“Inland Money Order” head.

(d) Adjustments on account of short and excess credits of

commission should be credited to “Commission on Money
Orders” and debited to “Refunds-Money Order Commission”
respectively.

3.116 The checker of the Postal Accounts Section will classify the
entries referred to in para 3.115 on the assumption that they adjust out
standings under the heads named, and furnish the Money Order Section
with full details of items (a), (b) and (d) in a register in Form D.G. (PA)-
436. The register should be sent to the Money Order section twice a
month, after the receipt of the account for each period. The Money Order
Section will adjust the items in the respective objection books.

Recoveries/Payments on account of excess/erroneous/short payments

of individual MOs appearing in the P.O. accounts relating to the issues of
foreign circle Postal Accounts Offices will be finally adjusted under the
head, “IMO” in the accounts of the circles in which the transactions occur,
and their particulars will be intimated to the concerned Postal Accounts
Offices through a monthly Recoveries & Refunds statement in the existing
form. No advice of credits/debits on this account will be exchanged among
the Postal Accounts Offices.

3.117 The Money Order Section will take prompt measures to note
 157

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

the adjustments referred to in Paras 3.115 and 3.116 against the
corresponding items in the Objection Book. If no such items exist, a
provisional adjustment will be made to deal1 the outstanding by credit or
debit to “Postal Receipts-other items” under “155-Postal Receipts, 7 Other
Receipts” other items. The items will not, however, be allowed to rest
finally under this head. The reasons for each credit or charge should be
ascertained by a reference to the Money order concerned. If the money
order referred to does not disclose any discrepancy, the Postmaster should
be addressed as to the cause of recovery or payment. If correct particulars
or the money order are furnished and the money order shows a
discrepancy a ‘not to issue’ objection statement will be prepared and the
head “Postal Receipts-Other items” will be cleared by transfer or the
credit or debit to the proper head. If the paid money order has not come
under check a note will be made in the issue list with instruction to the
debit-checker to prepare a ‘not to issue’ objection statement for the
amount or the money order when debit checked. If, on the other hand, the
paid money order does not reveal any difference, and the correspondence
with the Postmaster becomes protracted without any result the amount
may rest finally under the head “Postal receipts”. In the case of charges,
however, the items may be waived up to the limit of Rs. 25. If the amount
exceeds Rs. 25 the case should be reported to the Director General, Postal
Services (PA Wing) if it cannot be settled with executive officers”. No
action need be taken for sums or 15 paise and less, which may be allowed
to remain finally under the revenue head. A note should, however, be
made in the Register of amounts waived (Form No. S.Y.-265) in the
column provided for the purpose of recovery of items, however small,
which were already waived. Suitable notes of action taken in respect or
provisionally adjusted items and of the final adjustment of those items
should be recorded in the register of refunds and recoveries for the month
against the items concerned. A summary detailing the adjustment of the
 158

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

total figure in the register of refunds and recoveries under each head of
account will also be given at foot of the register below the last entries.

NOTE -- Outstanding items of recoveries and refunds under the head “Money
Order Commission” in the register of refunds and recoveries are allowed to remain
under that head and are not transferred to the head-“other items” under 155-Postal
Receipts 7-0ther Receipts. In the case of outstanding items of recoveries the items will
be finally admitted without any investigation. As regards outstanding items of refunds
of money order commission no action need be taken for sums of Re. 1 and less. Each
item exceeding Re. 1 should be fully investigated. The final clearance of the items of
refunds should be watched through the broadsheet mentioned in par1 3.118. In every
case a note of refund should be kept in the Issue list in the proper place to guard against
double payment.

3.118 To enable the J.A.O. and the Branch Officer to see whether
all the items in the Refund and Recovery register which were
provisionally adjusted to “Other Receipts” in a month have subsequently
been finally adjusted to the proper heads, a broadsheet in the Form of
abstract of objections M.S.O. (T)-l31 should be maintained in the
Objection Book group showing the amount provisionally adjusted in a
month and the subsequent final adjustments in different months against it.
The Broadsheet and the Refund and Recovery Register should be
submitted to the Branch Officer for review on the 28th of each month.

NOTE 1 -- The items intimated by Foreign Postal Accounts Offices through the
R. R. Statements (para 3.126 should also be included in the Broadsheet.

NOTE 2 -- If, however, it is found that any Of the items represents recovery of
an overpayment or refund of a short change on money order issued by a Postal Circle
under another Postal Accounts Office, the item will be transferred to that office. An
intimation of the adjustment should, at the same time, be sent to the other Postal
Accounts Office which will bring the item on its books by a responding entry.

3.119 A separate sub-schedule of void money orders paid is

received in the Money Order Section, Void Money Order group. The
amounts are classified in that group and communicated to the Postal
Accounts Section for incorporation in the classified Abstract, vide Para
 159

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

3.72.

Reconciliation of Transfers

3.120 Deleted

3.121 Deleted

3.122 Deleted

3.123 Deleted

3.124 Deleted

3.125 Deleted

3.126 Statements of Money order recoveries and refunds received

from the Foreign Postal Accounts Offices should also be adjusted in full in
one month. If any items shown therein are not traceable in the Objection
Book, the amounts will be provisionally adjusted to “Fees and other
Receipts” by clearing remittance head and action taken for their final
clearance as in the case of such items appearing in the register of refunds
and recoveries, vide Para 3.117.

Statistics

3.127 A register [Form D.G. (PA)-402] will be maintained for each

Postal Circle showing in respect of each Bead Post Office in the Circle the
gross number, value and commission of Inland Money Orders issued and
the gross number and value of Inland Money Orders paid during each
month of the year. The figures should be posted monthly and the monthly
totals will be transcribed into the abstract page at the end of the register.
The register will be submitted to the Branch Officer for review every
month. After the closure of the March Supplementary accounts the register
will be totalled and a statement prepared therefrom and sent to the PA
Wing of the Directorate by the 31st August, together with the statistics or
Foreign Money Orders, referred to in Paragraph 3.200 and the statement
 160

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

showing the number, value and commission of Family Allotment Money
Orders. Separate statements in Form Nos. D.G. (PA)-439, and 439A will
also be sent to the PA Wing of the Directorate by the 31st August for the
purpose of verification of the amounts of money orders issued and paid in
each Circle with the General Abstract. The Annual Report on Money
Orders should be sent by the PA Wing (of the Directorate) to Statistics
Section of the Directorate on 20th September. Form Nos. D.G. (PA)-439
and 439A will also be posted monthly and submitted to the Branch Officer
for review.

Money Order Sent out

3.128 Letters or telegrams of enquiry regarding disposal of money

orders and requisitions for paid money orders are dealt with in a separate
group called the “Money Order sent out” group. They should be indexed
in a separate register [Form D.G. (PA)-440] and disposed of with great
promptitude.

NOTE 1 -- Requisitions whether for paid Money Orders or of the nature of

enquiries should be listed into the following categories, separate folios being allotted
for each:-

(i) Requisitions for paid Money Orders from Departmental

authorities;

(ii) Requisitions from Judicial and Police Officers;

(iii) Letters and telegrams of enquiries regarding the disposal of

Money Orders;

(iv) Registers for unpaid Void Money Orders and Telegraphic

Money Orders requisitions.

NOTE 2 -- Paid money orders may be forwarded to Head Postmasters, Sub-

Postmasters in the Selection Grade, Inspectors and Superintendents of Post Offices and
higher authorities of the Department if they so desire. Unpaid void money orders should
not, however, be forwarded to Inspectors and Postmasters subordinate to
 161

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Superintendents. In making requisitions for void money orders, the Superintendents or
First class Postmasters should state the circumstances in which they are required. (See
Rule 220 of the Posts and Telegraphs Manual, Volume V, and Rule 104 of the Posts and
Telegraphs Financial Hand Book, Volume I).

3.129 For each money order referred to in the letter or requisition,

a check slip in printed Form No. D.G. (PA)-403 will be prepared showing
the particulars of the money order as well as the number and date of the
reference.

3.130 If the money order relates to a period for which the records
have already been destroyed, a reference should be made to the Void List
or the register of unpaid items to ascertain the fate of the money order. If
it is not traceable in any of the registers the presumption is that the money
order has been paid within currency and destroyed after the ordinary
period of preservation. The fact as ascertained should be intimated in
reply in printed Form No. D.G. (PA)-441.

NOTE -- A register in manuscript in the following form may be maintained in

which the particulars of the Money orders paid vouchers requisitioned should be
recorded according to the month of issue (separate folio being allotted for each month
of issue).

Register Showing Cases of M. O. Requisitioned by Departmental Officers/Police

etc; for Investigations etc;
Month of issue
Due Date of destruction
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl No. Particular of No & Particulars Office of Office of No. & Remarks
of Authority For Date of of Money issue Payment Date of
requisitioning letter No. Date H.O.S.O. H.O.S.O. supplying the
Voucher
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This register should be consulted at the time of weeding out the
 162

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Money order paid voucher for destruction to ensure that no vouchers
which have not been supplied and are outstanding in the register are
destroyed inadvertently. A certificate to the effect that all requisitioned
vouchers have been supplied and there are no requisitions outstanding for
the M.O. paid vouchers which have been allowed to be weeded out for
destruction, will be required to be recorded against each folio for the
concerned month of issue. The register should be submitted to Director /
Dy. Director on the last day of each month for review to ensure that there
is no delay in supply of the requisitioned voucher.

NOTE 2 -- A register in manuscript showing the particulars of Money order

vouchers could not be furnished to executive due to non-availability of the same for any
reasons may be maintained by the sent out group and submitted to the J.A.O. and
Branch Officer in the first week of each month. The sent-out group should consult this
register before destruction of the Money orders vouchers due for destruction to verify
that none of the vouchers entered in the register is destroyed along with other Money
order vouchers and endorse a certificate to the effect “that all the vouchers required by
Executive arid traceable and the bundles have been segregated and the remaining
vouchers can now be destroyed”.

A note of such requisitions should also be made in the issue list “that the
vouchers if and when traced subsequently and debit checked should be made over to the
Sent-out group” After receipt of the vouchers in the sent-out group, the voucher will be
filed along with the sent-out cases.

3.131 If the issue list which appertains to the Money order has not
been destroyed, the list will be referred to and if the money order is found
debit checked therein, the check slip should be placed in the bundle
concerned in lieu of the money order voucher concerned. If the list is
closed but not destroyed, the Issue list and both the statements and register
of unpaid items should be referred to. The checker will then intimate the
disposal of the money order filing the money order voucher with the case
or send the money order voucher in a registered cover with a forwarding
letter, as the case may be [vide Form No. D.G. (PA)-44l].
 163

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

3.132 If the issue list shows that the money order has been checked
in red pencil, indicating that it has been received as void, the unpaid void
money order should not be removed from the bundle of void orders. The
fact that it has been received as void with the void list may be intimated.
If the void money order is, however, required for purpose of enquiry, it
may be sent with instructions that it should not be paid before it is
formally reissued by the Postal Accounts Office. A check slip should be
placed in lieu of the money order in the bundle of unpaid void money
orders.

3.133 If the money order remains unchecked in the issue list and
the money orders relating to the issues of the month concerned have not
been completely debit-checked, no definite information regarding the
disposal of the money order can, at this stage, be furnished. A reply
should in this case be sent in printed Form No. D.G. (PA)-441 stating that
the money order has, not come under check. When the money Orders
relating to the month of issue of the money order requisitioned for have
been completely debit-checked and it is found by reference to the Issue
List and statement and register of unpaid items that the money order was
not checked or scored out as paid the I reply should also be sent in printed
Form D.G. (PA)-44l stating that the money order has not been received as
paid or void. No subsequent communication on the subject should be
promised in the reply and the case treated as closed for the time being.

NOTE -- If, however, with the particulars supplied in the requisition the Money
Orders can be traced even before debit checking it should be so traced and the
procedure outlined in Para 3.132 generally followed.

3.134 No information as to the disposal of a money order should

ordinarily be furnished to a member of the public, even if he be the
remitter or the payee. Letters of enquiry, when received, will be returned
to the party with the request that he may address the Postmaster or the
Supervising Postal Officer concerned. Complaints regarding nonpayment
 164

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

of money orders received direct in the Accounts Office should also be
similarly disposed of. Requirements for paid money orders received from
officers other than Departmental Postal Officers, and Judicial and Police
officers, should not be complied with. Those officers should be asked to
address the Head of the Circle concerned.

NOTE 2 -- The “Money Order sent out” Register [Form D.G. (PA) Judicial or
Police Officers should be called back and recorded in the Accounts Office along with
the cases pertaining to them.

NOTE 2 -- The “Money Order sent Out” Register [Form D.G. (PA)- 440] will be
treated as the despatch register also for the cases dealt with in the “Money Order sent
out” group. The despatch number will be the index number with the letter (a) added to
it. The distinctive mark M.O.S. may form the numerator and the despatch number the
denominator. The note of disposal will be made in the register against the index number
concerned in the column provided for the purpose. Telegrams will be entered in red ink.

Progress Report

3.135 Each sub-checker and machine operator employed in any of

the groups of the Money Order Section except Void and other groups for
which daily rates of outturn cannot be enforced should maintain a progress
report in the prescribed form [D.G. (PA)-4l5, 442 or 442A] and fill up the
outturn for each day and make it over to the checker or the Supervisor
concerned on the morning of the following day. Particulars of the lists and
other items of work done should be mentioned in the report.

The daily rates for the different kinds of work in the Money Order
Section are prescribed from time to time by Director General Postal
Services.

NOTE 1 -- In the case of groups for which daily rates of outturn are not
prescribed, the due dates fixed for the submission of various documents and for check
should be strictly observed.

NOTE 2 -- Any shortage in outturn should be made up on the following day or

before the check for the period is completed.
 165

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

NOTE 3 -- So long as the work is current, the prescribed rates should be
maintained. When the work is in arrears, the Director/Dy. Director may enhance the
rates not exceeding up to 15 percent at his discretion. Except in individual cases, no
reduction of the rates is permissible.

NOTE 4 -- A consolidated register showing the receipt and disposal and the
earliest date of receipt of un-disposed letters in each group of the Money Order Section
should be prepared and submitted daily to the J.A.O. and weekly to the Branch Officer
in charge.

3.136 The checker or the Supervisors-in-charge of the groups

should check these reports and each of them should submit a consolidated
report showing the names of persons and the work turned out by each on
each day to the J.A.O. who after proper scrutiny will send a consolidated
report to the Branch Officer every Wednesday for review. The
consolidated report gives an idea of how the work in each group stands
and whether the work will be completed within the prescribed period. It is
the duty of the J.A.O. in charge of the section to see that the work in any
group does not fall into arrears and he should, therefore, keep eye on the
due date fixed for each kind of work and so arrange the staff as to
complete the work in all stages on the due dates. If the work is not
finished by the due dates the matter should be brought to the notice of the
Branch Officer for increase in the daily rate of outturn or transfer of men
from other or grant of overtime allowances if admissible.

3.137 The checker in charge of Paid List and Issue List groups
should, after completion of the examination of the lists for a period,
compile the total daily outturn of the sub-checker Who cheeked the lists
for the period and agree the total outturn for the period with the number of
money orders entered in the paid list group broadsheets and that obtained
from the Issue abstracts to see that the outturn has been correctly shown
by the sub-checkers and transcribed into the consolidated report. An
agreement of the outturn given by the machine operators with the total of
the abstracts should also be made by the Supervisor of the Comptometer
 166

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

group or by the checker in-charge of Paid List and Issue List group as
ordered by the Director/Dy. Director of Accounts in the agreement
memorandum of the respective groups. This agreement memorandum
should be submitted to the Senior J.A.O. in charge of M.O. Section
through the J.A.O. or Accountant of the group concerned who should
verify the figures. Difference if any indicates unreliability of the reports
submitted by the Sub-checkers and those found guilty of willful
submission of false reports should be reported to the Branch Officer for
disciplinary action.

3.138 Each checker-in-charge of a group who is required to

conduct a daily review should keep a Dairy in Form No. D.G. (PA)-444
for the purpose. The diary should be submitted to the Senior J.A.O. in-
charge of M.O. Section daily and to the Accounts Officer-in-charge every
Wednesday.

3.139 Each of the J.A.O. in-charge of the check groups of the

Money Order section should also maintain a Diary in Form No. D.G.
(PA)-444 showing the review done by him of the different kinds of work
turned out by the men under his charge. Similarly each of the J.A.O. in-
charge of the Miscellaneous group should conduct a review of the work of
the miscellaneous groups, viz. Void, ledger, Remittance, objection Book,
etc. Any carelessness or irregularities noticed will be written up in the
Diary, which will be submitted to the J.A.O. of the M.O. Section daily and
to the Accounts Officer-in-charge every Wednesday.

A general Error Book will be maintained in manuscript by the J.A.O.

of the M.O. Section who should note therein an mistakes committed by
officials other than those for whom separate Error Books are maintained.

NOTE 1 -- A systematic check of the issue lists of all the offices should be
conducted by the Checkers of the Miscellaneous Groups every month with a view to see
that all unchecked items have been correctly copied out in the unchecked sheets [Form
D.G. (PA)-423] and that none has been left out. For this purpose, the offices to be
 167

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

reviewed should be equitably distributed by the J.A.O. in-charge of M.O. Section
among them at the beginning of each year by taking into account the average number of
transactions occurring in the previous year in these offices. The reviewers should then
copy out the names of Head and Sub-Offices assigned to them in a manuscript register
allotting separate page or pages for each Head and its Sub-Offices. The lists so
reviewed should be attested with the dated initials and a record of the review made in
the relevant columns of the register provided for the purpose. The register should be
submitted to the Branch Officer for review through the J.A.O. in charge of the Money
Order Section on the la3t working day of every month.

NOTE 2 -- A review of the conversion of sterling values of Foreign Money

Orders should also be conducted in the Foreign Money Orders Section. The checkers
Foreign Money Order Group, should do alternately, the check and the review work
mentioned here.

NOTE 3 -- A certificate on the following lines under the dated initials of the
checkers, Supervisors and the Superintending staff should be recorded in the Review
Registers before its submission to the B.O. in-charge.

“Certified that the check and review of vouchers and returns marked for check
and review/required to be checked and reviewed for the month of ………………….,
have been completed and objections, if any, raised as a result of such check and review
here been issued.”

SECTION II - FOREIGN MONEY ORDER

Introductory

3.140 Foreign Money Orders are Money Orders which originate

in or are ultimately paid by the Postal Administration of a country. State
or Colony outside the jurisdiction of the Department of Posts, Paras
3.141 to 3.206 prescribes the procedure to be followed in the checking
and accounting of these transactions.

The term “Outward Money Orders” refers to money orders which

originate at an Indian Post Office and are sent outside the jurisdiction of
the Indian Post Office for payment, while the term “Inward Money
Orders” refers to money orders which originate outside the jurisdiction
of the Indian Post Office and come into it for payment or for onward
 168

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

transmission to another Country, State or Colony.

NOTE 1 -- For definitions of the terms “Foreign sterling money order” and
“Foreign rupee money orders”, see Rule 311 of the Posts and Te1egraphs Manual,
Volume VI.

NOTE 2 -- The names of the foreign countries or colonies with which India
exchanges money orders and the names of the Indian Offices of exchange for those
countries and colonies will be found in the Foreign Post Directory of the Posts and
Telegraphs Guide.

NOTE 3 -- The Director General Postal Services is required to fix the rates of
conversion for sterling Money Orders and British Postal Orders. Whenever there is a
change in the market quotations for sterling exchange.

Once a month the P.A. Wing of the Directorate (Technical Section) should
examine the record to see if change in the rates of Postal remittance have been
intimated by the Director General/ Section and examined by the office. If no
intimations were received an enquiry should be made from that section to confirm
whether there has been no change in the market quotations

The review should be made on the 15th of each month and a watch of it kept
through the calendar of Returns.

NOTE 4 -- The provisions contained in para 3.98 will apply mutatis mutandis
to this section also.

I - OUTWARD & STERLING MONEY ORDERS

Account arrangement

3.141 Outward sterling money orders are not accounted for in a

separate issue lists but are included in the ordinary lists of money orders
issued, the entries being distinguished by the letter “S” prefixed to the
number. So far as the check of these entries in the issue lists is
concerned, no special procedure is necessary. The money orders being
payable out of India, the offices of exchange merely submit periodical
lists of the money orders advised to foreign countries accompanied by
the money orders which are regarded as paid.
 169

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Examination of Exchange Office Outward Lists

3.142 Each office of exchange submits to the several Accounts

Offices lists of money orders advised by each mail to each of foreign
country on account of issues by Post Offices within their respective
Circles of accounting. These lists in Form No. F.M.O.-2 which are
termed “Exchange Office Outward lists”, show-

(a) the number of the money order,

(b) the date of the money order,

(c) the head or sub-office of issue,

(d) the sterling value of the money order,

(e) its equivalent in Rupees converted at the rate prevalent on the

date of issue of the money order, and

(f) commission on the money order.

All these particulars should be verified by the sub-checker with

reference to the money orders accompanying the list, and the initial
letters of the Postal Circles as given below should be noted against the
entries in the list in order to facilitate the compilation of a statistics for
statement I prescribed in Para 3.200. In the case of ‘through’ money
orders, the letter ‘F’ will be noted against the entry.

Circle Initial Letter

1. Assam Circle . . . . S

2.Andhra Circle . . . . K

3.Bihar Circle . . . . P

4.Mumbai Circle . . . . B

5.Central Circle . . . . N

6.Delhi Circle . . . . D
 170

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

7.Gujarat Circle . . . . H

8.Kerala Circle . . . . R

9.Kashmir Circle . . . . T

10. Mysore Circle . . . . Q

11. Madras Circle . . . . M

12. Orissa Circle . . . . CU

13. Punjab Circle . . . . CH

14. Rajasthan Circle . . . . JJ

15. Uttar Pradesh Circle . . . L

16. West Bengal Circle . . . C

3.143 The sub-checker will also see-

(a) that commission on each order has been correctly noted in the
outward list.

(b) that the rupee equivalent of each sterling money order shown in
the list is correct with reference to the rate of conversion in
force on the date of issue of the money order. Any discrepancy
in rupee equiva1ents will be entered in red ink as a plus or
minus entry below the Postmaster's entry of amount in the
rupee column and the totals corrected accordingly; the correct
rupee equivalent should also be noted on the money order under
the dated initials of the examiner for further action by the debit
checker.

(c) that the money orders relating to issues of different months are
correctly charged in the respective outward list.

NOTE -- If he detects any mistakes, he must strike out the entry of money order
from the outward list in which it was wrongly charged, and make a fresh entry for the
same in the proper list (if received) or in a separate portion of the same list, under a
 171

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

distinct heading in red ink. He will correct the totals of the lists accordingly and
embody the corrections in the consolidated totals given at the foot of the outward list.

(d) that in the case of a wanting money order, the action prescribed
in item (vi) of Para 3.30 B.

(e) that postage stamps of the value of 20 paisa on account of fee

for obtaining “advice of payment” have been affixed to the
outward foreign sterling money orders (payable in countries
from which advices of payment are obtainable. vide Rule 135 of
the Posts and Telegraphs Manual, Volume VI), on which the
words “Advice of Payment” or “A.P.” have been written in red
ink.

NOTE 1 -- Foreign outward sterling a money order are issued by office of

exchange in lieu of telegraphic foreign money orders and against the entries of such
money orders in the outward lists no commission will be noted.

NOTE 2 -- In the case of telegraphic money orders, the requisition should be

examined to see if stamps on account of fee for “advice of payment” have been affixed
to it.

NOTE 3 -- The instructions in clause (e) will not be applicable in the case of
through money orders, as the postage stamps realised will be affixed to the Money
Orders in the country of Origin.

3.144 When the examination of an exchange office outward list

received in an Accounts Office has been completed, the sub-checker will
verify the totals of the number and amount of the money orders (both
sterling and rupee columns) and of the commission entered therein. Any
discrepancy in the totals at the sterling value should be intimated to the
office of exchange for subsequent adjustment. If the Accounts Office is
not the Accounts Office of the principal office of exchange, it will
intimate the figures to the latter in Form D.G. (P A)-445. This intimation
will be prepared in duplicate by carbon process, the pencil copy being
retained as office copy and the carbonised copy sent to the Accounts
 172

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Office concerned. The total of each list of each week for each country of
exchange will be posted in a register [Form D.G. (PA)-446] in which
separate pages will be allotted for each Accounts Office. The issues of the
current month should entered in black ink while those of the previous
months should be entered in red ink. At the end of the month the-register
will be totalled, and the grand total of the rupee amount, shown in the
register, will be, adjusted by the following transfer entry, to be made in
the accounts of the principal Postal Circle under the check of the Accounts
Office:-

Dr.

Inland Money orders (month of Issue)

To Money Order Remittances Cr

Transfers Postal Accounts Office..................

Transfers Postal Accounts Office..................

Transfers Postal Accounts Office.................

-------------------------------

Total

-------------------------------

3.145 In the Accounts Office of the principal office of exchange

the consolidated totals shown at foot of the outward lists received by it
have been proved with the figures furnished by the other Accounts
Offices, the figures for each Accounts Office will be entered in a register
of Form D.G. (PA)-447, in which separate pages are allotted for each
country of exchange record transactions for the whole year relating to all
the Indian Office of exchange. The monthly total of the rupee amount,
shown therein, should be adjusted as below in the accounts of the
Principal Postal Circle for the month following the month to which the
 173

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

lists relate advice of the remittance [Form A.C.G.- 77] being sent to the
respective Accounts Office-

Dr. Rs. Inland money orders (month of issue)

(Amount of Home Circle outward list),

Rs. Money Order Remittances

Transfer Postal Accounts Office

Transfer Postal Accounts Office

Transfer Postal Accounts Office

To

Foreign Money Orders

Cr.

Great Britain and Northern Ireland Rs.

Denmark................................... Rs.

& etc: ................................... Rs.

NOTE 1 -- Errors in the amounts of commission shown in the outward list will
be corrected by the examiner in red ink, and the corrected total communicated in Form
No. D.G. (PA)-443 to the Postal Accounts Office of the principal office of exchange.
The latter will accept the figures thus intimated as correct, although they may not agree
with shown in the consolidated totals at foot of the outward list received in the office.

NOTE 2 -- The examination of the outward lists will be completed in one week
of their receipt.

NOTE 3 -- For the purpose of adjustment a register in Form D.G. (PA) should be
maintained showing for each country of exchange the amount to be adjusted under
various heads of accounts under Money Order Remittances and Inland Money Orders.

The total amount under each head of account in this register will be
adjusted monthly by credit to “Foreign Money Orders”.
 174

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Sorting of outward sterling orders

3.146 The outward foreign sterling money orders are after

examination made over by the foreign list examiner through a memo in
form D.G. (PA)-407 to the Sorting Group where they are sorted with the
ordinary Money Orders.

Repayment to/Remittance in India

3.146-A (a) On receipt of the list of repaid orders (vide Rule 322 of
the Posts and Telegraphs Manual, Volume VI) in the Money Orders
Section, the totals will be checked and the number and date of each list of
the foreign country authorising the repayment together with the amount of
that list will be recorded in a register in Form D.G. (PA)-477, separate
pages being allotted for each foreign country. The total amount of the
repaid orders in a month will then be struck and adjusted in the accounts
Of the month to which the repaid lists relate by a transfer entry thus:-

Dr.

Rs.10,000 Foreign Money Orders (United Kingdom)

Rs.15,000 Do. (Denmark) Cr.

Inland Money Orders (June 1975) issues

Rs. 25,000

(b) The paid orders will be sorted in the usual way and debit-cheeked
in the repaid order list.

(c) On receipt of the settlement account, the entry in the register

referred to in clause (a) will be compared with the amount shown to the
credits of India in the list, of repaid and void orders attached to the
settlement account, and a note made in the register showing against the
item the month of exchange account in which the item is accounted for.
Any discrepancy or any undue delay in claiming credit in the exchange
account will be noticed and settled in communication with the Postmaster
 175

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

of the principal office of exchange.

3.147 In the case of repayment to a remitter of a “through” money

order the procedure prescribed in para 3.146A is not followed, but the
value of the money order is credited to the country of issue by debit to the
country of payment through the respective settlement accounts. If the
settlement accounts with the countries are submitted to the same Accounts
Office the credit in the one and the charge in the other will be adjusted by
single transfer entry on receipt of the two accounts; but when the
settlement accounts are submitted to two different Accounts Offices, the
procedure to be observed will be as exemplified below:-

A Money order issued in England for payment in Malaya is to be a

repaid to the remitter. The amount is debited (i.e. shown to the credit of
India) in the Calcutta G.P.O. settlement account with Malaya and credited
(i.e. shown to the credit of England) in the Bombay settlement account
with Great Britain and Northern Ireland. The debit and credit will be
adjusted by transfer entries thus

II-IN THE CALCUTIA ACCOUNTS OFFICE

Dr. Foreign Money Orders

Malaya

To Money Order Remittance from Nagpur Postal Accounts Office Cr.

In the Nagpur Postal A/c Office

Dr.

Money Order Remittance to Calcutta Postal Accounts Office

To

Foreign Money Orders

(Great Britain and Northern Ireland)

An advice of the adjustment [Form No. A.C.G.-77] made in the

Nagpur Postal Accounts Office should be sent to the Calcutta Postal
 176

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Accounts Office.

3.148 In the case of an outward sterling money· order intercepted

by the remitter before it has been advised to the country of payment, the
actual sum in rupee currency, and not the commission realised from the
remitter, should be refunded to him. The amount will be charged in the list
of money order paid, supported by the money order which will be debit
checked in the usual way.

II-INWARD STERLING ORDER

Explanation

3.149 In the case of inward sterling Money Orders, the Indian

Office of exchange represents the office of issue. It receives periodically a
list of money orders advised by the foreign country, converts the sterling
amount of each money order into rupee currency at the rate in force on the
date advice of the foreign country (as fixed by the Director General Postal
Services, from time to time), and prepares corresponding money orders in
a special form prescribed for inward sterling orders, which are in the
ordinary course forwarded to the office of payment.

Exceptions- The amounts of money orders advised by the Union of

South Africa are expressed in British currency and should be converted
into the rupee currency at the rate of exchange prevailing on the date of
receipt of the inward list.

Checking of Exchange Office inward lists

3.150 A periodical list ill Form F.M.O. 3 of inward Sterling money

orders issued is submitted by the office of exchange to the Home Postal
Accounts Office with the following particulars:-

(a) the number of money order;

(b) the date of the money order;

 177

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

(c) the head or sub-office of payment;

(d) the sterling value of the money order;

(e) the rupee equivalent; and

(f) the commission on “through money orders”.

In the list there is also a column for noting in the Accounts office,
the initial letter of the Postal Circle of payment, vide Para 3.142.

3.151 The list of inward sterling money orders issued is divided

into sections corresponding to drawings by the different foreign countries
and headed with the numbers and dates of the respective inward lists
received from those countries. These lists checked as follows:-

(i) The sequence of number is examined.

(ii) The conversion of the sterling amount into rupee equivalent is

verified item by item, and wrong calculation being corrected in
red ink and the total altered accordingly under the initials of the
checker. The error should be pointed out to the office of
exchange.

(iii) The commission on through money orders is checked with

reference to the rates given in Appendix C to the Posts and
Telegraphs Manual, Volume VI.

(iv) The totals are checked (any corrections that may be found
necessary being made and intimated to the office of exchange).

(v) The figures are finally posted week by week for each inward
list in a register in Form D.G. (PA)-446 for the purpose of the
monthly adjustment by a transfer entry, thus:-

Dr.

Foreign Money Orders (country of exchange)

 178

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

(rupee equivalent).

To

Inland money orders (month of issue).

Commission on money orders

(through money orders).

N.B. - The figures for this list bearing dates of the previous months
are posted separately and in red ink.

(vi) The initial letters of the Circles of payment are entered in the
column provided for the purpose. In the case of ‘through’
money orders, the letter F will be assigned.

3.152 The examination of the lists should be completed within one

week of their receipt and then made over to the checker for debit
checking.

NOTE -- The transfer entries should be made in the accounts of the month
following the month of which the lists relate.

3.153 If the office of exchange from which the inward list has been
received is not the principal office of exchange, and the latter is situated
within the area of another Postal Accounts Office, the debit in the transfer
entry referred to in Para 3.152 will be taken to the “Remittance” head and
an advice of transfer issued to the other Postal Accounts Office concerned
detailing the total number, amount, and commission on through money
orders entered in the list with particulars of the period thereof, for the
purpose of raising the debit in the list, under the head “Foreign Money
Orders (Country of exchange)” by credit to the head “Remittance”. The
figures thus communicated to the Postal Accounts Office of the principal
office of exchange should be entered in the register of inward orders
maintained by that office (separately for each country and office of
exchange) below the figures of the offices of exchange under its own
 179

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Circle of Accounting, while in the remitting Postal Accounts Office they
should be posted in a separate part of the register of inward orders.

N.B. - In the advice of transfer the details of the lists bearing dates
of the previous months should be entered in red ink for necessary action
being taken by the receiving Postal Accounts Office.

Check of payment

3.154 The inward sterling money order, when paid are included in
the ordinary lists of money orders paid, and are distinguished by the letter
‘S’ placed before their numbers. They are sorted as ordinary money orders
and dealt with by the checker.

Repayment to remitters and void orders

3.155 Inward money orders repaid to their remitter during currency

will be received with forwarding letters from the office of exchange in
which the repayments are intimated. Suitable notes will be made in the
Inward Lists and the money orders entered in a register in Form D.G.
(PA)-450. Their adjustment in the money orders exchange accounts should
be watched through he same register D.G. (PA)-450, all correspondence in
connection with such repayment being treated as closed. The register
should be reviewed monthly by the J.A.O. and quarterly by the Branch
Officer-in-charge.

3.156 If an inward sterling money order is not paid within the

period of currency, it is accounted for a3 void. Should its repayment be
applied for by the office of exchange on behalf of the remitter, it will,
after note in the void list be duly authorised by the Postal Accounts Office
concerned, which will on receipt from the office of exchange of the
intimation of the advice of repayment to the foreign country, enter the
money order in the register in Form D.G. (PA)-450 or communicate it to
the Accounts office of the principal office of exchange, as the case may
 180

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

be, see Para 3.158. If, however, no application for the repayment is
received, the void orders will be communicated by the Accounts Office in
Form D.G. (PA)-451 or inform D.G. (PA)-453, as the case may be, to the
office of exchange on the expiry six months from the date of receipt in
India, to be written back to the credit of the foreign country of issue in the
next exchange account, where the repayments to remitters will also
appear, see Para 3.177.

The above procedure should not, however, be followed in the case of

void inward value-payable money orders issued from Ceylon. The value of
such orders should be transferred to the head “Forfeited money orders, in
the manner indicated in Para 3.177.”

3.157 In the case of Iraq, all inward orders not paid in India should
be placed to the credit of that Administration direct and shown in the
settlement account as repaid orders. Lists of repayments are sent to the
Accounts Office by the office of exchange along with the money orders
for which repayments are sanctioned. On receipt of the lists, suitable notes
are made in the Inward list, or the register of unpaid money orders. The
totals of the lists are then entered in the register of repayments [Form D.G.
(PA)-450] and the lists are kept on record. On receipt of settlement
accounts, these lists are referred to for the particulars of the money orders
shown therein and the amount adjusted.

3.157-A The details of inward money orders re-advised for

repayment to a foreign country are entered in the Repaid Register [Form
No. D.G. (PA)-450] on receipt of information from Foreign Accounts
Offices or the principal office of exchange.

3.158 The authorisation for repayment to remitters of inward

orders, and the communications of void inward orders as prescribed in
Paras 3.145 to 3.148 if addressed to an office of exchange other then the
principal office of exchange, and in case the latter be within the
 181

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

accounting area of another Accounts Office, should also be advised in
Forms D.G. (PA)-452 and 451 to that Accounts Office in order that it may
be in a position to watch the adjustments appearing in the settlement
accounts through the register in Form No. D.G. (PA)-450 maintained by it.
When such adjustments are traced, the Account Office of the principal
office of exchange will verify the items from the register maintained by it
and adjust the amount as follows:--

Dr.

Money Order Remittances

To

Foreign Money Orders

(country of exchange)……………………………..Cr.

An advice of transfer should also be issued, at the same time, to the

other Accounts Office concerned where the necessary note will be made in
its register of void orders and a transfer entry prepared as follows :-

Dr.

Inland Money Orders (month of issue).

To

Money Order Remittances………………………...Cr.

III - OUTWARD RUPEE ORDERS

Checking Arrangements

3.159 The money orders are included in the lists of money orders
issued, but are distinguished from inland orders by the letter ‘F’ noted
before the number in the lists and the checking of the value and
commission is performed under the rules for inland money orders (vide
 182

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Paras 3.14 to 3.19).

3.160 A register in Form D.G. (PA)-154 should be maintained in

the Madras Postal Accounts Office for note of undeliverable Telegraphic
Money Orders re-advised to Ceylon in order that the international
commission adjusted in the settlement accounts may be cheeked.

3.161 The office of exchange submits periodically lists of money

orders advised accompanied by the money orders entered therein, except
in the case of Burma for which original money orders are sent out of
India. These are checked in the same manner as the exchange office lists
for sterling money order advised, and transfer entries are similarly
prepared through the registers in Forms Nos. D.G. (PA)-446 and 447 for
each foreign country of exchange for the purpose of incorporating the
figures in the monthly accounts.

NOTE 1 -- Postage stamps to the value of 20 Paise on account of fee for

obtaining advice of payment will be affixed to the outward rupee money orders as in the
case of outward sterling money orders (Also see Note 2 to Para 3.143(e)).

NOTE 2 -- For the purpose of adjustment, the register in Form D.G. (PA)-448
(vide note 3 below Para 3.145) should be used.

3.161-A The procedure for checking prescribed for foreign outward

money orders is generally followed in the case of Burma also. As the
extract from the lists of money orders advised by each mail to Burma by
the Madras and the Calcutta office of Exchange is not accompanied by the
original money orders as in the case of money orders exchanged with
other Foreign Countries a check slip is prepared by the Postal Accounts
Office, in respect of each entry in the extract from the lists and checking
payments against issue conducted by means of those check slips. The
extracts received in the Postal Accounts Office will be cheeked in the
same manner as other exchange office outward lists and accounts
adjustments will also be similarly made.
 183

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

NOTE -- With effect from 1st October, 1948, the system of “Advice of Payment”
on payment of 20 paise has been introduced in respect of M.Os to Burma. As the extract
from the lists of money orders (F.M.O. 2) is not accompanied by the original money
orders as in the case of money orders exchanged with other foreign countries, at the
offices of exchange will note the letters A.P. before the no. of M.O. in cases where the
remitter has paid for an A.P. in the list in form No. F.M.O.2. furnished to each
Accounts office. The offices of exchange should also endorse a certificate at the end of
each list that in respect of Money Orders against which the letters AP. have been noted,
the fee of 20 p. in stamps has been correctly realised and affixed on the M.Os. and that
in other cases no such fees have been charged for as advices of payments are not
required by the remitters. The Postal Accounts Office should see that each list (F.M.O.
2) bears a certificate to the above effect.

3.162 The money orders or the check slips prepared as in Para

3.161-A are then made over to the Sorting group where they are sorted
according to offices of issue, and their amounts checked with coloured
pencil against the entries in the corresponding lists or money orders
issued.

NOTE 1 -- The rules in Section I of this Chapter are generally applicable to this
class of money orders.

NOTE 2 -- The payments to remitters of the outward rupee money orders, the
repayment of which is authorised or which are communicated as void, are made in the
manner prescribed in Paras 3.146-A to 3.148. The outward money orders returned from
Burma for re-payment are before being sent out to the Post Offices of issue in India,
impressed by the Calcutta Office of Exchange with the R.P.O. stamp and fresh serial
number and date entered thereon.

IV - INWARD RUPEE ORDERS

Arrangement for Checking

3.163 The offices of exchange submit periodically lists of inward

rupee money orders issued which are checked in the same manner as the
exchange office lists of sterling money orders issued and necessary
adjustments are noted in the Transfer Entry book [Form D.G. (PA)-574]
for the purpose of incorporating the figures in the monthly accounts (see
 184

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Para 3.151). The lists are then made over under receipt, to the ordinary
money order checker.

NOTE -- The claims of the Indian Post Office from the Malaya Administration
and vice versa on all accounts, other than the money order exchange account, are
adjusted by means of “Postal Service” money orders which are exempt from all charges
for commission.

3.164 The inward rupee money orders, when paid, are included in
the ordinary lists of money orders paid, being distinguished from inland
orders by the letter ‘F’ placed before the numbers. They are sorted along
with the inland money orders, and debit checked in the ordinary way.

3.165 The treatment of void inward rupee money orders drawn by

foreign countries other than Burma and their repayments to the remitters is
governed by the rules prescribed in Paras 3.154 to 3.158.

NOTE -- The repayment of inward rupee money orders within currency is

governed by the procedure prescribed in Para 3.154.

3.166 Money Orders from Burma which for any reason cannot be
paid are not sent to the Postal Accounts Office but are kept in deposit in
the Calcutta Office of Exchange for further disposal pending receipt of
instructions from the remitters in Burma. Such orders are disposed of by
the Calcutta Office of Exchange either by payment in India or return to
Burma for repayment to remitter there through repayment lists. Copies of
repayment lists are sent by the Calcutta Office of Exchange to the Home
Postal Accounts Office (Calcutta) as the orders are re-advised.

On receipt of the lists suitable notes should be made in the Inward

Lists or the registers of unpaid money orders as the case may be. The
adjustment of these money orders is made by a transfer entry prepared as
follows:-

Dr.

Inland Money Orders (month of issue)

 185

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

To

Foreign Money Orders -Burma……………………Cr.

On receipt of the exchange account, the amount shown there-in as

inward orders repaid should be verified with the totals of the repayment
lists.

V - TRADE CHARGE MONEY ORDERS

C.O.D. Outward Lists

3.167 On receipt of the outward lists with value-payable money

orders in the respective Postal Accounts offices, the money orders are
examined as ordinary foreign money orders and made over to the Sorting
group where they are sorted along with other inland paid orders and sent
to the Debit checking group in which they are debit-checked along with
other money orders. The totals of these outward lists are posted in a
register in Form No. D.G. (PA)-449 and the following adjustment is
made:-

Dr.

Inland Money Orders-(month of issue)

To

Suspense Account-Trade Charge Money Orders (Name of

Country),……………………Credit.

NOTE 1 -- The entries in the C.O.D. outward lists and the Value Payable Money
Orders advised to the United Kingdom, Eire or Ireland and Zanzibar also bear special
serial numbers assigned by the Bombay Office of Exchange advising the Money Orders.
The serial numbers will run consecutively commencing with No. 1 for each month and
for each Postal Accounts Office and will also be shown on the relative Trade Charge
Money Orders.

NOTE 2 - The C.O.D. outward list examiner will carefully examine whether any
mis-sorted C.O.D. money order has been wrongly included in the C.O.D. list. The mis-
 186

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

sorted money orders when traced, should not be sent to the Sorting group but should be
forwarded to the respective Postal Accounts Offices with a forwarding note necessary
correction being made in the total of the C.O.D. lists, and an intimation of the
correction sent to the Postal Accounts Office as well as to the Indian Office of
Exchange concerned.

London Trade Charge Accountant

3.168 (a) This account is prepared by the London Post Office

and sent to the Bombay Office of Exchange, by which it is submitted to
the Nagpur Postal Accounts Office with the receipt Trade Charge Money
Orders.

(b) On receipt Of the Trade Charge Account with the relative

Trade Charge Money Orders, the orders are sorted in tee Nagpur Postal
Accounts Office according to the Postal Accounts Offices of the different
offices of issue and listed separately for each Postal Accounts Office in
Form D.G.(PA)-473 in which are shown:-

(1) the special serial numbers assigned by the Office of

Exchange.

(2) the sterling value of the Trade Charge Money Order and its
equivalent in rupee currency. The lists for the Nagpur Postal Accounts
Offices will be in single. Those for other Accounts Offices will be
prepared in duplicate and totalled and reconciliation of the sterling value
alone with the total shown in the London Trade Charge Account prepared
in sterling currency will be effected in the Nagpur Postal Accounts Office.
The total amount of the lists in (rupee) for each Postal Accounts Office is
debited to the respective Postal Accounts Office through an advice of
Transfer, the lists and vouchers being sent as enclosures.

NOTE -- Any differences in the rupee amount due either to clerical errors in
compiling the extracts or to short or excess charge in the outward lists will be detected
in the course of detailed check in the Postal Accounts Office concerned.

(c) The Home Postal Accounts Office money orders are sorted
 187

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

according to the month of advice and the special serial number assigned to
them by the office of exchange (vide Note 1 below Para 3.167) and debit-
checked in the outward lists with which the identical Value-payable
money orders were received.

(d) The following adjustment of the gross amount of the account

is made in the Nagpur Postal Accounts Office.

Dr.

Money Order Remittance - Calcutta Postal Accounts Office

Money Order Remittance - Delhi Postal Accounts Office

Money Order Remittance - Madras Postal Accounts Office

Money Order Remittance - Kapurthala Postal Accounts

Office etc

Suspense Account - Trade charge Money Orders

(name of country)

To

Foreign money orders - Great Britain and Northern

Ireland. Cr.

(e) The Sterling value deducted from the total of the Trade.
Charge Account on account of one-half percent Commission is converted
into rupee currency at the flat rate of exchange. The following adjustment
is then made:-

Dr.

Foreign money orders - Great Britain and Northern

Ireland.

(Deduct from credit).

To
 188

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Commission on Money Orders……………………………Credit

(f) On receipt of these money orders with the advice of transfer

in the other Postal Accounts Offices, the corrections of the amount debited
are verified by comparing the entries in the lists with those on the
vouchers. They are sorted according to the month of advice and the special
serial number and then debit-checked against the entries in the outward
lists and thereafter the following adjustment is made:-

Dr.

Suspense Account - Trade Charge Money Orders

(Name of country).

To

Money Order- Remittance - Nagpur Postal Accounts

Office…………………………..Cr

NOTE -- The initial letters of the Postal Circle should be noted against each
entry in the extracts with reference to the Trade Charge Money Orders to facilitate
compilation of statistics (vide Note to Para 3.200).

3.169 The Trade charge Accounts with Fire or Ireland and

Zanzibar are received in the Nagpur Postal Accounts Office and dealt with
in the same manner as Trade Charge Account with London. The only
difference is that the accounts of the former accounts both inward and
outward are adjusted through the Money Order exchange accounts under
“special items”.

Outward Trade Charge Account with Johore Malaya and Kadah

3.170(a) The e accounts are prepared by the Calcutta G.P.O.

which is the only office of exchange in respect of C.O.D. money Order
advised to and from these countries. On receipt of these Outward accounts
with the receipted Trade Charge Cards from the General Post Office,
Calcutta, in the Calcutta Postal Accounts Office the entries shown therein
 189

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

are compared with those on the money orders.

(b) The Trade Charge money Orders are then sorted according to
the Postal Accounts Office of the Offices of issue. The value of the money
orders intended for other Postal Accounts offices are debited to them
through advices or transfer supported by the Trade Charge Orders details
of these orders being furnished on the advices of transfer.

(c) The Home Postal Accounts Office Trade Charge Money

Orders are dealt with in the Calcutta Postal Accounts Office in the same
manner as the United Kingdom Trade Charge Money Orders are dealt with
in the Nagpur Postal Accounts Office (vide Para 3.168 (c.) Supra).

(d) In all the Postal Accounts Offices (except Calcutta Postal

Accounts Office) the Trade Charge Money Orders received with the
advice of transfer from the Calcutta Postal Accounts Office are dealt with
in the manner described in Para 3.168(f) Supra and the note there-under in
respect of United Kingdom Trade Charge Money Orders.

(e) All the adjustments are similar to those adopted for Trade
Charge transactions with United Kingdom.

NOTE 1 -- As no special serial numbers are assigned to the Trade Charge Money
Orders relating to Eastern countries by the Calcutta G.P.O. there is no sorting according
to special serial numbers in the Accounts Offices in respect of these money orders as in
Para 3.168(f).

NOTE 2 -- Although Johore and Malaya maintain separate Trade

Charge Accounts with India independently of each other, the balance of
the former whether in favour of India or the foreign administration
concerned together with the balance of Malaya Trade Charge Accounts is
finally passed under “special items” in the Money order settlement
account with Malaya.

List of Unpaid Items

3.171 After all the money orders are debit-checked in the outward
 190

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

lists, the items not debit-checked in the outward lists are compiled in a
statement called the list of unpaid items in Form D.G. (PA)-474. These
money orders when received as paid with subsequent Trade Charge
Account are debit-checked in the list of unpaid items.

C.O.D. Inward Lists

3.172 These lists are received from the offices of exchange which
are authorised to deal with C.O.D. money orders and are checked as other
Inward lists. At the end of the month, the amounts of these lists are posted
in the Inward register [Form No. D.G. (PA)-449] and the following
adjustment is made:--

Dr.

Suspense Account - Trade Charge Money Orders (name of

country)

To

Ireland Money Orders (month of issue).

In addition to the above adjustment, the following adjustment is

made in respect of commission calculated at one-and-a-half percent on the
total amount of the lists:-

Dr.

Sale Of ordinary stamps

To

Commission on Money Orders……………………………..Cr

Inward Trade Charge Accounts

3.173 These accounts are prepared by the Principal Office, of

Exchange from the Certificates of payments received from the Post
Offices of payment or C.O.D. Inward Orders. The accounts relating to
 191

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Eastern countries of 1alaya, Johore and Kadah are submitted to the
Calcutta Postal Accounts Office, while those relating to Western countries
of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, Eire or Ireland and Zanzibar are
submitted to the Nagpur Postal Accounts Office. On receipt of these
accounts their totals are checked. The amount of one and a half percent
commission shown therein is also checked. The money orders shown
therein are verified in the inward lists concerned noting against the entries
the month of the Inward Trade Charge account in which the orders are
claimed.

The following adjustments are then made:-

Adjustment of the Gross Adjustment of one and a half

total of Account percent commission deducted

Dr. Dr.

Foreign money orders Commission on money

(Name of country) order

To To

Suspense Account---Trade---Charge Money Orders Foreign Money Orders

Name of country (deduct from
debit) Cr.

The out-standings in the Inward lists, i.e. the inward money orders not
claimed in the Account, are compiled in a statement called the statement
of unpaid items (Form No. D.G. (PA)-474). When these outstanding
money orders are claimed in the subsequent accounts, they are removed
from the above statement.

Broadsheet of Inward and Outward Trade Charge Money Orders

3.174 The amounts Inward and Outward lists temporarily placed

under the head “suspense Accounts-Trade Charge Money Orders” are
 192

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

posted in a broadsheet in Form No. D.G. (PA)-469. The amounts claimed
in the respective Trade Charge Accounts are also posted in the broadsheet
in order to clear the amount placed under the head “Suspense Account-
Trade Charge Money Orders”. The difference between these two amounts
represents the amount of the outstanding items in the list of unpaid items.
The broadsheet serves the purpose of not only exercising a check over the
outstanding items but also reconciling the credits and debits under the
head “Suspense Account-Trade Charge Money Orders” with the
corresponding figures in the Detail book and is submitted to the Gazetted
Officer on the last day of the month for review.

Trade Charge Money Order Transactions with the Colony and

Protectorate of Kenya, Uganda Protectorate and Tanganyika
Territory

3.175 In the case of trade charge Money Order transactions with

the Colony and Protectorate of Kenya, Uganda Protectorate and the
Tanganyika Territory, the claim on account of Inward and Outward C.O.D.
Money Order transactions is based not on the actual payments effected as
in the case of C.O.D. transactions with the United Kingdom, Eire or
Ireland, etc, but on the total amount advised by the Exchange Office in the
Outward and Inward Lists.

In view of this, the head “Suspense Account-Trade Charge Money

Order” is not operated upon. The total amounts of outward and Inward
Lists are directly adjusted to the head “Foreign Money Orders” as in the
case of ordinary Foreign Money Order transactions.

C.O.D. Outward Lists - The Outward Lists and the Money Orders
will show both the sterling and rupee equivalent. On receipt of the lists
with the V.P. Money Orders in the respective Postal Accounts Offices
from the Bombay Office of Exchange, the Money Orders are examined
with reference to the entries in the lists and the totals of the lists checked
 193

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

and further action is taken as laid down in Paras 3.144 and 3.145 with the
exception of Note 1 under the latter Para.

C.O.D. Inward Lists - Inward lists are received in the Nagpur Postal
Accounts Office from the Bombay Office of Exchange and are checked as
other Inward List. The amounts or these lists are posted in a Register in
form No. D.G. (PA)-447 and the following adjustments made:-

Debit - Foreign Money Orders - Colony and Protectorate of Kenya,

Uganda Protectorate and the Tanganyika Territory

To Inland Money Orders (Month of issue) credit

In addition, commission at l ½ - percent worked out on the total of

the lists is also adjusted as under:-

Debit, Sale of Ordinary stamps

To 155 - Postal Receipts 2 Commission on Money orders and Postal

orders. credit

3.176 Statement of Trade Charge Money Orders - Statements of

Trade Charge Money Orders are received monthly in the Nagpur Postal
Accounts Office and contain the following particulars :-

1. Total amount advised during a month with particulars of

each list.

2. Less ½ percent commission.

3. Net amount due.

The figures shown in the statement are verified with the entries in
the Register referred to in Para 3.175 the commission is checked and
adjusted as shown below:-

Debit - Foreign Money Orders - Colony and Protectorate of Uganda

Protectorate and the Tanganyika Territory
 194

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

and credit (deduct from Credit)

155-Postal Receipts-2-Commission on Money Orders Postal

Orders in the case of outward orders and Debit 155 Postal
Receipts - 2 - Commission on Money Orders and postal Orders.

Credit to Foreign Money Orders - Colony and Protectorate of

Kenya, Uganda Protectorate and the Tanganyika Territory

in respect of Inward Orders…………………….(Deduct from Debit)

The net amounts shows in the statement are verified with the claims
shown in the Money Order settlement Account.

VI - PERIODICAL SETTLEMENT OF ACCOUNT

Settlement/Accounts

3.177 The money order transactions between India and the several
countries of exchange are settled periodically by means of settlement
accounts which show, on the one side, the total amount of each outward
list, the international commission thereon calculated at one-half percent,
the amount of inward orders repaid to remitters or written back to the
country of issue as void (see paras 3.155 and 3.165), remittance on
account, special items and balance from preceding account. On the other
side, the settlement accounts show, the total amount of each inward list,
the international commission thereon at one-half percent, outward orders
repaid to remitters or written back to India as void, remittance on account
and Special items. The two sides of the accounts are squared by showing
the difference as “balance due to or by India”.

NOTE -- For sterling Exchange the account is expressed in sterling money; for
rupee exchanges, the form of an account is similar but the figures are in rupee currency.
 195

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Receipt and Check of Settlement Accounts

3.178 The accounts of foreign countries and· colonies are received

in the Postal Accounts Office from the principal offices of exchange.

3.179 The settlement accounts will be received by the Home Postal

Accounts Office of the principal office of exchange and will be dealt with
by the Money Order Section. The total of the outward and inward lists will
be verified, the international commission checked, the amount shown as
inward orders repaid or void examined with the corresponding entries in
the void list and the register of repaid order [form D.G. (PA)-450], and the
total of the list of repaid orders verified with the amount shown in the
Settlement Account. Finally, due note will be taken of the entries
adjusting errors in previous accounts and of any special items the cost of
the bill of exchange for remittance of the balance or proceeds of that
received in settlement of the balance as communicated by the Postal
Accounts Section will be checked with the balance of the settlement
account. The following transfers will be made, on receipt of settlement
accounts, in order to adjust the commission and the other receipts or
charges shown in the money order settlement account:-

(a) Credit or debit commission for the net difference in

international commission.

(b) Credit or debit “Exchange on Remittance Accounts Postal and

Money Order transactions” for difference of exchange or for
premium paid for purchase of drafts in settlement of balances
due by India for rupee money order transactions.

(c) Credit or debit “Foreign money orders” to counter balance (a)

and (b)

(d) Debit “Inland money orders month of issue” in case of Home

Circle money order or “Money Order remittances” in case of
 196

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

other money orders by credit to “Foreign Money Orders” in
respect of repayment of inward orders.

NOTE 1 -- In the case of Sterling Countries the total rupee equivalent adjustment
is also noted therein. A reference is made in the last column ment Account against the
particulars shown in tile list. The month of adjustment is also noted therein. A reference
is made in the last column of the register of outward and inward orders to exchange
account in which the lists are accounted for.

NOTE 2 -- The month of Settlement Account in which void inward orders are
shown as unpaid to the foreign country is noted in the void list and the amounts of such
orders shown in the column month of adjustment. Suitable notes should also be made in
the register of repaid orders and in the statement of void orders communicated to the
foreign country as void. In the case of inward orders repaid within currency, the
particulars of settlement account and the month of adjustment should be noted
prominently against the money orders in the Inward list or in the register of unpaid
money orders. In the latter case the column ‘month of adjustment’ will also be filled in.

3.180 The balances of the money order settlement accounts should

not be carried over to the next account, but should be sett1ed by cash
remittances or remittances through the India Office or through the London
General Account, unless otherwise provided for in any particular case.

A register in Form No D.G. (PA)-456 should be kept for watching

the credits and debit in settlement or the balances of the Settlement
Accounts.

On receipt of the Settlement Accounts, the balance shown therein is

noted in this register and a note of adjustment in settlement of the balance
is recorded in the column provided for the purpose. The items, if any
outstanding in this Register at the close of the accounts for March Final
are transferred to the next year's Register under the attestation of the
J.A.O.

NOTE 1 -- The examination of the settlement of accounts should be completed

within 15 days of their receipt.

NOTE 2 -- The balance of the monthly Money Order settlement Account between
 197

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

India and Burma, if in favour of India, is intimated by the Postmaster, Rangoon at the
time of returning an accepted copy of the M.O. Settlement Account to India to the
Accountant General, Burma who on receipt of such intimation issues instructions by
telegram to the Central Accounts Office of the Reserve Bank of India, Calcutta for
adjustment of the amount due through the balances of the two Government at that Bank
at the time of advising the next weekly interim payment (vide note below Para 3.182).
If the balance is in favour of Burma, a similar procedure shall be observed by the
Accountant General Central Revenue, New Delhi, to whom necessary intimation will be
given by the presidency Postmaster, Calcutta General Post Office at the time of
forwarding the M.O. Settlement Accounts to the Postmaster, Rangoon for adjustment of
the amount due to the Post Office of Burma. In the event of non-adjustment of the
balance of an account within the period prescribed, the amount of such balance shall
bear interest from the date of expiration of the period until the date, on which
adjustment was made. The interest shall be calculated at the rate of five percent per
annum and shall be carried to the debit of the Administration in arrear in the following
account. The Calcutta Postal Accounts Office will see that the balances of the monthly
Money Order Settlement accounts between India and Burma are settled in the manner
mentioned above.

Watch of Interest on Balances of Money Order Settlement Accounts

Outstanding for more than 6 months

3.181 The amount shown in a settlement accounts as remaining due

from the Administration to the other shall on the expiration of six months
following the period covered by the relative Settlement Account be subject
to interest at the rate agreed upon. The interest shall be carried to the debit
of the Administration in arrear in the following account “under special
items” With a view to watch the adjustment of interest on balances
outstanding for more than 6 months, necessary notes regarding interest
should be made in the last column of the Register in Form No. D.G. (PA)-
456 and its adjustment watched. The register should be submitted for
review to the Branch Officer through the J.A.O. on the last day of every
quarter. The register for the previous year should also be submitted along
with the register for the current year for the Gazetted Officer's review
through the J.A.O. at the end of the 1st quarter ending the 30th June.
 198

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

The amount of interest appearing in the Settlement Account should
be adjusted under the head “155-Postal Receipts-7 other Receipts-Postal
Receipts-other items”. In the case of sterling accounts the amount shown
in sterling currency should be converted into rupee at the flat rate of Re. 1
= Is. 6d.

NOTE -- The interest shall be calculated on the number of Calendar months, the
remaining number of days in a month being treated as a fraction of a month.

3.182 Advance remittance due to, or from, foreign countries, are

watched through a register in Form D.G. (PA)-457. This register is posted
once a week (Saturday) and is reviewed by the Branch Officer on the 2nd
of every month. Calls should be made for remittances after one month and
three weeks from the date on which they fall due.

Exception: - This register need not be maintained in the Calcutta Postal Accounts
Office in respect of countries other than Burma and also in the Madras Postal Accounts
Office. At the time of local inspection of the Calcutta General Post Office, it should,
however, be seen that advance remittances are called for by it with promptitude.

NOTE -- In respect of Money Order exchanges with Burma, interim payment

towards monthly adjustment of dues is made through the Reserve Bank of India weekly
(i.e. on every Monday or any other subsequent day in the event of Monday being a
holiday) by the debtor Administration for an amount estimated to cover the amount due
for transactions during the previous week and should not fall below three fourths of the
amount due. In the event of an advance payment pertaining to a period falling short of
the amount due, any excess over Rs. 50,000 of the balance due shall carry interest from
the 16th of the succeeding month to the date of clearance of the outstanding. The
Calcutta postal Accounts Office will see that these conditions regarding advance
remittances are fulfilled.

3.183 The settlement account for money order transactions with

Great Britain and Northern Ireland is combined with the letter and parcel
postage account and termed the “General Account with the London Post
Office” The balances of settlement account with the following countries
are also adjusted through this Account: -
 199

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

(1) Denmark

(2) France

(3) Germany

(4) Iraq

(5) Italy

(6) Norway

(7) Switzerland

(8) Persian Gulf

NOTE -- In the case of Persian Gulf, Money Orders are exchanged in rupee
currency and the totals of the Money Order transaction are included separately in the
Indian General Account furnished monthly to London converting the rupee equivalent
into sterling at the rate of 1s. 6d. per rupee.

The General Account is received in duplicate in the Nagpur Postal

Accounts Office from the Director, Foreign Post Bombay, by the 3rd of
the second month following. The Nagpur Postal Accounts Office adjusts
the sterling amounts relating to (1) Foreign Money Orders, (2) Share of
Commission, (3) Repaid and Void Money Orders, (4) Trade Charge
Money Orders, and (5) Balance of Money Order transactions with foreign
countries settled through the General Account. The actual rupee values in
respect of items (1), (3), (4) and (5) above are ascertained from the
various registers and subsidiary accounts maintained in the Nagpur Postal
Account Office. The net adjustment to the head “Foreign Money Orders-
United Kingdom” made on receipt of the London and the Inward Trade
Charge Accounts are taken for the sterling amounts, against Trade Charge
Money Orders in the General Account. The actual rupee values thus
ascertained are adjusted by debit or credit to “Foreign Money Orders-
(country)”, by corresponding credit or debit to account with states
Account with A.G.C.R. Remittance head is however, credited or debited
 200

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

with the rupee equivalent of the sterling amounts converted at the flat rate
(1s. 6d. per rupee) and any difference between the two rupee figures
adjusted under “Exchange on Remittance Account”. The commission on
Foreign Money Orders and Trade Charge Money Orders is also adjusted at
the flat rate of exchange vide Para 3.168(e). The Money Order Section of
the Nagpur Postal Accounts Office will then make over both the copies of
the General Account to the Account Current Section. The latter after
adjusting the remaining items will forward one copy to the PA Wing of the
Directorate, so as to reach that office by the 10th of the month. PA Wing
of the Directorate will forward it after check to the Accountant General,
Commonwealth Relations Office, London, by the first Mail day.

NOTE -- A schedule of debits and credits relating to the Accounts between

England and India should be sent to the PA Wing of the Directorate by the Nagpur
Postal Accounts Office in respect of the adjustment made in that office.

3.184 In the case of the following countries, the settlement of

balances due to India in the Money Order Settlement Account will be
made by remittance through the Accountant General, Commonwealth
Relations Office, London.

(1) Nayasaland Protectorate

(2) British Guiana.

(3) Colony and protectorate of Kenya, Uganda protectorate and the

Tanganyika Territory.

(4) Egypt.

(5) Malta.

(6) Sudan.

(7) Trinidad.

(8) Union of South Africa.

(9) Eire or Ireland.

 201

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

(10) Fiji.

(11) New Zealand.

(12) Zanzibar.

(13) Saudi Arabia.

(14) Aden.

Intimation of the remittances made by the above countries are sent

by them to the Director General Postal Services (PA Wing) who forwards
them in original to the Nagpur Postal Accounts Office in the case of the
countries mentioned against items 1 to 9 and 12 to 14 and to the Calcutta
Postal Accounts Office in the case of the rest for watching credits afforded
through the London Accounts and for note in the register of remittances
[Form D.G.(PA)-456] as well as in the register for watching advance
remittances [Form D.G. (PA)-457]. When credits for the remittances
appear in the London Accounts extracts from the schedule of credits are
sent to the Nagpur and Calcutta Postal Accounts Offices by the Director
General, Postal Services (PA Wing) for purposes of adjustment and
verification of the credits with the intimation of remittances already sent.
They are adjusted as below and particulars of adjustment are
communicated to the PA Wing of the Directorate.

Dr.

(1) account between England and India Postal and Money Order
transactions,

(b) With Colonial Administration

(2) Exchange on Remittance Accounts. Postal and Money Order

Transactions.

To

Foreign Money Orders ………………………….. (Name of Country)

 202

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

…………………….. Cr.

Dr.

Account between England and India Postal and Money Orer

transaction.

(b) With Colonial Administrations.

To

(1) Foreign Money Orders - Name of the country).

(2) Exchange on Remittance Accounts

Postal and Money Order transactions ………………… Cr.

The rate of conversion adopted for the remittance in sterling is the

same as that for inward orders in force on the date of the remittance. The
difference between the amount in rupees converted at this rate and the
conventional rate of Re 1 = Is. 6d. will be debited or credited, as the case
may be, to settlement on Remittance Account.

NOTE 1 -- If the case of Aden money orders are exchanged in rupee currency
and the balance of the monthly Money Order settlement Account is converted into
sterling at the current market rate of exchange communicated by the Director General
Postal Services New Delhi to the Aden Postal Administration for the purpose of
payment through the Accountant General, Commonwealth Relations Office, London.
This arrangement exists as a temporary measure until the Government at Aden is in a
position to finance the purchase of bank drafts, for direct settlement with India, Copies
of intimations of remittances made by the Aden Postal Administration are, under a
special arrangement, sent by that Administration both to the Director General Postal
Services (PA Wing) and the Director of Accounts (Postal) Nagpur who adjusts the
credits for the remittances appearing in the London Account Extracts to the head
‘Foreign Money Order’ at the same current market rate of exchange communicated by
the Director General Postal Services New Delhi (C.F. Section) direct to the Director of
Accounts Postal, Nagpur.
 203

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

NOTE 2 -- In respect of the Money Order Settlement Accounts with the
Commonwealth of Australia which are dealt with in the Calcutta Postal Accounts Office
the settlement is made by actual recovery or payment between the presidency
Postmaster, Calcutta, and the High Commissioner for Australia in India, the rate of
conversion of the British pound sterling in which the Exchange Account is maintained
to the Indian Currency being at 1s 6d to the Rupee.

3.185 The balances in favour of India in respect of settlement

account with colonial and other administrations are adjusted though the
London Account, while the balances due by India are settled by draft on
London purchased in the market. The amount paid in rupees for purchase
of the draft will be charged in the cash account and debit to “Foreign
Money Orders--Country of exchange”,

3.186 The balance of the half yearly parcel account between India
and the Union of South Africa. Kenya, Seychelles, Iraq, Australian Fiji,
and New Zealand are adjusted through the Money Order account between
the two administrations by entry against the head “Special items detailed
in the annexure”. The balance of letter mail transit charges and the
balances of Air Mail accounts between India and Colony and Protectorate
of Kenya, Uganda Protectorate and Tanganyika Territory are also adjusted
similarly. No money order commission is payable on the balances thus
included in the money order account. The transfer adjustment is made in
the Postal Accounts Office.

3.187 The balances of the half yearly accounts relating to both

insured and uninsured parcels exchanged between India and the
Commonwealth of Australia, viz., the colonies of New South Wales,
Queensland, South Australia, Tasmania, Victoria and Western Australia
are included in the money order accounts between India and those
colonies. Care should be taken to see that no money order commission is
charged on such items. These balances, when they appear in the general
account of money orders with the Commonwealth will be adjusted in the
 204

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

manner indicated in Para 3.189(1).

3.188 The balances due to India on account of money orders

exchanged between India and Ceylon are settled by bank drafts in favour
of the Postmaster Madura and the balances due to Ceylon are settled by
means of Bills of Exchange on Colombo.

Miscellaneous Items

3.189 The cost of conveyance of parcel mails, both insured and

uninsured, between Madura and Colombo and Madura and South Africa
and Mauritius via Colombo is adjusted by including the amounts in the
half yearly General account of Parcels and Insured letters exchanged
between India and Ceylon. The net balance of this account is settled by an
entry in the money order account between the two administrations.

The item in the money order account is adjusted by credit to the head
“155 Postal Receipts (b) Receipts from other Postal Administrations, or
(c) Deduct payments to other Postal Administrations”, as the case may be.

(2) Amounts due to or by the Department of Posts, India on

account of the conveyance of letter mails over the Dhanushkodi
Talaimanner service, Natal Line and Indian and South African Lines are
settled through the Annual Liquidation Account of the International
Bureau at Berne. In the case of Great Britain and Northern Ireland,
however, the final adjustment of the amount as included in the Liquidation
Account is effected through those General Account between Great Britain
and Northern Ireland and India, the credits and debits being adjusted in the
same heads of account.

(3) The transactions on account of sale of Indian Telegraph

Stores and cost of overprinting of “Kuwait” stamps supplied to the Iraq
Posts and Telegraphs Administration are settled through the Money Order
settlement Account between the Post Office of India and the Post Office of
 205

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Iraq and included under the head ‘Special item’.

Adjustment of Exchange

3.190 As the Government of India have adopted the rate of Re. -

1s. 6d. as the conventional rate in the public accounts, and as different
rates are fixed by the Director General, Postal Services, from time to time,
for the conversion of foreign outward and inward sterling money orders,
the difference between the rupee value converted at the official rate and
that converted at the rate fixed by the Director General, Postal Services
has to be adjusted to the Head “Exchange on Remittance Account - Postal
and Money Order Transactions”.

3.191 After the examination of the settlement account is completed

all the adjustment made in respect of the transactions shown in the
settlement account under the head “Foreign Money Orders” are collected
under the credit and the debit sides of that head in a broadsheet in Form
No. D.G. (PA)-458 and a reconciliation of the two sides is attempted. The
two sides will ordinarily agree in the case of rupee countries. In the case
of sterling countries, however, the sterling value on the two sides of the
exchange account will agree, but there will always be a difference in the
rupee value due to the adoption of different rates of conversion for the
adjustment of remittances from the foreign country. This difference will
be adjusted to the credit or debit of “Exchange on Remittance Account -
Postal and Money Order transactions”, and the two sides of the head
“Foreign Money Orders” reconciled.

3.192 In the detail Books, the major head “Foreign Money Orders”
is divided into as many sub-heads as there are countries or colonies with
which India has direct exchange of money orders. Great care should be
taken to adjust the transactions relating to each exchange under the proper
head of account.

Exception -- The money order transactions with the several states of the
 206

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Commonwealth of Australia are adjusted in the books under a single head
“Commonwealth of Australia”.

VII - INDO-SRI LANKA TELEGRAPHIC MONEY ORDERS

Examination of issue and paid Lists

3.193 As far as issue and payment in India are concerned, the

Account Offices will not receive any separate lists or Indo-Sri Lanka
telegraphic money orders issued or paid, as the entries will be included in
the ordinary money order lists. All that is necessary for the sub-checker in
the Money Order Section is to see in all cases.

(a) that the amount of money order does not exceed Rs. 1,000 or
include any fraction of a rupee,.

(b) that the commission is credited at the ordinary rate.

Checking Arrangement

3.194 The Madura Post Office will furnish the Madras Postal
Accounts Office with a summary of the Inward Telegraphic Money Order
lists exchanged between Madura and Colombo and a copy of the Monthly
Telegraphic Money Order Account and the Colombo Post Office will send
a copy of each inward list direct to the Madras Postal Accounts Office.
The outward Telegraphic Money Order lists will be prepared in parts,
according to the Circles of accounting whence the Telegraphic Money
Orders were issued and these will be sent to the respective Postal
Accounts Offices.

NOTE -- The Madura Post Office should furnish the Madras Postal Accounts
Office with a summary only (instead of a copy) of the inward telegraphic money order
list which will give the following particulars: -

(a) Number and date of each Colombo list.

(b) Amount of telegraphic money orders in each list.

(c) Half the amount of commission realised on the Telegraphic Money Orders
 207

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

in each list.

3.195 The lists will be checked under the following rules: -

(a) The inward lists received from Colombo will be examined in

the money order section, the total checked and posted in the
register [Form No. D.G. (PA)-446]. The monthly total - I will
be adjusted by a transfer entry similar to that prescribed in Para
3.151. The examination of the list will be completed as early as
possible. It will then be made over to the checker and will be
formed into a register in which the payment in India will be
checked.

NOTE -- Many of the Telegraph Money Orders issued from Ceylon are not
incorporated in the Colombo Inward List in the months in which the Telegraphic Money
Orders are actually issued. Hence the value of the Telegraphic Money Orders issued in
a month and incorporated in the Colombo inward list for the next month is adjusted in
the Postal Accounts Office by credit to the month of issue.

(b) The outward lists received from Madura will be accompanied

by the copies of the Telegraphic Money Order advices on which
they are based but without any other voucher, and slips must
therefore be prepared for the purpose of debit checking. The
weekly total of the list will then be posted in the register
referred to in Para 3.161 and a monthly transfer entry made as
prescribed in that Para. The examination of the list will be
completed as early as possible.

(c) In checking debits against credits, care must be taken not only
to bring to notice over-payments or short payments, but
omissions on the part of the office of exchange to advice Sri
Lanka of issue. It must be remembered that every issue on
Ceylon should, as a general rule, be known to Madras
Telegraph Office on the day of issue or on the following day,
and that the debit should therefore follow the credit very
 208

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

rapidly.

(d) On receipt of the monthly account of telegraphic money orders

it should be carefully cheeked with the inward and outward list
any discrepancy being pointed out to the office of exchange.

(e) No communication except towards settlement of discrepancies

in the Sri Lanka T.M.O. inward lists prepared by Colombo will
be made by the Postal Accounts Office to Colombo direct, all
references which it is necessary to make by letter or by
telegram being made to the office of exchange at Madura or in
special cases to the Post Master General, Madras.

3.196 The telegraphic money order accounts with Colombo

adjusted in the Money Order Section simultaneously with the non-
telegraphic Sri Lanka money order exchange account.

NOTE -- The commission shown in the telegraphic money order account should
be adjusted by a transfer entry.

VIII - EXCHANGE OF TELEGRAPHIC MONEY ORDERS WITH

FOREIGN COUNTRIES OTHER THAN SRI LANKA

3.197 Telegraphic Money Orders exchanged between India and

Foreign countries other than Sri Lanka are included in Inward and outward
lists of a Telegraphic Money Orders. These lists (both inward and
outward) bear the same number and date as those of Ordinary Lists. As no
separate exchange account is maintained in respect of these transactions,
the total of the telegraphic Money Orders lists is for the purposes of
accounts, included in that of ordinary Inward or Outward lists, as the case
may be, Advance copy or lists of Telegraphic Money Orders is received in
Postal Accounts Office from the offices of Exchange. The advance list
contains the following particulars: -

(1) Number of the Money Order.

 209

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

(2) Date of the Money Order

(3) Head or Sub Office of payment.

(4) Value of the Money Order.

In the case of Telegraphic Money Orders originating from Sterling

Countries only the Sterling amount is shown in the advance list. The
advance list is cheeked as follows: -

(1) Sequence of numbers is examined.

(2) Totals are checked (any corrections found necessary being

made and intimated to the office of Exchange).

(3) Initial letters of Postal Circles are noted against the entries in
the list to facilitate compilation of statistics. In addition the
rupee equivalent of the sterling value is converted and posted
against the relative entries, in the list for adjustment purposes.
The figures are finally posted in a register in Form D.G. (PA)-
447 for the purpose of monthly adjustment. The entries in the
lists are debit checked with the paid Telegraphic money order
receipts prepared by the office of payment. No check is
exercised on the completed copy of the list beyond seeing that
the number and date of the Foreign Office Inward List are filled
in the advance copy and the totals of the completed copy of the
list are posted separately in the register mentioned above in the
manner indicated in the “N.B.” under Para 3.151. With a view
to check the correctness of the claim from the foreign countries,
verification is made of the figures included in the advance list
with those accounted for in the Foreign Office Inward List. Any
discrepancy should be settled either on receipt of the Settlement
Accounts or in communication with the Office of Exchange.
 210

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Outward Telegraphic Money Orders

These Money Orders arc accounted for in outward lists of

Telegraphic Money Orders prepared by the Indian Office of exchange.
Lists received in Postal Accounts Office are accompanied by copies of the
Telegraphic Money Order advices on which they are based but without
any other voucher. Check slips should be prepared for the purpose of debit
checking. In the case of Sterling Money Orders rupee values should also
be noted on slips to facilitate debit check. The check slips along with the
copies of the relevant Telegraphic Money Order advices pasted to them
are then treated as paid vouchers and checked with the relative entries in
the outward lists. The lists and the check slips are thus dealt within the
same way as ordinary outward lists and orders.

Indo-Burma Telegraphic Money Orders

3.198 The prescribed procedure for checking of telegraphic money

orders exchanged between India and foreign countries other than Sri
Lanka is generally followed with the exception that no advance copy of
Telegraphic M.O. Lists is received in the Postal Accounts Office.

A duplicate copy of nl1 outward and inward Telegraphic Money

Order lists prepared by the exchange of the country of issue will be
forwarded by the Calcutta Office of exchange to the Calcutta Postal
Accounts Office at the time of forwarding the lists to Burma or on receipt
from Burma. The outward lists received from the Calcutta office of
exchange will be accompanied by the copies of the Telegraphic money
orders advices. Check slips are prepared and pasted to the advices, which
are treated as paid vouchers. The checking of these inward and outward
lists is conducted in the same manner as the exchange office lists of rupee
money orders issued and outward orders advised to Burma. The inward
lists will be prepared by the Rangoon Office of exchange separately for
each of the three Frontier Telegraph Offices (viz., Rangoon, Akyob and
 211

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

Mandalay) showing monthly serial numbers arranged consecutive1y with
the distinctive initial letters (viz. R.A. and M.) assigned by the three
frontier Telegraph Offices in Burma. These numbers and letters will be
shown in the telegraphic money order receipts made out by the offices of
payment in India. The checker will debit check these T.M.O. receipts and
also examine the sequence of the serial numbers and point out any
irregularity noticed in the course of examination to the exchange office.

3.199 Telegraphic Money Orders are also exchanged with the

following countries: -

(1) Great Britain and Northern Ireland.

(2) Eire or Ireland.

(3) Iraq.

(4) Colony and Protectorate of Kenya, Uganda Protectorate and the

Tanganyika Territory.

(5) Nyasaland Protectorate.

(6) Zanzibar.

(7) Mauritius.

(8) Seychelles.

(9) Kuwait.

(l0) Malaya.

(11) Kedah.

(12) Ke1antan.

NOTE 1 -- Each of the postal administrations of Malaya and Kedah maintain a

separate list and a distinct series or Numbers is assigned by the Foreign countries in
respect of Telegraphic money orders issued upon India.

NOTE 2 -- In respect of the Telegraphic money orders exchanged with the

countries mentioned in Note 1, Calcutta is the only office of exchange. The messages,
 212

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

however, both inward and outward, pass through the Madras Central Telegraph Office
which sends a copy of each message to the Calcutta Office of exchange to enable it in
the case of Inward Telegraphic money orders to verify details as shown in the Inward
Telegraphic list received subsequently from the foreign countries, and in the case of
Outward Telegraphic money orders, to prepare the Outward telegraphic list for
submission to the respective Postal Accounts Offices, the Telegraphic money order
advices accompanying the respective Telegraphic Outward lists as vouchers. Tile total
of tile Telegraphic list is likewise included in that of the ordinary Outward list.

IX MISCELLANEOUS

Statistics of Foreign Money Orders

3.200 “The following statements should be prepared by the Money

Order Section of each Branch Postal Accounts Office after the closure of
March Supplementary Accounts and sent to the PA Wing of the
Directorate not later than 31st August each year”.

Statement I [Form No. D.G. (PA)-462], showing the number, value

and commission on the following three classes of foreign money orders
issued during the year just closed, classified according to the Circles of
issue, viz.: -

(a) Foreign sterling money orders.

(b) Foreign rupee money orders.

Statement II [Form No. D.G. (PA)-463] showing the numbers and

value of the foreign money orders paid during the year, classified
according to the Circles of payment.

NOTE -- Statements I and II should exclude the value and number of “through
money orders” issued or paid as they do not represent the issues or payments of India.

Statement III [Form No. D.G. (PA)-464] showing the money order
transactions with each country or colony dealing with sterling or rupee
money orders.

Statement IV [Form No. D.G. (PA)-465] showing the number, value

 213

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

in Indian currency and commission of outward foreign money orders for
each month of the year just closed.

Statement V [Form No. D.G. (PA)-466] showing the number and

value (in Indian Currency) of inward foreign money orders for the year
just closed.

Statement VI [Form No. D.G. (PA) 467] showing the number and
value of outward foreign money orders for each country and colony
classified according to the Circles in which the Indian Offices of exchange
are situated.

Statement VII [Form No. D.G. (PA)-468] showing the number and
value of inward foreign money orders for each country and colony,
classified according to Circles, in which the Indian offices of exchange are
situated.

Statement I will be compiled by classifying the entries in the

exchange office outward list. The compilation will be taken up
immediately after the examination of each list has been completed. The
classification will be proved with the total of the weekly (or periodical)
list and the monthly total of the classification will be made by the end of
the second month following that to which the outward lists relate.

This classification will be posted in a register in Form No. D.G.

(PA)-459 which will be submitted to the Branch Officer for review.
Telegraphic money orders will be posted in the register separately.

Statement II will be compiled by classifying the entries in the

exchange office inward list. The compilation will be made in the manner
indicated above and completed by the end of the second month following
that to which the inward lists relate. The classification will be posted in a
register in Form No. D.G. (PA)-460 which will be submitted to the
Gazetted Officer for review. Telegraphic money order statistics will be
 214

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

recorded on a separate page for each class.

Statement III will be compiled as follows: -

The total number, amount (sterling and exchange and rupee) and
commission on outward orders to each country of exchange will be posted
in the register in Form No. D.G. (PA)-470 against each month and the
annual total struck. For inward orders, the figures will be compiled from a
register in Form No. D.G. (PA)-471. Figures for repaid and void orders
will be compiled from the exchange accounts for each month in a register
in Form No. D.G. (PA)-472 and the annual figures will be copied in
Statement No. III

Statement IV will be compiled from the register in Form No. D.G.

(PA)-448.

Statement V will be compiled from the register in Form No. D.G.

(PA)-471 which will be posted from the register in Form No. D.G. (PA)-
447.

Statement VI will be compiled from the register in Form No. D.G.

(PA)-470 and Statement VII from the register in Form No. D.G. (PA)-471.

The register in Forms D.G. (PA)-470, 471 and 472 should be posted
monthly and submitted to the Branch Officer for review.

NOTE -- Statistics for trade charge money orders will be compiled in forms
similar to those prescribed for foreign money order above Classification of these money
orders according to Circles of issue and Paynyika Territory the statistics will be
compiled from the outward and not from the outward and inward lists.

In the case of Trade charge money order transactions with the Colony and
Protectorate of Kenya, Uganda Protectorate and the Tanganyika Territory the statistics
will be compiled from the outward and Inward Lists.

3.201 A statement showing separately, the amounts received and

paid in India on account of Money orders transaction, (excluding
Remittances with the several foreign countries which settle their accounts
 215

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

through London, for each year, is submitted to the Director General,
Postal Services (PA wig) by the 25th April for communication to “(i) the
Joint Director, Central Statistical Organisation, Cabinet Secretariat, New
Delhi and (1i) the Director of Statistics, Department of Research and
Statistics. Reserve Bank of India, Bombay by the first week of May.

Another statement showing the figures up to March Supplementary

Account is also submitted to the D.G. P.S. (PA wig) not later than the end
of July for transmission to the same officers by the end 15th August.

Reconciliation of foreign money order figures with the detail book

3.202 The figures under the heads “Foreign Money Orders” are
verified, separately for each foreign country of exchange by means of a
register in Form D.G. (PA)-461, one page being used for the credit and
another for the debit, in which the difference are clearly explained, All
differences with the Detail Book are adjusted before the accounts are
finally closed, so that the total figures for the year in the column Figure,
as per Detail Book agrees arithmetically with those in the column figures
as per “Foreign money order Register”,

3.203 In order to enable the Money Order Section to effect the

reconciliation prescribed on Para. 3.202, the Detail Book figures for each
month relating to “Foreign Money Orders” are supplied to that Section by
the Postal Accounts Section not later than the 5th of the second month
following that to which the accounts relate and the figures are verified by
the Money Order Section within 15 days of receipt of the Detail Book
figures, the register being submitted to the Accounts Officer for review on
the 22 nd of the month, through the J.A.O. in-charge.

Broadsheet of Foreign Money Orders

3.204 A broadsheet is maintained, in Form No. D.G. (PA)-458, of

the total credits and debits under the head “Foreign Money Orders”. A
 216

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

separate agreement is secured for each foreign country, one page being
used for credit and another for debit. The Booking Section figures for each
month when they relate to only one settlement account are posted in the
appropriate column against the month to which they relate, but when the
figures include amounts relating to more than one settlement account, they
are split up and the amounts relating to each settlement account are posted
against the particular month as shown in Column I. In respect of the
settlement accounts which are prepared quarterly, half yearly or yearly,
the figures are posted against the last month of the quarter, half year or
year, as the case may be, the months being bracketed together. The
horizontal total against each month of the settlement account is struck
only when the settlement account is adjusted by a remittance, as it is then
only that an agreement between the total credit and the total debit can be
secured. This agreement cannot be effected in respect of the settlement
accounts which are left unadjusted during the year, and the difference
between the credits and debits in these cases make up the annual balance.
The broadsheet is submitted to the Branch Officer for review through the
J.A.O. In-charge on the 22nd of the second month, following that to which
the accounts relate.

Verification of balances

3.205 The balance under the head “Foreign Money Orders”

comprises the balance of the settlement accounts remaining unsettled at
the close of the year, excluding the inward money orders advised in March
but accounted for in the issue list for April prepared by the office of
exchange. With a view to bring out this result, the net international
commission of the unsettled settlement accounts and the amount of inward
orders shown therein as repaid or void adjusted by transfer entries in the
accounts of March (final) or by journal entries if the settlement accounts
are received too late to admit of the adjustments being made in March
(Final). The items which make up the annual balance are noted in full
 217

CHAPTER III INLAND MONEY ORDERS

detail in the remarks column of the· broadsheet referred to in para 3.204
and a statement showing the verification of the register balances with the
Detail Book balances in Form No. D.G. (PA)-568, prepared in detail of
each foreign country is submitted to the P.A. Wing of the Directorate soon
after the March accounts are closed.

A Similar report should be sent after the closure of each batch of

journal entry.

NOTE -- It should be borne in mind that besides the amount of inward money
orders advised in March but accounted for in foreign, money order issue list for April,
the items that cause difference between the balance as worked out in the broadsheet and
that shown in the unadjusted settlement account are (a) remittances received during the
year in partial settlement of the unadjusted settlement account and (b) advance
remittances received in March in respect of the transactions for April. All these items
should be described fully in the broadsheet.

Verification of balance under “suspense account trade change money

orders”

3.206 After the March (final) accounts, of a year are closed, the
balance under this suspense account as per register of unpaid items should
be verified with the book balance and a report for each country showing
the register and book balances at the end of each year and the difference
(with the month of adjustment noted against the difference) should be sent
to the Postal Accounts Section, for consolidation and submission to the
P.A. Wing of the Directorate. Similar statements should be sent after the
accounts of the year for each batch of Journal Entry are closed.
 218

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

CHAPTER IV
INDIAN POSTAL ORDERS

4.1 The Director General, Postal Services, is responsible for the

stock, custody and issue to P.O's. & Sale to members of Public when
required of the I.P.Os. and also for the accounting, and checking of all
transactions relating to I.P.O.s. The rules for indent, sale and payment of
the Indian Postal Orders in Post Offices as well as those relating to the
maintenance of the initial Accounts and submission of account returns of
Indian Postal Orders transactions to Postal Accounts Offices will be found
in Part V of Chapter 7 of the Posts & Telegraphs Manual, Volume VI, Part
I.

4.2 The Director of Accounts (Postal), Delhi acting on behalf of

the Director General, Postal Services, is at present responsible to arrange
for direct annual supply of .the Indian Postal Orders to the Circle Stamp
Depot of various Circles. In addition to the Annual supply received for his
office, he also holds a Central Reserve Stock to meet occasional demands
arising from his or other Postal Accounts Offices.

STOCK OF INDIAN POSTAL ORDERS

Procedure for obtaining the supply of Indian Postal Orders

4.3 Deleted

4.4 The supply of Indian Postal Orders is arranged through P.F.

Section of the Director General, Postal Services office by placing yearly
indents on the Controller of Stamps, Nasik Road. It should be so
 219

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

calculated as to supplement the existing stock of each denomination to

meet the requirements of twelve months from the following January.

For this purpose, yearly indent in the fol1owing form should be sent
by each Circle Stamp Depot to the Director of Accounts (Postal) Delhi so
as to reach his office on or before the 10th August, each year. The
quantity required should be shown against those denominations only
which need replenishing. A similar indent should also be prepared by the
Delhi Accounts Office showing its requirements.

An yearly consolidated indent should be prepared accordingly (in

quadruplicate) and issued under the signature of the Director of Accounts
(Postal) Delhi showing separately under each denomination of Indian
Postal Orders the requirements of each Circle Stamp Depot as well as the
Central Reserve Stock and the mode of despatch of the Indian Postal
Orders direct to them.

The total quantities of each denomination of Indian Postal Orders

required to be printed should be determined with due regard to the sliding
scale of manufacturing rates so that the printing of each denomination may
be done in one lot thereby avoiding printing in driflects involving
increased manufacturing cost to the Department. It should also be clearly
noted in the indent for the guidance of the press whether the supply of
Postal Orders of any particular denomination is required in advance.

Three copies of the indent should be forwarded to the Director

General of Postal Services on or before the 20th August each year and the
quadruplicate copy filed in a guard file as office record.

On receipt of the three copies of the indent, the Director General,

Postal Services (M.I. Section) after countersignature, will forward two
copies to the Controller of Stamps, Nasik Road, so as to reach his office
 220

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

by the 1st of September, each year.

Supplies will normally be despatched by the Controller of Stamps

direct to the Circle Stamp Depot early in January each year according to
their requirements as shown in the indent.

Supplies to Circle Stamp Depot other than Delhi Circle Stamp Depot
will be accompanied by an invoice in quadruplicate showing the total
quantity of each denomination of Postal Orders with their serial numbers.
Original copy of the invoice should be retained by the receiving officer,
the 2nd and the 3rd copies returned after acknowledgement to the
Controller of Stamps and the quadruplicate copy sent to the Delhi Circle
Stamp Depot duly acknowledged. In the case of the Delhi Circle Stamp
Depot only three copies of the invoice will accompany the supply for
disposal in the above manner.

INDIAN POSTAL ORDERS

Yearly· Indent for Indian Postal Orders

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Denomination Issues in Stock on Additions
previous 31st July required (in hundreds)
12 months (as to make up 12 months
detailed on the Reverse) demands Remarks
Column 3, when less
deduction from Column 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Re. 1.00
Re. 2.00
Re. 5.00
Re. 7.00
Re. 10.00
Re. 20.00
Re. 50.00
Re. 100.00

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

NOTE -- If the number in Column (3) exceeds that in column (2) the word
‘Nil’ should be written in column (4) and no indent will be necessary.
 221

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

Custody of stock

4.5 The Stock of Indian Postal Orders is kept by the Cashier

attached to each Circle Stamp Depot. The stock is secured in a safe with
double locks in the joint custody of the Accounts Officer in charge of the
Cash Branch and the Cashier, each of these officers keeping his keys in
his personal custody.

4.6 On receipt of the orders from the Controller of Stamps,

Nasik Road in the Delhi Circle Stamp Depot the total number of the orders
supplied as shown in the invoice should be compared with the total
number shown against Delhi Circle Stamp Depot and under Reserve Stock
in the office copy of the indent and in the case of other Circle Stamp
Depot with the total number shown in the office copy of the yearly indent
referred to in para 4.4. and variations, if any, noted against the
denomination concerned in the latter. The orders are supplied by the
Controller of Stamps, Nasik Road, in small packets of 100 each. The
number of packets as well as the number of the Indian Postal Orders
contained in each packet should be counted in detail. The total number of
orders received should be noted under the respective denominations in the
Stock Register [Form D.G. (PA)- 480]. Entries made in the Stock Register
should be attested by the Asst. Accounts Officer/ Jr. Accounts Officer/
Supt. In-charge of Circle Stamp Depot as well as by the Accounts Officer
in charge of the Cash Branch. The acknowledgement for the orders should
also be prepared and initialled by the Supt. /A.A.O./J.A.O. and dispatched
under the signature of the Supt Circle Stamp Depot in the manner laid
down in Para 4.4.

NOTE -- The Indian Postal Orders supplied to other Circle Stamp Depot
direct by the Controller of Stamps, Nasik Road, should also be similarly noted
and shown as issued to them by the Director of Account (Postal) Delhi in the
 222

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

Reserve Stock Register, on receipt (If the acknowledged copies of the invoices
as required under para 4.4.

4.7 The stock in the Postal Accounts Offices is ordinarily

replenished annually by direct supply received from the Controller of
Stamps, Nasik Road, in January each year as laid down in Para 4.4.

Indents for supplementary requirements may, however, be made to

the Director of Accounts (Postal) Delhi for supply from the Central
Reserve Stock when necessary.

Issue from the stock

4.8 The indent received from the Post Offices are compiled by
the Circle Stamp Depot concerned by taking out from them Main Stock
Register denominations like Invoice are prepared in duplicate.

The original copy of the Invoice issued by the Circle Stamp Depot is
received back from the Post Office concerned duly signed as an
acknowledgement, and is filed in a guard file. The J.A.O./A.A.O./Supt.
Should see that he received an acknowledgement for the India Postal
Orders supplied within a reasonable time, issue reminders for the same,
when necessary, and bring cases of unusual delay to the notice of the
Accounts Officer/Sr. Accounts Officer

Stock Register

4.9 The Stock Register in Form No. D.G. (PA)-480 maintained

by each Circle Stamp Depot is posted as regards receipts, from the
invoices received from the Controller of Stamps, Nasik Road, and as
regards issues from the invoices issued by it to the Postmasters. In regard
to the supplies received from the Central Reserve Stock the posting in
 223

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

register is made from the invoices received from Delhi Circle Stamp
Depot which will also make an entry of issues in its Reserve Stock
Register when issuing the invoice.

Issue to Postmaster

4.10 Deleted

4.11 Deleted

4.12 Deleted

RETURNS

Returns of Indian Postal Orders received in the Postal Accounts

Offices.

4.13 The following monthly returns of Indian Postal Orders are

received in the Postal Accounts Office from Head Post Offices (vide Rule
68 of the Posts and Telegraphs Financial Hand Book. Volume- II): -

1. List of Indian Postal Orders sold.

2. Abstract of payments of Indian Postal Orders with the paid

orders.

3. Memorandum of unsold Indian Postal Orders in stock.

Soon after the 1st April of each year, a detailed list showing the
serial numbers of Indian Postal Orders in stock is received from Post
Offices (vide Rule 402/12 the Posts and Telegraphs Manual. Volume VI).

It should be examined to see whether the Indian Postal Orders as

detailed therein correctly work up to the total shown under each
denomination and whether the total agrees with the closing balance under
each denomination as shown in the Memo of Unsold Indian Postal Orders
 224

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

in stock for the month of March, The list should then be filed with the
Memo.

NOTE -- If the list of Indian Postal Orders sold or the Abstract of

payments of Indian Postal Orders for any month is not received in sufficient
time to admit of their being checked before the preparation of the Classified
Abstracts, the credit or debits appearing in the cash Account should be taken to
the Suspense Head “Credit Suspended” or “Debits Suspended” as the case may
be.

Checking of the list of Indian Postal Orders sold

4.14 On receipt of each list, the total should be checked with the
credit afforded in the monthly cash account of the Head Postmaster and
the calculation of the value of each class of orders sold should be verified.
The value and the commission should be classified under “Indian Postal
Orders” and “Commission on Indian Postal Orders”. The former head is
opened under “8446-Postal-001-01 Postal Deposit-01 Indian Postal Order
Sold” while the letter is opened under “1201-001-02-03-commission on
Money Orders and Postal Orders”.

4.15 Short or excess credits exceeding Re. 1 in the cash account,

of the value of Indian Postal Orders sold should be held under objection
and adjusted thus:-

The correct value should be credited to the proper head and (a) the
amount short realised debited to “8553-001-01 Advance-01-Railway Mail
Service and other accounts” in the accounts, (b) the amount realised in
excess should be credited to "Postal Receipts-Other Items" under “12-1-
008-002-22 other items” and entered in the inner column of the Objection
Book. The items should be removed from the Objection Book on credits
 225

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

on account of (a), and debits on account of (b) being traced. In case of (b)
if a refund cannot be made within a reasonable time, the amount will be
removed from the Objection Book with the remarks “Removed, purchaser
not traceable”.

Differences in the Indian Postal Order accounts of sums not

exceeding Re. 1/- on account of over-credits and short credits or short-
payment and over-payments should be treated in the manner laid down
under the head “Objections” vide Para 4.23.

Checking of the Abstract of Payments of Indian Postal Orders

4.16 The paid lists or abstracts of payment should be examined to

see: -

(a) that every entry in the Abstract of Payments is supported by

paid orders for that value. If a paid order is not received with
the list and its absence is not explained against the entry in the
list, it should immediately be called for by telegram;

(h) that the full face value plus the value of the Indian Postage
Stamps (not exceeding three in a number and forty nine paisa in
value), if any, affixed to the face of the orders to make up
broken amounts, agrees with the entry against the respective
denomination in the Abstract of Payment;

(c) that the total value of any individual order including the value
of the Indian Postage Stamps affixed to the order does not
exceed Rs. 100/-;

(d) that the total value of the Indian Postage Stamps affixed to the
orders for making up broken amounts, agrees with the total
 226

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

shown in the Abstract of Payments; and

(e) that the total amount paid as per Abstract, agrees with the
charge in the monthly cash account.

NOTE -- The value of Indian Postage Stamps for less than ten paisa
affixed to Indian Postal Orders is not payable (vide Rule 402/18 of the Posts and
Telegraphs Manual, Volume VI).

4.17 The paid orders should be further examined in detail in the

following manner: -

(a) That every paid I.P.O. has been defaced by the paying office by
drawing two thick diagonal lines in red ink across the face of
the Postal Order.

(b) If the amount is paid to a person other than the payee named in
the Indian Postal Order, the sanction of the competent authority
(the Postmaster General or the Supt. of Post Offices, as the case
may be, vide Rule 52/1 and Rule 127(C) (1) of the Posts and
Telegraphs Manual, Volume VIII) for payment, should
invariably accompany the order and the number and date of
sanction should be quoted on the paid order.

(c) If the order is not genuine, or if the amount has been altered, or
if it has been cut, defaced, mutilated or bears erasures or
alterations or otherwise irregular, the amount thereof should be
placed under objection under “P&T Advances” and the
Postmaster asked to recover the amount from the party at fault;
the order should not be included in the return of Indian Postal
Orders paid to be submitted to the Delhi Postal Accounts
Office. If it was payable at another office, it bears the
endorsement “Payee known to me” signed by the Postmaster.
 227

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

(d) In case the extra commission be not realised on an order paid

after six months or if realised by short charge in the list of
Indian Postal Orders paid, the order should be returned to the
Postmaster with instructions to have Indian Postage Stamps for
the amount equivalent to the commission affixed on the back of
the order and to resubmit it to the Postal Accounts Office. In
such cases the amount of the order should be placed under
objection.

(e) The stamps affixed for making up broken amounts should be

defaced in the Postal Accounts Office, and if they are
inadvertently defaced by the paying office or affixed elsewhere
than in the space provided for the purpose on the face of the
order, their value should be recovered from the postmaster
concerned.

NOTE 1 -- A postage stamp or stamps affixed to an Indian Postal Order

shall not be regarded as defaced when such a defacement consists merely in the
stamp or stamps, being encroached upon by a portion of the issuing officer's
signature, or the date stamps of the issuing office, or by the entries made by the
payee in filing in or receipting the order or of the crossing of the Bank Stamp,
etc.

NOTE 2 -- The procedure for dealing with the short payments or over
payments exceeding Re. one or not exceeding Re. one has been outlined in Paras
4.15 and 4.21 respectively.

4.18 To ensure that the prescribed checks have correctly and fully
been applied by the checkers concerned, two per cent of the paid orders
selected from various denominations and different offices should be
reviewed by the J.A.O.

4.19 Indian Postal Orders repaid to the purchaser are treated in

 228

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

the same way as orders paid to the payee and are included in the monthly
abstract of payments. They should be checked with reference to Rule
402/21 of the Posts and Telegraphs Manual, Volume VI-Part I.

4.20 If the amount of orders paid or refund is irregularly charged

in the schedule of unclassified payments, it should be transferred to the
Abstract of Payments of Indian Postal Orders, and the irregularity pointed
out to the Postmaster concerned.

In the case of an Indian Postal Order lost after payment a certificate

of Payment by the paying Postmaster in the Form prescribed in Rule
402/24 of the Posts and Telegraphs Manual, , Volume VI, Part I together
with the Postmaster General's letter of authority for its issue should be
accepted as a paid order.

4.21 The total amount of Indian Postal Orders paid (less the
amount placed under objection and also less the value of Indian Postage
Stamp affixed to the Indian Postal Orders) should be classified under the
head, “8446-Postal Deposits-001-01 Postal Deposits-01 Indian Postal
Orders”, the total value of the Indian Postage Stamps affixed on Indian
Postal Orders being debited the head, “1201-001-01-04-02-02-Deduct
Value of Stamps affixed on Indian Postal Orders”

Checking of the Memorandum of unsold Indian Postal Orders

4.22 The memorandum of unsold Indian Postal Orders in stock in

Post Offices received with the monthly lists of sales should be checked by
the checker to see that the opening balance corresponds with the closing
balance of the previous month. He should also see that:-

(i) The supply received, if any, agree with the entries in the third
 229

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

copy of the invoice of I.P.O.s received from cash branch, he

will then endorse a certificate of verifications on this copy of
the invoice under proper attestation and return it to the cash
branch.

The prompt return of the third copy of invoice to the cash

branch after verification should be watched through a register
maintained in PA Section which should be submitted monthly
to the A.O., showing the position of receipt and verification of
the memo of unsold I.P.O.s and verification of invoices
therewith.

(ii) the sales agree with the corresponding entries in the list of
Indian Postal Orders sold;

(iii) The balance of orders shown as in stock under each

denomination agrees with the total of the numbers shown
against the heads “Orders unsold in Head Office” and “Orders
unsold in Sub-Offices” under that denomination.

After an arithmetical check, the memorandum together with the sale

list should be filed with the cash account.

Objections

4.23 The procedure for the maintenance of objection books. etc.,

is the same as laid down in Chapter 3 of Postal Accounts Manual Vol. I.

Differences in the Indian Postal Order accounts of sums not

exceeding Re. 1/- on account of over credits and short credits or short
payments and over-payments need not be included in the Objection Book.
They should nevertheless be included in the Objection statement with
 230

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

instructions to the Postmaster to avoid such irregularities in future. Items

exceeding 15 paise in respect of either commission or value may be
waived by the officers mentioned below if the correspondence thereon
tends to become protracted and the items do not indicate any willful
neglect of duty on the part of any Postal Official and do not form one of a
series pointing to systematic fraud.

Headquarters Office Case exceeding Rs. 1000/-

Director of Accounts (Postal) Rs. 100/- in any individual case

Dy. Director of Accounts (Postal) Rs. 7S in any individual case

Offices

Accounts Officers Rs. 75 in any individual case

Over-credits or short-payments On Indian Postal Orders not

exceeding Re. 1/· should be noted in a register in Form No. D.G. (PA)-414
for each Postal Circle and the total amount adjusted by transfer entries to
the credit of “Postal Receipts-Other Items” under 1201-008-002-22-“Other
Items” by debit to “8446 Postal-Postal Deposits-01 Deposits-Indian Postal
Orders”. Short credits or overpayments on Indian Postal Orders should be
noted in a separate register in Form SY-265. The total amount should be
adjusted monthly by debit to “3201-02-101-Postal Network-01-Existing
Post Office 0064-Writes Off/Losses etc.” and credited to “8446 Postal
Deposits-001-01 Postal Deposits-01-Indian Postal Orders”. The two
registers should be submitted monthly to the Accounts Officers- in-charge
through the J.A.O. for review. If these mistakes occur frequently in the
accounts of anyone Post Office, the Postmaster's special attention should
be drawn to them and a report should be made to the Head or the Circle
requesting him to take suitable notice of the Postmaster's carelessness.
 231

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

MISCELLANEOUS

Indian Postal Orders lost or stolen from the stock of a Post Office

4.24 On receipt of reports of loss or theft of Indian Postal Orders

in the Delhi Postal Accounts Office from Postmasters (vide Rule 402/13 of
the Posts and Telegraphs Manual, Volume VI, Part I) or from a Postal
Accounts Office, the bundles of the Indian Postal Orders paid should be
examined to see whether the missing orders have been paid or received as
spoilt or unclaimed. If not, the fact should be brought to the notice of the
Heads of the Circles so that the latter may issue instructions to all
Postmasters prohibiting their payments and a check slip should be placed
in the bundle of paid I.P.Os. indicating the particulars of the lost or stolen
I.P.Os. in order to enable the detection of the fraudulent payment of the
lost or stolen I.P.Os. if subsequently made.

NOTE -- A check slip [Form D.G.(PA)-483-R] should be prepared and

kept in the proper place in the Indian Postal Order bundles.

4.25 If payment of any such missing order or orders is traced, the

order or orders should be examined and forwarded to the Head of the
Circle, for an investigation of the fraudulent payment, placing the amount
under “P&T Advances” in the Objection Book.

4.26 Sums recovered from the Postal officials responsible for the
loss of the missing orders are credited by Postmasters as “Unclassified
Receipts” and should be brought to account under “1201 Postal
Receipt00800-Other Receipts-Postal Receips-22 Other items". Missing
Indian Postal Orders should continue to be shown in the stock until the
Head of the Circle concerned after making necessary enquiry and being
satisfied about the loss of orders, forwards the decision to the concerned
Circle Postal Accounts Office which will then direct the Postmaster
 232

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

concerned to remove the orders from his stock, by an entry in red ink in
his list of Indian Postal Orders sold without including the value of the
orders in the total of the list. No write-off of value is necessary.

Disposal of the “spoilt” and “unclaimed” Indian Postal Orders

received from postmasters etc

4.27 Spoilt and unclaimed Indian Postal Orders when received in

the Postal Accounts Office, either from Postmasters or from any other
source, must be treated as “Valuable” and made over to the section
concerned through the register of valuables kept in the Record Section.
(They should reach the Postal Accounts Office in separate registered
covers marked “Important” in red ink, and when this is not the case, the
irregularity should be brought to the notice of the sender).

4.28 If the serial and consecutive numbers of the orders returned

by Postmasters are detailed in the letter accompanying them or in a
separate invoice, the orders should be checked with the entries in the letter
of or the invoice and an acknowledgement (in the prescribed form) signed
by the Accounts Officer-in-charge, sent to Postmaster. If no details are
given in the letter as no invoice is received, a suitable list should be
prepared in manuscript and the omission pointed out to the postmaster.

4.29 Spoilt orders received either with the list of orders sold or
otherwise should be entered in a manuscript register in the form
prescribed below which should be submitted to the Accounts Officer for
orders and attestation of the entries made therein. If the reasons stated by
the Postmaster for treating the orders as “spoilt” are found by the
Accounts Officer to be satisfactory, the orders should be forwarded to the
Delhi Postal Accounts Office with a covering memorandum which should
be enclosed in a separate service envelope, registered and super-scribed
 233

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

“Important” in red ink, the number and date of the forwarding

memorandum being cited in the last column of the register referred to
above. Cases which reveal carelessness or rough handling of orders in
Post Offices or where the explanation of Postmasters treating the orders as
“Spoilt” is not satisfactory, should be reported to the Head of the Circle
concerned.

Register of Spoilt Indian Postal Orders

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Date From Serial No. How Spoilt Value J.A.O.’s Accounts No. and Date of
Of whom (with Index Remarks Officer’s Memo. Forwarding
receipt rec. No. and letter Orders the order to the
of Order Delhi Postal Acc.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

NOTE -- The spoilt I.P.Os should be accompanied with the counterfoils.

In case the counterfoil is not received along with the spoilt I.P.Os. it should be
called for from the Postmaster. The counterfoils should be cancelled under
orders of the Accounts Officer.
 234

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

4.30 The spoilt orders when received in the Delhi Postal Accounts
Office are entered in the register of valuables kept in the Record Section
and made over to the Indian Postal Order clerk under his initials. The
Indian Postal Orders clerk then enters them in a manuscript register in the
following form and places them in their proper places in the bundles of
paid orders. The date on which orders have been so placed should be noted
against the respective serial numbers in column 5 of the register.

The register should be submitted to the Accounts Officer for review

every Monday.

Register of Spoilt Indian Postal Orders

No. and date
of the Serial No.
Placed in paid
memorandum (with Index
From whom bundles by me on
with which No. and Value Date Remarks
received signature of the
the Indian letter) of the
IPO clerk
Postal orders order
received
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

4.31 Unclaimed, time barred and forfeited orders received in the

Postal Accounts Offices should also be entered in a manuscript register in
the following form and submitted to the Accounts Officer along with a
 235

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

forwarding memorandum addressed to the Director of Accounts (Postal),

Delhi duly kept in the register. The Accounts Officer will attest the entry
in the register and sign the memorandum which along with the unclaimed
orders should be despatched to the Delhi Postal Accounts Office in a
service envelope, registered and super scribed “Important” in red ink. The
number and date of the forwarding memorandum should be noted in the
“Remarks” column of the register.

Register or Un-claimed, time barred and forfeited Indian Postal

Orders

Serial No with
Name of the
From whom Index NO. and
Date of receipt Office of issue Date of issue Payee as noted
received letter of the
on the order
order

1 2 3 4 5 6

Office of
Initials of the Initials of he
Payment as noted Value Initials of the J.A.O. Remarks
IPO- Clerk Accounts Officer
on the order

7 8 9 10 11 12
 236

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

4.32 Time barred and forfeited I.P.Os. received in Delhi Postal

Accounts Office from other Postal Accounts Offices as well as from the
Post Offices, etc. under its own jurisdiction should be entered in a
manuscript register in the following form and submitted to the Accounts
Officer, along with the I.P.Os. for attestation of the entries made therein.
Such IP.Os. should be conspicuously marked in red ink “Time barred
Forfeited to Government” under the initials of the Accounts Officer and
then kept in their proper places in the bundles of paid I.P.Os. The
following adjustment should be made by a monthly transfer entry.

Dr.

“8446-Postal Deposits 001-01 Postal Deposits

01 Indian Postal Orders”

Cr.

“1201-Postal Receipts 00800-

Other Receipts-Postal Receipts-22 Other Items”

Forfeited Indian Postal Orders

No. and date of

Serial No. with Name of the
the Memorandum From
Index No. and Office of Date of payee as
under which the whom
letter of I.P. Issue Issue noted in the
Indian Postal received
Order Order
Order received

1 2 3 4 5 6
 237

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

Office of Payment as Initials of Initials of the IPO; Remarks

Value Date
noted in the Order Accounts Officer Clerk Placed in bundles Paid by me on

7 8 9 10 11 12

4.33 Unclaimed orders received in Delhi Postal Account Office

from other Postal Account Offices as well as from the Head Post Offices,
etc. under its own jurisdiction are entered in the manuscript register in the
following form and submitted to the Accounts Officer for attestation of
the entries in the register. The orders are kept in the safe for Indian Postal
Orders in stock separately for each denomination in separate bundles
according to the month of issue for twelve months, counting from the last
date of month of issue and then placed in their proper places in the
bundles of paid orders if not claimed during this period, the fact being
noted in the register referred to above under the initials of the Indian
Postal Orders clerk. Check slips [form D.G. (PA)-483-B] should be
prepared for the Indian Postal Orders kept in the safe and placed in the
proper places in the Indian Postal Order bundles. The orders should be
conspicuously marked in red ink “Unclaimed forfeited to Government”
under the initials of the Accounts Officer and the following adjustment
made by a transfer entry: -
 238

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

Dr.

“8446-Postal Deposit-001-01 Postal Deposits 01 Indian Postal

Orders”

Cr.

“1201-Postal Receipts-00800-Other Receipts-Postal Receipts-22-

Other Items”

Forfeited Indian Postal Orders

Register for unclaimed Indian Postal Orders: - See Performa as in

Register of Time barred & forfeited I.P.O.’s against para 4.32.

Disposal of the unpaid balance of Indian Postal Orders

4.34 The head “Indian Postal Orders” relating to a particular

financial year is kept open in the books for two financial years and the
balance i.e. the excess of actual receipts over payments, under this head
will lapse to Government at the close of the second financial year and be
transferred to the revenue head “Forfeited Indian Postal Orders”.

Monthly statements of Indian Postal Orders in Stock Sold and paid

4.35 The Postal Account Section concerned in each Postal

Account Office should compile for each circle separately a statement of
Indian Postal Orders paid in Form No. D.G. (PA)-483 and make it over to
the statement group of the office together with the paid orders classified
under the head “Indian Postal Orders paid” duly arranged according to the
serial number of each series and for each denomination separately. Before
making over the statement must be proved by the J.A.O. in charge of
Postal Account Section who should see that the total value of payments
(excluding the value of postage stamps affixed to the Indian Postal orders)
is correct with reference to the face value of the total number of the Indian
 239

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

Postal Orders paid and agrees with the booked figure and marked the
statement “Agreed with Detail Book” under his initials.

4.36 The Postal Account Section concerned in each Postal

Account Office should compile for each postal circle separately, two
statements of Indian Postal Orders sold and in stock in each month in
Form D.G. (PA)-483 and forward them to the Delhi Postal Account office
on the 25th of the month following that to which the statement relates.
Before sending the statement of Indian Postal Orders sold, the total of the
statement must be proved by the J.A.O. in charge of the Postal Account
Section who should see that the total value of the Indian Postal Orders
sold is correct with reference to the face value of the total number of
Indian Postal Orders sold and agrees with the Detail Book figures and
mark the statement “Agreed with Detail Book” under his initials.

The commission realised on Indian Postal Orders sold should also be

checked with reference to the total number of Indian Postal Orders sold
and agreed with the Detail Book figures monthly for statistical purposes.

The figures of Indian Postal Orders in Stock should be shown

separately in Form D.G. (PA)-483 under each denomination separately in
respect of the following: -

Opening Balance:

Supply from

(i) Circle Stamp Depot

(ii) Govt. Security Press Nasik

Deduct:

(a) Sales.

(b) Spoilt I.P.Os. sent to Delhi Postal Account Office vide letter
 240

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

No……………… dated.

(c) I.P.Os. written off.

(d) Returned to Delhi Postal Account Office vide Invoice

No…………...

Closing balance

4.37 The statement Group should prepare a consolidated

statement [in Form D.G. (P.A.)-483] showing the total value of Indian
Postal Orders paid for all the Postal Circles under the jurisdiction of the
Postal Account Office and arrange the paid orders for all the Postal circles
together according to the serial numbers and index number and letter of
each series for each denomination separately. The statement together with
the arranged paid orders should after affecting agreement of the figures in
the former with the debits in the Detail Book, be despatched to the Delhi
Postal Account Office on the 27th of the month following that to which
the statement relates.

4.38 After the closure of March Supplementary Accounts, the

Postal Account Offices should send a statement of Indian Postal Orders
sold [Form D.G. (PA)-483] to the PA Wing of the Postal Directorate so as
to reach that office by the 16 th August.

The PA Wing of the Postal Directorate should compile the figures

from the statements received from the Postal Account Offices and furnish
three statements to the Director General, Postal Services (MI Section) by
the 30 th August, showing (1) the Number and Value of I.P.Os. sold during
the year according to the Denominations; (2) the number and value of
I.P.Os. sold and commission realised thereon during the year according to
Circles, and (3) the Number and value of Indian Postal Orders sold free of
commission during the year according to Circles.
 241

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

4.39 A monthly statement in separate Form [D.G. (PA)-495] for

each circle showing the approximate number of Indian Postal Orders sold
and their value is sent to the Director General, Postal Services by the end
of the month following the month of account together with the final
figures relating to the previous month i.e. the figures for January should
be furnished along with the approximate figures for February by the end of
March.

NOTE -- The statement is sent centrally through Book or statement

Section where the figures are consolidated in Form No. D.G. (PA)-495.

4.40 The Postal Account Office should be careful to see that

every paid order, the value of which is included in the statement is sent to
the Delhi Postal Account Office. When it is found absolutely necessary to
detain a paid order on any account, its amount should not be included in
the statement of paid orders until the order is actually despatched. The
amount of the order so detained should be placed under objection under
“P&T Advanced” When the value of the order is subsequently included in
the statement and actually despatched, its face value should be debited to
the head, “8446-Postal Deposits-001-01 Postal Deposits 01 Indian Postal
Orders” and the value of the Indian Postal Stamps (if any) affixed thereto
to the Head, “1201-001-01-04-02-02 Deduct Value of Stamps affixed on
Indian Postal Orders”. Sale of Postal Stamp in 1201-Postal Receipts-001-
01-Sale of Postage Stamps by credit to the head, “8553-001-01-Postal
Advances-01-Railway Mail Services and Other Accounts”

4.41 In Delhi Postal Account office, the statements received from

other Postal Account Offices should be entered in the Register of
valuables kept in the Record Section and made over to the Indian Postal
Order Clerk together with the paid orders. The Indian Postal Order Clerk
should count the paid orders and tick off the numbers entered in the
 242

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

statement under each denomination. The statement should be marked

“checked” under the initials of the Indian Postal Order Clerk and filed
under the orders of the Accounts Officer.

4.42 The paid orders received from other Postal Account Offices
and those paid by Post Offices in the jurisdiction at Delhi Postal Account
Office should be arranged together for the whole of India according to the
serial numbers of each series of the Index number and letter for each
denomination separately. This work should be completed by the 10 th of the
3 rd month following the month to which the Indian Postal Orders paid
relate. The paid orders should then be kept in an almirah in separate
bundles for each denomination serially arranged irrespective of the month
of payment.

NOTE -- Check slips [Form D.G. (PA)-483-B] should be prepared in lieu

of Indian Postal Orders taken out of the bundles and kept in the proper places.

4.43 Soon after the Indian Postal Orders paid during March have
been arranged in main bundles of paid Indian Postal Orders in the manner
indicating in para 4.42 each bundle should be examined by the Indian
Postal Order clerks and the serial numbers of the Indian Postal Orders in
respect of each denomination entered in a list in the following form. The
listing work should be commenced by the 1 st October of the year
following the year of payment and completed by 31 st March of that year.
The lists so prepared for each denomination should be kept bound into a
register which should be preserved for 3 years and thereafter it may be
destroyed under orders of the Director of Accounts (Postal). The listing
work may be got done on payment of honorarium after obtaining the
approval of the Dy. Director General, Postal Services, (PA Wing).

After completion of the listing work, the Indian Postal Orders should
be destroyed under the orders of the Director of Accounts in April of the
 243

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

second financial year following the year of payment, the last two columns
of form being filled in them.

Serial
No.
Initials of Date of Initials of
Denomination Total
B.O. Destruction B.O.
From To

1 2 3 4 5 6

VERIFICATION OF STOCK

Central stock

4.44 The Central Stock of Indian Postal Orders should be verified

annually by the Group A or B Officer of the Office of the Director of
Accounts (Postal) Delhi, who is not connected with the work relating to
the stock of Indian Postal Orders with the help of 3 to 4 checkers. This
verification will generally be done in July when the balance is at its
lowest.

A certificate of the verifying officer for completion of the

verification should be sent to the Director General, Postal Services (PA
 244

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

Wing) within a week after the verification. The Office of the Director
General, Postal Services (PA Wing) should watch that the certificates
showing no discrepancies should be filed immediately while those
showing discrepancies should be filed only after the discrepancies are
settled.

4.45 Deleted

4.46 Deleted

Stock in post offices

4.47 At the time of inspection of Head Post Offices,

Superintendent and Inspector of Post Offices are required to send to the
Postal Account Offices a memorandum, showing the balance at the end of
the month proceedings his visit, subsequent receipts and sales up to the
date of visit and the balance in stock on that date, with a certificate that
the stock and accounts were found to agree, Vide Clause 4/1 to Rule 239
of the Posts and Telegraphs Manual Volume VIII. The Memorandum
should be checked with the return of the corresponding period received
from the Post Office, any discrepancy being reported to the Head of the
Circle.

Verification of Balances

4.48 The Postal Accounts Office, Delhi will maintain the

following three Broadsheets in manuscript in the forms A, B and C for
verifying the balances of stock of Indian Postal Orders and effecting all
agreement with the ledger balance when the accounts of the year are
 245

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

closed:

(1) A broadsheet 8'bowing the number under each denomination

and value of :-

(i) Indian Postal Orders received from Nasik Press,

(ii) Indian Postal Orders issued to Postal Account Offices.

(iii) Indian Postal Orders in stock in Delhi Postal Accounts Office.

(Central Stock) - This broadsheet will be posted from the stock register of
Indian Postal Orders and the monthly balances worked out therein
will be agreed with the balance shown in the stock register.

(2) A broadsheet showing the number under each denomination and

value of: -

(i) Indian Postal Orders issued to different Postal Account

Offices.

(ii) Indian Postal Orders sold (including spoilt and written off)
and

(iii) Indian Postal Orders in stock in Postal Account offices and

Post Offices.

The number of Indian Postal Orders issued will be posted in the

broadsheet from the stock register of Indian Postal Orders. Their
value will also be posted therein after calculation. The number and
value of Indian Postal Orders sold will be posted from the statement
of Indian Postal Orders sold received monthly from the different
 246

CHAPTER IV INDIAN POSTAL ORDER

Postal Accounts Offices. The balances worked out in this broadsheet

should be agreed with the balance in stock shown in the statements
of Indian Postal Orders in stock received from the different Postal
Accounts Offices.

(3) A broadsheet showing the number under each denomination and

value or: -

(i) Indian Postal Orders sold.

(ii) Indian Postal Orders paid, and

(iii) Indian Postal Orders remaining unpaid.

The number and value of Indian Postal Orders sold and paid will be
posted in the broadsheet from the statements of Indian Postal Orders sold
and paid received from the different Postal Account Offices (vide paras
4.35 and 4.36). The value of Indian Postal Orders sold and paid in each
circle as posted in the broadsheet should be agreed with the figures of
monthly credits and debits on account of Indian Postal Orders intimated
on the 25 th of the 2 nd month following, to the Delhi Postal Accounts Office
by the PA Wing of the Postal Directorate and the discrepancies, if any,
reconciled in communication with the Postal Accounts Offices concerned.

The broadsheets should, after completion, be submitted to the Branch

Officer in-charge before the 2 nd month following the month of account.
 Form A

Broadsheet of IPOs in Central Stock held in Postal Accounts Office, Delhi.

CHAPTER IV

Name of Month ………………………………

Issue to Circle
Name of Closing
Total Value Receipt from Postal
Accounts Opening Balance Balance Remarks
Rs. Ps. Nasik Press Accounts
Offices (2 + 3 - 4)
Office

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
247

0.50/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/20/30/40/50/100 Denomination Denomination Denomination

Wise Wise Wise
INDIAN POSTAL ORDER
 Form B

Broadsheet of IPOs unsold in Postal Accounts Offices including Post Offices

CHAPTER IV

Received Sold in Pos

Opening Balance
Name of from Delhi under Closing
Total Value
Accounts Postal respective Balance Remarks
Rs. Ps.
Offices Accounts Circle, Postal (2 + 3 - 4)
Number per Denomination
Office A/cs Office

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
248

Denomination Denomination Denomination

Wise Wise Wise
INDIAN POSTAL ORDER
 Form C

Broadsheet Showing Indian Postal Orders sold, Remaining Unpaid

CHAPTER IV

Total Value Closing Balance

Name of Circle Opening Balance I.P.Os Sold/Paid Remarks
Rs. Ps. (2 + 3 - 4)

1 2 3 4 6 7
249

Denomination Denomination
Wise Wise
INDIAN POSTAL ORDER
 250

CHAPTER V BRITISH POSTAL ORDERS

CHAPTER - V
BRITISH POSTAL ORDERS

Introductory

5.1 The Director General, Postal Services, is responsible for

checking of payments or British Postal Orders as also for the accounts of
all transactions relating to them. The rules for payment of British Postal
Orders in Post Offices as well as those relating to maintenance of the
initial accounts and submission of account returns to the Postal Accounts
Offices will be found in Chapter 7 of the Posts Manual Vol. VI, Part 1.

Return of British Postal Orders received in the Account Offices

5.2 Abstract of payment of British Postal Orders with the paid

orders will be received in the Postal Accounts Offices every months from
Head Post Offices (vide Rule 67 of the Postal Financial Hand book Vol.
II).

NOTE -- If the Abstract of payment of British Postal Orders for any month is
not received in sufficient time to admit of their being checked before the preparation
of the classified abstract, the debits appearing in the Cash Account should be taken to
the Suspense Head “Debit Suspended”.

Checking of the Abstract of payment of British Postal Orders

5.3 The paid lists or abstract of payment should be examined to

see: -

(a) that every entry in the abstract o( payments is supported by

paid Orders to that value. If a paid order is not received with
the list and its absence is not explained against the entry in the
list, it should be immediately called for telegraphically.

(b) that the full value calculated at the prescribed plus the value
Of the British Penny postage or any affixed to the face of the
 251

CHAPTER V BRITISH POSTAL ORDERS

Orders to make up broken amounts agrees with the entries in

the Abstract of payments;

(c) that the total value of postage stamps either British or colonial
affixed to the orders for making up broken amounts agrees
with the entries at foot of the abstract of payments;

(d) that the total amount paid (in rupee currency) as per Abstract
agrees with the charge in the monthly cash accounts;

NOTE 1 -- The value of half-penny postage stamps affixed to British Postal

Orders is not payable vide Rule 19 of the “Rules for Post Master at Money Orders
Offices in the United Kingdom” and Rule 389 (a) of the Posts and Telegraphs Manual,
Volume VI, Part I.

NOTE 2 -- The rates at which the sterling values of British Postal Orders are to
be converted into Indian Currency before they are paid are prescribed by the Director
General, Postal Services from time to time.

5.4 The paid orders should be further examined in detail in the

following manner:-

(a) If the amount is paid to a person other than the payee named
in the British Postal Order (except as provided in Rule 52 (2)
(b) of the Posts and Telegraphs Manual Volume VIII), the
sanction of the Director General, Postal Services for payment
should be quoted on the paid Order before its submission to
the Government Security Section (vide para 5.14).

(b) If the order is not genuine, or if the amount has been altered,
or if it was payable at another office, or if it has been cut,
defaced, mutilated or bears erasures or alterations, the amount
thereof should be placed under objection under “P&T
Advances” and the Postmaster asked to recover the amount
from the party at fault; the Order should not be included in the
return of British Postal Orders paid.
 252

CHAPTER V BRITISH POSTAL ORDERS

(c) In case the extra poundage be not realised on an Order paid

after currency or if realised by short charge in the list of
British Postal Orders paid, the Orders should be returned to
the Postmaster with instructions to have Indian Postage stamps
for the amount equivalent to poundage affixed on the back of
the Order and to resubmit it to the Postal Accounts Office. In
such cases the full amount of the Order should be placed
under objection as “P&T Advances”.

(d) The stamps affixed for making up broken amounts should be

defaced in the Postal Accounts Office, and if they are affixed
elsewhere than in the prescribed space on the face of the Order
their value should be recovered from the Postmaster
concerned. Payment on account of the value of stamps affixed
to make up broken amounts should be examined with
reference to Rule 389, P&T Manual Vol. VI Part I and excess
if any, should be disallowed in checking and recovered.

(e) That the British Postal Orders, presented for payment six
months after the last date of the month of issue are paid after
obtaining a special sanction of the British Post Office and
charging a second commission equal to the original British
postage.

NOTE 1 -- The stamps should not, however, be regarded as defaced when such
defacement consists merely in stamps or, stamps being encroached upon by a portion
of the issuing officer’s signatures, or by entries made by the payee in filling in or
receipting the Orders etc.

NOTE 2 -- Short or excess debits exceeding Re. 1 in the cash account of the
value of British Postal Orders paid should be held under objection and adjusted thus: -

The correct value should be debited to the proper head and (a) the amount paid
in excess debited to “P&T Advances in the accounts,” (b) the amount short paid
should be credited to “155-Postal receipts-Other Items”, and entered in the inner
 253

CHAPTER V BRITISH POSTAL ORDERS

column of Objection Book. The items will be received from the Objection Book on
credits on account of (a) if the amount short paid cannot be paid back to the payees
within a reasonable time; the amount will be removed from the Objection Book with
the remarks “Removed Payee not traceable”.

Difference in the British Postal Order accounts of sums not exceeding Re. 1 on
account of short payments should be treated in the manner laid down in para 5.9.
These small differences should be accounted for by per contra entries in the classified
abstract thus:-

(i) Overpayments

Dr. 355-Postal Services-2 Existing Post Offices

Writes off Deposits losses

To B.P.O·s paid (Deduct from Debit)-Cr.

(ii) Short, payments

Dr. Deposits - British Postal Orders paid.

155-Postal Receipts-7-other receipts-2 Postal Receipts - Other Items - Cr.

5.5 The checked paid orders should be reviewed by the J.A.O.

In-charge to ensure that the prescribed checks have been fully and
correctly applied by the Accountant concerned.

5.6 If the amount of orders paid is irregularly charged in the

schedule of unclassified payments, it should be transferred to the abstract
of payments of British Postal Orders and the irregularity pointed out to
the Postmaster concerned.

5.7 In the case of loss of a paid British Postal Order, a

certificate of payment by the paying Postmaster in the form prescribed in
Rule 399 of the Posts and Telegraphs Manual, Volume VI, together with
Postmaster General's letter of Authority for its issue should be accepted
as a paid order.

5.8 The total amount of British Postal Orders paid (less the
amount placed under objection) should be classified to the head
 254

CHAPTER V BRITISH POSTAL ORDERS

“Deposits -- British Postal Orders”.

Postage stamps of the Somali and Protectorate affixed to British

Postal Orders, though expressed in rupees currency are Indian Stamps.
They should therefore be classified under the head “British or Colonial
Stamps”.

Objection

5.9 The procedure for maintenance of Objection Book., etc.

will be found in Chapter 3 of the Postal Accounts Manual Volume I.

Difference in the British Postal Order accounts of sums not

exceeding Re. 1 on account at short payments and over-payments need
not be included in the Objection Book. They should nevertheless be
included in the Objection Statement with a warning to the Postmaster to
avoid such irregularities in future. Short payments On British Postal
Order not exceeding Re. 1 should be noted in a register in Form D.G.
(PA)-414 for each Postal Circle and the total amount adjusted by
monthly transfer entries to the credit of “155 Postal Receipts - Other
items” by debit to “P&T Deposits British Postal Orders”. Over payments
on British Postal Orders should be noted in a separate register in Form S.
Y.-265.

5.10 The total amount will be adjusted monthly by debit to

“355-Postal Services-2 existing Post Offices write off/Losses, etc” and
credit to “P&T Deposits British Postal Orders”. The two registers should
be submitted monthly to the Accounts Officer-in-charge through the
J.A.O. in-charge for review. If these mistakes occur frequently in the
accounts of anyone Post Office, the Postmaster's special attention should
be drawn to them and a report should be made to the Head of the Circle
requesting him to make suitable notice of the Postmaster's carelessness.

Disposal of unclaimed British Postal Orders reached from

 255

CHAPTER V BRITISH POSTAL ORDERS

postmasters etc.

5.11 Unclaimed British Postal Orders received in Postal

Accounts Offices either from the Postmaster or from any other source
must be treated as valuable and entered in the Register of valuables and
should be made over to the section concerned through this register.

5.12 A manuscript register in the following form should be

maintained in the Government Security Section for the record of all
unclaimed B. P. as received from the Accounts Officer or from any other
source. These orders should be sent to the General Post Office kept
immediately on receipt with a forwarding letter in form No. D.G. (PA)-
310.

Register of Unclaimed British Postal Orders

Date of From whom Serial No. Value J.A.O.s’ B. O.'s

Remarks
receipt received of Orders £ s. d. initials initials

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Monthly Statement of Payment of British Postal Orders

5.13 Every Postal Accounts Office should compile for each

Postal Circle a statement of B.P.Os paid in each month in Form No. D.G.
(PA)-305 and forward the same in time to reach the Government Security
Section on the 23 rd of the month following that to which the statement
relate. The value of paid orders as well as of postage stamps affixed
thereto should be shown separately.
 256

CHAPTER V BRITISH POSTAL ORDERS

5.14 The Postal Accounts Office should be careful to see that

every paid order included in the statement is sent with it to the
Government Security Section. When it is found absolutely necessary to
detain a paid Order on any account its number and amount should not be
included in the statement of paid orders until the Order is actually
despatched. The amount of the Order so detained should be placed under
objection under “P&T Advances”. When the Order is subsequently
included in the statement and actually despatched, its amount should be
debited to the head “Deposits - British Postal Orders” by credit to the
“P&T Advances”.

5.15 The total of the statement must be proved by the J.A.O. in-
charge of the Accounts Section concerned. He should see -

(i) that the Sterling Value is correct, and

(ii) that the total amount converted into “Indian Currency” at the
prescribed rate is correct.

Account current with London

5.16(a) On receipt of the circle wise B.P.O. statements in form

D.G. (PA)-305, along with the paid vouchers, from the different Postal
Accounts Office, they will be subjected to scrutiny in the G.S. Section of
the Director of Accounts (Postal), Calcutta to see that -

(i) Every paid voucher included in the statement has been

received.

(ii) The number of vouchers shown in the statement is correct.

(iii) The value in Sterling has been correctly indicated.

(b) After these checks are over, the number of vouchers with their
value in Sterling in respect of each Circle will be posted in the register of
Circle wise and denomination wise compilation of B.P.O. transactions, to
be maintained in manuscript in the proforma given below: -
 257

CHAPTER V BRITISH POSTAL ORDERS

Register of Circle Wise & Deno. wise Compilation of B.P.O. Month

Den. Den. Den. Den. Total

Name of
Circle No. Value No. Value No. Value No. Value No. Value

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Total

5.17 The monthly consolidated Account Current will be

prepared in form D.G. (PA)-306 after the agreements as enjoined in the
foregoing para are affected. The Account Current, along with the form
M-2, duly filled in, will then be despatched by Air Mail on the 12 th of
each month to the U.K. Postal Authority. The supporting paid B.P.Os
will, however, is sent by Sea post. Copies of the monthly Account
Current will be endorsed by the Director of Accounts (Postal) Calcutta to
the D.A.A. Section of the Postal Directorate as well as to the Director of
Accounts (Postal), Delhi. The U.K. Postal Authority will be asked by the
Director of Accounts (Postal) Calcutta, while forwarding the Account
Current to them to endorse a copy of their intimation of acceptance to the
D.A.A. Section also.

The prescribed entries on the two sides of the Account Current

provide for:-

(i) Imprests repaid for savings Bank transfers.

(ii) British Postal Orders paid in India including value of British

or Colonial postage stamps.

(iii) Commission for the payment of British Postal Orders as

changed from time to time per 1000 paid BPOs. (Rate of
Commission, from 1 st May 1982 @ 83 per 1000 paid BPOs).
 258

CHAPTER V BRITISH POSTAL ORDERS

(iv) Imprests received for Savings Bank Transfers

(v) Remittance to London on Account of: -

(a) British Postal Orders, viz. the amounts paid and the
commission due to India.

(b) Savings Bank transfers, viz. the balance in favour of the

United Kingdom or India, being the difference between the
amounts of Savings Bank account, transferred out of India
and the amount of Savings Bank accounts transferred to
India.

(vi) Special entries (in manuscript) with full particulars of each

item

5.18 The D.A.A. Section of the Postal Directorate should include

the accepted amount of Monthly Account Current in the Monthly U.K.
General Account and simultaneously intimate the fact of such inclusion to
the G.S. Section of the Director of Accounts (Postal), Calcutta and also to
the Director of Accounts (Postal), Delhi. When the instrument of payment
(viz. cheque/draft etc.) is received from the U.K. Postal Authority, the
D.A.A. Section will send the same to the Parliament Street H.P.O. for
encashment. While forwarding the same to the Postmaster Parliament
Street, H.P.O. the D.A.A. Section will endorse copies of the forwarding
letter to the Director of Accounts (Postal) Delhi and G.S. Section of
Director of Accounts (Postal), Calcutta, indicating the reference/individual
details of the transactions, which stand included in the remittance received
to enable them to make adjustments in their Account Books accordingly.
The Director of Accounts (Postal), Calcutta will, on receipt of the
intimation of acceptance of the B.P.O. Account Current from the U.K.
Postal Authority, obtain conformation from the D.A.A. Section the month
of U.K. General Account in which the amount has been included by them.
 259

CHAPTER V BRITISH POSTAL ORDERS

On tracing the aforesaid credit in the cash account of the Parliament

Street H.O., the Director of Accounts (Postal) Delhi, will pass on the
credit showing full particulars of the transaction through A.T.C. to G.S.
Section of the Director of Account (Postal) Calcutta who will after
necessary check, clear the amount booked under the head debit suspended
vide para 5.19 (a). The difference between the amount already booked
under the head debit suspended and the amount already received from the
Director of Accounts (Postal) Delhi should be adjusted under the head loss
or gain by exchange as the case may be.

5.19(a) For the amount of British Postal Orders', and for' other
special items for which credit is due to India a monthly adjustment will be
made by the Government Security Section crediting the head “Deposits
British Postal Orders Remittance” and debiting the head “Posts and
Telegraphs remittance other Postal Accounts Office - Remittance Other
than Army, Postal, Pay and Accounts Office, Delhi Postal Accounts
Office”. In making this adjustment the sterling amount payable by the
United Kingdom should be converted into rupee currency at the composite
rate fixed by the D.G. from time to time. The difference between this
amount and the amount arrived at according to the rate prescribed by the
Director General, Postal Services for the month or in different rates were
in force during the month, according to the rate in force for the greater
part of the month should be taken to the head “Exchange on Remittance
Account Postal and Money Order Transaction” by credit or debit as the
case may be. The total amount to be credited to the head “P&T Deposits
British Postal Order Remittance” should be the amount arrived at
according to the rate prescribed by the Director General, Postal Services.

(b) The commission on account of British Postal Order transaction at

the prescribed rate per 1000 should be converted into rupee currency
according to the rate prescribed by the Director General, Postal Services
 260

CHAPTER V BRITISH POSTAL ORDERS

are credited to the Head “155 Postal Receipts - Receipts on account of

Money Orders and British Postal Order - Commission on British Postal
Orders” by debiting the head “Deposits - and Advances British Postal
Orders Remittances (Deduct from credit)”.

(c) At the end of the year, a statement showing progressive figures

under “P&T Deposits - British Postal Orders” and “P&T Deposits - British
Postal Order Remittances” for each Circle up to March will be forwarded
by the PA Wing of the Directorate to the Director of Accounts (Postal)
Calcutta. The Postal Accounts Office should, then, be asked to settle and
adjust discrepancies found, if any, between the figures under “P&T
Deposits-British Postal Orders” as shown in the monthly statement sent by
them. If the total of the credit under the heads “Deposits British Postal
Orders” and “P&T Deposits British Postal Order Remittances”, is found to
differ from the total of the debit under the same heads, due to different
rates having been applied in the same month and adjustment thereof made
at the rate prevailing for greater part of the month, the difference should
be adjusted in the accounts for March Final by a debit or credit to the head
“268-Misc Genera1 Services - 2 Loss by exchange” or “268-Misc General
Section - 3 - Gain by Exchange” or as the case may be.

Annual and Monthly Statements to the Director General Postal

Services

5.20 Annual consolidated Statement of British Postal Orders paid

in India should be sent by the Director of Accounts (Postal), Calcutta to
the Director General, Postal Services in Form No. D.G. (PA)-308 on or
before the 10 th June every year, For the compilation of this statement, a
register should be maintained in the Government Security Section for
recording the monthly payments of British Postal Orders in each Postal
Circle in India.
 261

CHAPTER VI INTERNATIONAL REPLY COUPONS

CHAPTER VI
INTERNATIONAL REPLY COUPONS

6.1 International Reply Coupons are issued by the International

Bureau, Berne and shall be placed on sale in member countries. The Reply
Coupons has thus become a security of a single type, of a fixed amount in
Gold Francs, issued but not sold to Administrations by the International
Bureau of the International Postal Union. The value fixed in Gold Francs
is used solely, as the basis for entering on Administration's account, the
Coupons sent or received by the International Bureau. Up to 31 st
December 1975 it was calculated at the rate of 60 centimes per unit and
from 1 st January 1986 it is 2.25 Gold Francs per unit. The cost price and
despatch costs are invoiced to Administrations completely independently
at the rate of 1.19 centimes (Swiss) per copy without printing of selling
price and 1.53 Swiss centimes per copy with printing of selling price. The
administrations which sell Reply Coupons have to quote the selling price
in their national currency and this price must not be lower than one Gold
Franc.

6.2 The stock of these Coupons is kept in the office of the

Director of Accounts (Postal) Calcutta (Government Security Section).
Early in March and September each year a requisition for the supply of
International Reply Coupons, estimated to last for six months should be
forwarded by the Director of Accounts (Postal) Calcutta to the
International Bureau for compliance. Supplementary requisitions marked
“Urgent” may, however, be sent out at any time of the year.

6.3 The Coupons, delivered by the International Bureau, are

sent with C-24 Statement. On receipt, the Calcutta Accounts Office will
check the number of Coupons and return one copy of C-24 Statement,
duly signed to the International Bureau Berne

6.4 The cost price of the Coupons and the cost of their despatch
 262

CHAPTER VI INTERNATIONAL REPLY COUPONS

are the subject of a separate invoice to be paid to the International Bureau.

The Calcutta Postal Account Office will intimate the amount of invoice to
the Director General, Postal Services (C.N. Section) who will arrange for
the payment of the invoice by State Bank of India Bank Drafts.

6.5 The Coupons are supplied to Head Post Offices by the

Director of Accounts (Postal) Calcutta on requisitions received by him
direct from the Postmasters. A stock Register in Form D.G. (PA)-314 is
maintained in the Government Security Section in which the number of
Coupons received from the International Bureau and the supplies made to
Post Offices are noted. The register should be submitted to the Accounts
Officer, each time an entry is made in it. Every supply to a Postmaster is
also intimated in Form D.G. (PA)-3l5 to the Postal Accounts Office
concerned far verification of the credits of the value of the Coupons in the
Cash Account.

6.6 An annual verification of the stock of International Reply

Coupons held by the Director of Accounts (Postal), Calcutta, should be
carried out on the 31 st March each year either by the Director of Accounts
himself or by one of his Accounts Officers unconnected with the
International Reply Coupons work and a certificate of the verifying
Officer to that effect forwarded to the D.G.P.S. (PA Wing) so as to reach
that office by the first week of April. The Office of the D.G.P.S. (PA
Wing) should watch that the certificate is received by the due date. If the
certificate shows no discrepancy it may be filed immediately but if any
discrepancy is noticed it should be filed only after the discrepancy is
settled.

NOTE -- A verification of the stock of International Reply Coupons should also

be carried out whenever there is change in the Accounts Officer in charge of the stock.

6.7 When a supply is made to Post Office, the value of the

Coupons, at the rate of RS.5.30 from 1 st January 1985 and RS.8.50 from
1 st January,86 and so on (the present rate is Rs.44/- from 1 st January,
 263

CHAPTER VI INTERNATIONAL REPLY COUPONS

2000 each, is credited in the Cash Account. The Postal Accounts Office
should adjust the credit under the head, "8446 Postal Deposits - 001-01-
08-0001 International Reply coupons issued”.

6.8 When Coupons are sold to the public by the Postmaster no

credit appears in his accounts, as the amount is treated as part of the cash
balance. The number of Coupons sold every month is however shown in
the Memorandum of Reply Coupons at the foot of the monthly Cash
Account.

6.9 The holder of a Coupon is entitled to exchange it for Indian

Postage of the value of Rs. 3.60/from 1 st February, 1984. The value of
Coupons exchanged in a Post Office is charged in the schedule of
Unclassified Payments. The charge should be supported by the Coupons
themselves as vouchers and should be adjusted in the Postal Accounts
Office under the head “P&T Deposits - International Reply Coupons
exchanged”.

6.10 The Coupons exchanged are forwarded monthly by the

Postal Accounts Offices to the Government Security Section of the
Calcutta Office with a memorandum in Form D.G. (PA)-316 showing their
number and value.

NOTE -- The due date of the monthly submission of the International Reply
Coupons Exchanged is 25 th of the next month.

6.11 The number and value of these Coupons should be entered in

a manuscript Register. The register should be submitted to the J.A.O. in-
charge for review by the 10 th of the second month following the month of
accounts.

6.12 The Coupons, then in packets of 1000 and 100, excluding

broken lots, accompanied by a C-23 (white) statement, filled out in
duplicate are sent to the International Bureau, Berne. One copy of the
statement is returned by the Bureau, duly signed after acknowledging the
receipt.
 264

CHAPTER VI INTERNATIONAL REPLY COUPONS

6.13 Where there is a difference between the number of

Coupons received and that shown in C-23 statement, the International
Bureau will correct the figures. The duly accepted C-23 statement for
coupons exchanged is accounted for by the International Bureau.
Before the General Liquidation Account is prepared and sent a
General Statement of Account is received in Postal Accounts Office,
Calcutta which should be duly examined and difference, if any, should
be reported to the Bureau within one month of the receipt of the
account.

6.14 On receipt of the General Liquidation Account from the

Bureau if the amount is payable by India, the Director General, Postal
Services (C.N, Section) should be advised of the amount and asked to
make arrangements for payment by State Bank of India drafts and if
the amount is payable to India a bank draft for the amount is received
from the Bureau which is credited in the accounts of the Postmaster,
Parliament Street, New Delhi.

In the case of remittances from India the charge should be

debited to the head “8446-Postal Deposits-001-01-08-0001
International Reply Coupons issued" and when the remittances is in
favour of India the credit should be taken to the head “8446-Postal
Deposits-001-01-08-0001 international Reply coupons Reply Coupons
Exchanged”.

6.15 When, however, the difference does not exceed 50 Francs

(l00 Cents - l Franc) the debtor administration is exempted from
payment. The balance in such cases being a loss or gain to India
should be adjusted by debiting the head, “3201-02-101-01-Existing
Post Offices-01-Establishment charges of Existing Post Offices-50-
Other charges” or crediting the head, “1201-Postal receipts-00800-
other Receipts-0222-Other items” per contra credit to the head
“International Reply Coupons exchanged” or debit to the head
 265

CHAPTER VI INTERNATIONAL REPLY COUPONS

“International Reply Coupons issued”.

6.16 As regards the number of Coupons issued and also

exchanged in India, their value at the rate of Rs. 3.60 from 1 st
February, 1984 per coupon is adjusted by the Director of Accounts
(Postal), Calcutta by a transfer entry debiting the head “International
Reply Coupons issued” and crediting the head “International Reply
Coupons exchanged” and at the rate of 70 paise from 1 st January, 1971
and Re. 1 from 1 st January, 1976 per coupon debiting the head
“International Reply Coupons issued” and crediting the head “155-
Postal Receipts-Other Items”.

6.17 Spoilt Reply Coupons received should be destroyed in the

presence of the Accounts Officer in charge of the Government Security
Section and noted in the Stock Register as such. The Postmaster should
either be authorised to write off the value of the Coupons by a charge in
the Schedule of Unclassified Payments or should be supplied with fresh
coupons and equal value to replace the stock. When the amount is written
off, the Circle Postal Accounts Office concerned should be instructed to
debit the amount by deduction from the credit under “International Reply,
Coupons issued”. When a fresh supply is made in lieu of the spoilt
Coupons, no adjustment is necessary.

NOTE -- All such cases should be reported to the Head of the Circle.

6.18 Value of damaged or destroyed reply coupons is noted in

special C-23 statement by the Administration concerned accompanied by
the damaged Coupons and in the latter case by an official certificate of
destruction and sent to the International Bureau for adjustment through
the General Liquidation Account.
 266

CHAPTER VII IRISH POSTAL ORDERS

CHAPTER VII

IRISH POSTAL ORDERS

Check of the Abstract of payment Irish Postal orders

7.1 On receipt of each list of payment, the total should be checked

with the charge appearing in the monthly cash account of the Head
Postmaster. The paid orders should be subjected to check as prescribed far
British Postal Orders paid in paras5.3 and 5.4. The charge should be
classified under "Deposits-Irish Postal orders".

7.2 After proving the total of the lists with the charges booked in the
accounts, the paid orders of all the Circles should be mixed and shorted by
denominations and by the rate of exchange at which they were paid. The
shorted orders should, then be forwarded to the Director of Accounts,
Postal, Nagpur by registered post accompanied by a covering statement in
Form No D.G. (PA)-305 with headings suitably altered, so as to reach him
by the 28th of the month following the month of account.

7.3 The checked Irish Postal Orders should be reviewed by the J. A.

O. in charge to ensure that prescribed checks have been applied correctly
and fully by the Accountants concerned.

7.4 In the Nagpur Postal Accounts Office, the paid orders together
with covering Circle wise schedule duly certified as agreed with booked
figures as received from the other Accounts Offices will be mixed with
those originally received from Post Offices under its own jurisdiction
which have already been subjected to checks as mentioned in Para 7.1
also.

7.5 A consolidated statement of paid Irish Postal Orders showing the

charges appearing in the accounts of the Indian Department of Posts, India
 267

CHAPTER VII IRISH POSTAL ORDERS

should be prepared. This statement and the paid orders will be despatched
to the Director, Foreign Post, Bombay by the 3 rd of the second month
following the month of account with a covering letter intimating the
number of Postal Orders (by denomination) and the amount in sterling due
from Eire or Ireland.

The credit for the amount claimed should be paired and reconciled
with the copy of the month wise consolidated schedules of Irish Postal
Orders paid as forwarded by PA (M) Section to the Foreign Money Order
Section of the Postal Accounts Office, Nagpur before necessary
adjustment of credits received in the M. O. Exchange Accounts of Dublin
(Ireland) is made.

In the PA (Misc.) section of Nagpur Postal Accounts Office where

the work relating to Irish Postal Orders is centralized a broadsheet is
maintained which should be closed on the 28 th of the second month
following the month of accounts and the analysis of the outstanding
balances worked out therein and submitted to the Accounts Officer in
charge, duly reviewed by the J. A. O. concerned.

Unclaimed Irish Postal Orders

7.6 Unclaimed Irish Postal Orders when received in the Nagpur

Postal Accounts Office either from Postmaster or from other Postal
Accounts Offices etc., should be treated as valuables and made over to the
section concerned through the Register of Valuables kept by the cashier.
They should reach the Nagpur Postal Accounts Office in separate
registered covers marked “IMPORTANT” in red ink and when this is not
the case the irregularity should be brought to the notice of the sender.

7.7 In the section of the Nagpur Postal Accounts Office, dealing

with Irish Postal Orders, a manuscript register in the following form
 268

CHAPTER VII IRISH POSTAL ORDERS

should be maintained for the record of all unclaimed orders received. This
register should be submitted to the Accounts Officer in-charge of the
section. Whenever an entry is made therein

The unclaimed orders should then be sent to the Accountant, Posts

and Telegraphs, Money Order Department, General Post Office, Dublin
(Eire) with a forwarding letter.

Register of Unclaimed Irish Postal orders

From Initials of the

Date of Serial No
whom Value Remarks
Receipt of Order Accounts
Received J.A.O.
Officer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
 269

CHAPTER VIII SAVING BANK etc.

CHAPTER VIII
SAVING BANK ETC

General

8.1 The management of the Post Office Savings Bank has been
entrusted to the Indian Post Office which acts as an agent of the
Government of India receiving deposits and paying withdrawals etc. on its
behalf. The rules under which accounts are opened, deposits received and
withdrawals paid and transfer from one post office to another are made,
are issued under the authority of the Government of India and will be
found in the Post Office Guide, Section VI--Rules for the guidance of
Depositors in Post Office Savings Bank. Subsidiary Rules of procedure to
be followed by Post Offices and the Postal Accounts Offices are issued by
the Director General Postal Services and will be found in Chapter 8 of the
Posts and Telegraphs Manual, Vol. VI, Part II.

8.2 Under the rules for the guidance of depositors in Post Office
Savings Bank, Savings Bank transactions are permissible at all Head Post
Offices and with certain exceptions at all Sub and Branch Post Offices,
subordinate to them. The accounts of the latter are incorporated in the
accounts of the Head Post Offices which are responsible for submitting
consolidated accounts, not only of its own transactions but also of these
offices subordinate to it. The discrepancy, detected by the Postal Accounts
Offices in the returns submitted to it, is to be communicated to the Head
Post Office and the same is responsible for seeing that prompt action is
taken to remedy the defects discovered and to meet the objections raised.

8.3 With the elimination of duplicate ledger cards and setting up or

Control organization in the Head Post Offices, the Savings Bank
 270

CHAPTER VIII SAVING BANK etc.

procedure has undergone considerable change The Control Organisation is

now responsible for the proper maintenance of the Savings Bank accounts
of the Head Office and the procedure to be followed by this Organisation
is detailed in the “Manual of S. B. Control, Pairing and Internal Check
Organisation”.

8.4 The Director /Dy. Director of Accounts will prescribe the

duties of the members of the Savings Bank Section in his 'Own office.
These duties duly signed by the J.A.O. in-charge of the Savings Bank
Section will be prominently displayed in the section.

Progress of Work

8.5 A register will be maintained in form D.G. (PA)-340 in

which the dates on which each item of work was taken up and finished,
will be entered. The initials of the official who attends the various
operations of the work will also be taken in this register and the register
will be submitted to the Account Officer every Monday.

8.6 A copy of the Savings Bank Statistical Register, maintained

by the Control Organisation of each Head Post Office will be received by
the 10th of the following month, with following certificate of the
Accountant in charge of the Control Organisation.

“Checked and agreed with the Cash Account and Register S.B.
62(a)”.

8.7 A Control Account in form D.G. (PA)-358A, B and C and each

Postal Circle will be maintained in the Postal Accounts Office, in order to
arrive at the P.O. / Circle wise liability of the government in respect of
Savings Bank deposits. It is posted from the monthly statistical
statements, received from the Control Organisation of each Head Post
Office vide para 8.6 above.
 271

CHAPTER VIII SAVING BANK etc.

8.8 The figures in the Control Account are agreed [form D.G.
(PA)-359A] with the Detail Book which is posted from the classified
abstracts, prepared from the P. O. cash accounts of entire Postal Circle.

8.9 Besides the P. O. Savings Bank etc. balances as per the

Control Account are reconciled with these as per SBCO Statistical
statements and the Interest Statements and differences if any, settled in
communication with the Control Organisation of the concerned Head Post
Office.

Statistical Returns

8.10 The following statements will be prepared and sent 10 the

Postal Directorate (PA Wing) on the dates mentioned in each item.

(1) Statements, showing the actual number of transactions separately

under deposits, withdrawals and transfers to the end of September,
November, January, February and March each year, so as to reach the P.
A. Wing of the Postal Directorate .by the 25 th of the month following the
month of Account The number of Accounts treated as silent at the end of
the previous year should also be shown separately in these statements.

(2) Annual statements of Savings Bank Accounts Transfers (Inland)

up-to March Supplementary are to be sent not later than 10th August.

(3) Annual consolidated statements of Savings Bank transactions up-to

March Supplementary are to be sent not later than 16th August in form
D.G. (PA)-361.

(4) Statements, showing category wise Savings bank balances up-to

March Supplementary for each Postal Circle separately are to be sent not
later than 10 th August.

(5) Statistical statement regarding total interest on S. B. deposits

 272

CHAPTER VIII SAVING BANK etc.

relating to previous year, adjusted in current year, after closure of March

Supplementary Accounts must be sent not later than 31st July.

(6) Review of balances statements under S. B. Deposits must

also be sent not later than 31st August each year.

(7) Statement, showing the number of S. B. transactions, under

deposits, withdrawals and transfer for the year for the purpose of Cost
calculation must be communicated by 15 th June each year.

8.11 The Book Section of the Postal Directorate will compile the
figures from the statements referred to in item (1) of para 8.10 ibid and
send them to the D.G. P.S. (STT. Section) by the 2 nd of October,
December and February each year.

8.12 The Book Section (PA Wing of the Directorate) will also
furnish the D. G. P. S. (Savings Bank Section) with a statement showing
the total amount booked under “Deposits and withdrawals” by the 1 st week
of the second month following the month of accounts.

8.13 An. annual statement, showing S. B. transactions of the year

just closed as compared with those of the previous year will also be
compiled by Book Section Of the PA Wing of the Directorate from the
statements referred to in Para 8.10(3) ibid and forwarded to the D. G. P. S.
(S. B. Section) On 20 th September each year.

8.14 The Book Section will compile the figures from the
statement, referred to in para 8.10 (4) above and furnish the total number
of accounts and amounts to the Director General Postal Services (STT
Section) on 20 th September each year.

8.15 The National Savings Commissioner. Nagpur will be

supplied every month with the figures of deposits and withdrawals
 273

CHAPTER VIII SAVING BANK etc.

(excluding interest on closures of Accounts) in respect of Savings Bank.

Watching payments of S.B. incentive prizes

8.16 As per D.G. P.&T. circular No. 49-5/72-SB, dated 16 th

October 1973, the Government of India introduced a prize winning scheme
for S. B. depositors who maintain a minimum balance of Rs. 200 in their
accounts for a specified period in a year. After each draw of prizes, the
prize winning Account numbers are declared by Government. The lists of
such prizes are to be noted in a manuscript register and payments of prizes
are noted against each such number to watch that prizes are not paid in
excess of the amount, declared far each winning number .and/or more than
once in respect of the same draw.

Certification of S.B. Balances

8.17 After the introduction of the S. B. reform scheme, the

balances of the individual Ledger accounts as on the dates of introduction,
as per the duplicate ledger cards (Previously maintained in Audit will be
reconciled as per P. O. ledger and certified lists of reconciled balances
will be sent to concerned Post Offices. This is the residual work of
certification of balances.
 274

CHAPTER IX CUSTOMS DUTY

CHAPTER IX
CUSTOMS DUTY

9.1 The rules for the assessment ·and realisation of customs duty
all Postal Parcels and letters (both inward and outward) will be found in
Chapter 1 of the Posts and Telegraphs Manual Volume VI, (Part 1).

Inward Foreign Mail Articles

9.2 Letters mail articles and postal parcels are received for
delivery in India from foreign countries with which arrangements exist for
their exchange. These articles and parcels are called inward foreign mail
articles and inward foreign parcels. They are received only through certain
offices called the Offices of Exchange, which are located at Bombay,
Calcutta, Delhi, Madras with sub-exchange at Jaipur, Ahmedabad, Cochin
and Bangalore.

9.3 As the inward foreign parcels and articles of letters mail may
contain dutiable articles, their contents are examined by the Customs
Department before they are transmitted by the Offices of Exchange to
their destination. In the matter of the clearance of articles through the
Customs and realisation of the amount of Customs duty from the
addressees, the Indian Post Office acts as an agent of the Customs
Department and receives as fee for its services a commission of 5%
calculated on the total customs duty realised through Post Offices. The
department also gets commission at the rate of 5% on tile net sale
proceeds of abandoned inward foreign parcels' returned by the Offices of
Exchange to Customs Department.

The rules governing the procedure relating to the assessment of

 275

CHAPTER IX CUSTOMS DUTY

articles to Customs Duty are contained in the Foreign Post Manuals.

9.4 ---DELETED

9.5 ---DELETED

9.6 The following accounts of Customs Duty transactions are

rendered to the Postal Accounts Office: All PAOs

Whether
By whom submitted
Description of return Date of submission
rendered weekly or
monthly
1 2 3 4
By the end of the
Office of corresponding week of the
(a) Parcel Bill Weekly
Exchange month following that to
which the bills relate

(b) Letter Mail Register Do. Do. Do.

(c) Custom Bills (with

25th of the month following
statement of adjustment Do. Monthly
that to which the bills relate
and write back lists)

(d) Schedules of Customs 10th of the month following

Duty with Parcel Receipts Head Office Do. that to which the schedule
and Assessment Memos relate

9.7 Deleted

9.8 Deleted

9.9 Deleted

9.10 Deleted

9.11 Deleted

9.12 Deleted

9.13 Deleted
 276

CHAPTER IX CUSTOMS DUTY

Checking of Schedules of Customs Duty

9.14 Each Head Post Office will submit to their Postal Accounts
Office direct a schedule in Form No. ACG-90 called “Schedule of
Customs Duty and other charges realised in cash on inward foreign parcels
and articles of letter mail”. All the schedules are due to be received on or
before the 10 th of every month. Even when there are no recoveries of
Customs Duty, etc. in a month ‘nil’ schedules will be received. The
schedules when received will be transferred by the Record Section to the
Customs Duty section through a transit register under receipt. In case the
schedules are not received in time the Checker “Schedule Check Group”
should issue telegraphic calls for the same.

9.15 to 9.71 Deleted

Broadsheet of Balances

9.72 A broadsheet of the debit and credits booked under the head,
“0037 Postal Advances-Excess debit or short recovery on account of
Custom Duty realisation” and “Postal Deposits-Short debit or excess
recovery on account of Custom Duty realisation” should be maintained in
Form No.s ATC-80 and ATC-64 respectively

303

The amounts of credits and debits on account of “P&T Advances”

and “P&T Deposits” shown in the Objection Book should be reconciled
with the amounts appearing in the Detail Book, brief explanation of the
difference being given in the broadsheets. The balance under these two
heads are also worked out month by month in the broadsheets “P&T
Advances” and “P&T Deposits” which are submitted to the Group ‘A’ or
‘B’ Officer for review on the 25 th of every month. A register in Form SY-
285 showing the half yearly analysis of the balances outstanding in the
 277

CHAPTER IX CUSTOMS DUTY

broadsheet under the head “P&T Advances-Excess debit or short recovery

on account of Customs Duty realisation” should be maintained and
submitted to Group ‘A’ or ‘B’ officer for review.

9.73 Deleted

304

Consolidation of Transfer entries made in the Customs Duty Section

9.74 All adjustments in the Customs Duty Section should be

recorded initially in a register in Form D.G. (PA)-574 with full particulars
initialled by the checker and passed by the J.A.O. Every month the
transfer entries recorded in this register should be consolidated and copied
in the Adjustment Book (form No CPWA-54) which should be closed on
the 15 th of each month by totalling the entries on both the debit and credit
sides. Below the closing totals of the month, all items of adjustment
should be abstracted under the respective heads of account and the
abstract totalled. After the agreement of the totals of the debits and credits
with the monthly totals already arrived at, a copy of the abstract should be
made out in Form No. D.G. (PA)-519 duly signed by the J.A.O. and sent
to Book Section on the 16th of each month.

9.75 Deleted

9.76 Deleted

9.77 Deleted

9.78 Deleted

9.79 Deleted

9.80 Deleted

9.81 Deleted
 278

CHAPTER IX CUSTOMS DUTY

9.82 Deleted

9.83 Deleted

307

9.84 An extract from the ledger should also be prepared and

forwarded to the Director General, Postal Services (Postal Accounts wing)
on the 7 th of the sixth month following the month of assessment.

9.85 to 9.87 Deleted

Parcel Receipts and Assessment Memos sent out

9.88 to 9.90 Deleted

Progress and Review Reports

9.91 to 9.94 Deleted

OUTWARD PARCEL (Duty Prepaid)

9.95 to 9.106

Custom Duty on Postal Parcels etc

9.107 Deleted

9.108 On receipt of the customs duty recovery schedules in the

Circle Postal Accounts Office, the Junior Accountant of the PA Section
will examine the schedule to see that the schedule figures agree with the
Cash Account figures and that all supporting RP-14 receipts have been
received along with the schedules. A note to this effect will be recorded in
the schedule under J.A.O.s initials. During compilation of the Classified
Abstract, while the Customs Duty should be classified under “0037-
Customs Duty”, the postage and other charges realised shown in Form
ACG-90 and distinctly shown separately in the Cash Account will be
accounted for under “1201-Postal Receipts (101) Sale of Postage Stamps
 279

CHAPTER IX CUSTOMS DUTY

(1) Postage realised in Cash”.

9.109 On receipts of the Customs Duty Schedules, the Junior

Accountant of the Customs Duty Section/Cell should compile the
schedules in a broadsheet Head Post Office wise working out the totals at
the close of the month show full particulars of the schedule figures and the
Detail Book Figures. The broadsheet should be submitted to the Accounts
Officer by the 20 th of the month following the month of Account.

9.110 Book Section of the Head Quarters Postal Accounts Wing of

the Directorate will furnish the monthly statement of the Circle wise
credits accounted for in the General Abstract under “0037-Customs Duty
Receipts” to the Chief Controller of Accounts; CB/EC, New Delhi by the
5 th of the second month following the month of account.

9.111 (Since the Department of Posts will only be finally

accounting for the credits of Customs Duty actually realised in its books,
the question of obtaining any write back from the Customs Department in
respect of undelivered parcels would not arise) under the new procedure.
Action in this regard should be taken as per detailed instructions being
issued by CF Section of the Directorate.
 280

CHAPTER X ARMY POSTAL SERVICE ACCOUNTS

CHAPTER X
ARMY POSTAL SERVICE ACCOUNTS

10.1 The Director, Army Postal Services (DAPS) is the head of

the Service in the field whatever the actual title and the DPS exercises the
power of a Postmaster General. He is attached to the Headquarters of a
force in the field as the advisor to the military authorities on all Postal
matters and the orders of the Force Commander are conveyed to him
through the ‘Q’ staff. He also has the charge of the whole of the postal
arrangements in the field. He will usually be at the Defence Headquarters
of the army but will often be on the move visiting the ADPS/DAD PS at
the Headquarters of the armies and the base and field Post Office.

10.2 The APS Accounts Section functions as Pay Accounts

Offices of the APS Personnel and is responsible for:-

(i) Maintenance of IRL Accounts of the APS Personnel.

(ii) Scrutiny of TA (including Conveyance and road al1owance)

claims of the APS Personnel.

(iii) Scrutiny of Cash Accounts rendered by the Base POs.

(iv) Adjustment of ATs Received through the concerned Postal

Accounts Offices on accounts of payments made to the Army
Personnel and their nominees (FA Payments) by the Civil P&T
disbursing officers.

(v) Receipt and disposal of Inward Schedules and preparation of

outward schedules relating to adjustment of accounts.

Leave

10.3 The JCOs of APS Commissioned Officers will be granted

 281

CHAPTER X ARMY POSTAL SERVICE ACCOUNTS

casual and annual leave as allowed to the Commissioned officer of the

Army. No furlough is admissible, sick leave, will be limited to that
admissible to Emergency Commissioned Officers. No leave contribution is
payable to the Department of Posts nor will service rendered by them
which in the Military employ be viewed as qualifying service for earning
leave under civil ru1es.

Family Allotment

10.4 Ledger group will arrange for the payments of family

allotments to the, nominees of APS Personnel in any part of India through
the agency of the Post Offices Central Base P.O. (to the nominee residing
in Delhi and New Delhi). For this purpose the ledger clerk will prepare
and arrange to issue to the Head Postmasters standing orders for payments
to be made at the H.P.O. itself or at any of its sub or branch offices. In
cases of issue of family allotment orders to the HPOs which are under the
jurisdiction of other Account Offices the payment order will be forwarded
to them through their Postal Accounts Officer who will countersign the
order and forward the same to the Head Postmaster concerned.

The Postal officials on deputation to APS shall be permitted to make

at the beginning of every month the family allotments to their families or
their dependants up-to the full amounts of their net entitlement of pay and
allowances less usual deductions as is admissible in the case of
J.C.O.s/O.R./N.C.s(E) under para 7 of Army Order 372/70.

Entry regarding the deduction of family allotment (………..Amount

and month from which it is to be commenced) will be made in IRLA of the
individual concerned and the case be submitted to the Accounts Officer
through the J.A.O. The checking J.A.O. will attest all particulars in the
IRLA, the first entry of debit in the months concerned therein and in the
 282

CHAPTER X ARMY POSTAL SERVICE ACCOUNTS

FA payment register.

Recovery of PLI Premium through IRLA

10.4-A The debit entry in respect of payment of first insurance

premium by recovery through IRLA is attested by the dated initials of the
Junior Accounts Officer and this date is intimated immediately to the
Postal Authorities for issue of Policy to the Insurant.

Advances for the Purchase of Bicycles

10.5 APS Personnel are entitled to bicycle advance under the

provisions of AT-94/60. The payment on account of grant of cycle
advance will however be met from the funds placed at the disposal of the
Director of Accounts (Postal) Nagpur, even though the APS personnel are
paid from DS Estimates. The receipts on account of recoveries of cycle
advances will be booked under the head “Loans and advances-Cycle
advances”. In case any such recoveries are due' as shown in LPCs at the
time of transfer of the individuals, the credits are transferred as
remittances-respective Postal Accounts Offices. No debit should be
accepted his account.

10.6 The monthly summary for the block of IRLA will be

prepared by the ledger clerk concerned. The total will be cast and agreed
with those of the last month's closing balance and the difference between
the total credits and total debits thus arrived at, is equal to the difference
between the dosing credits balance and the closing Debit balance. The
summary thus prepared will be furnished to the Accounts group for
preparation of monthly abstract of all the IRLAs maintained in the
Section.

10.7 When particulars of the entire non-effective ledger accounts

the balances of which are due to be credited to, Government are entered in
 283

CHAPTER X ARMY POSTAL SERVICE ACCOUNTS

the Register, the total amount should be worked out and necessary
adjustment effected by affording credit to the head of Account “Adjusting
Account with the CD Accounts (ORS) Madras” by per contra debit to the
head (un-disbursed Pay of Officers and men). The IRLA in question will
be closed to nil balance and the month of account of adjustment indicated
clearly therein. This credit schedule will be supported by the Nominal Roll
showing the (i) Regiment number, (ii) Rank and name, (iii) Amount of
credit balance and (iv) Date of becoming non-effective. This nominal roll
will be prepared separately and will not be combined with that relating to
deserters.

10.8 Half yearly statement of accounts are prepared and

completed for the period ending February and August each year. The
statement of accounts will be issued respectively not later than the end of
May and November each year. A completion report together with a
statement of the exact amount which will be payable to the staff as
honorarium on this account, if any, with full particulars thereof will also
be furnished to the Postmaster General, Maharashtra Circle, Bombay every
time for according approval for payment as soon as the work is completed
and the statements are despatched. Where an account is, closed with a
debit balance a note will be added in the statement of account, requesting
the O.C. unit to restrict further advances.

Final Settlement of Accounts

10.9 APS Personnel are released /discharged from APS on

completion of terms of engagements/release for other civil employment
etc. On receipt of the Posting Orders, communicating the discharge/release
of an official, the ledger clerk will ensure that the F.A. to his nominee is
called back and cancelled.
 284

CHAPTER X ARMY POSTAL SERVICE ACCOUNTS

On receipt of the documents from the APS Record Office, the

account of the individuals is finalised within 4 working days following the
day of the receipt of the documents. It is also ensured that all the events,
noted in the Sheet Roll and Service casualty form have been recorded in
the IRLA Account and the action taken to regulate the period and the pay
and allowances accordingly.

10.10 The closing balance, of the last six monthly verification

should be taken as opening balance and the credits/debits of the
subsequent periods to the date of release, arrived at independently and
entries in the IRL Accounts are also brought up-to date and the closing
balance on both the IRL Accounts and Part B.O. form IAFF 1108A agreed.
The LPC should then be prepared in the prescribed form, after ensuring
that no demands due from the discharged officials remained unadjusted,
while settling his final accounts. The signature of the individual concerned
will be obtained on Service Roll in the presence of the Accounts Officer.
Two copies of the pay account will be prepared one for the official which
will be handed over to him and second for the APS Record Officer.

Final Settlement of Accounts in the Absence of Pay Books

10.11 If current pay books have been lost or mislaid the IRL
Accounts will be kept open for 3 months for check receipt and adjustment
of Acquittance Rolls for payments and a portion of the credit balance will
be provisionally withheld based on the last payment, debited in the IRLA
and balance, if any, will be authorised and paid.

Verification of Field Service in APS

10.12 The service book/roll with leave account will be received

from the APS Record Office, duly completed in all respects and the ledger
clerk will verify the entries made therein before a certificate of
 285

CHAPTER X ARMY POSTAL SERVICE ACCOUNTS

verifications of field service in APS with IRLA is endorsed on the S.

Book/Roll and submitted to the Accounts Officer in-charge.

Numerical Index

10.13 Each ledger clerk will maintain an up to date list (numerical

index) showing the names of individuals whose accounts (effective as well
as non-effective) are maintained by them. It will contain the following
columns.

(1) Serial No.

(2) Army No.

(3) Rank.

(4) Name.

(5) Date of enrolment.

(6) Effective service from

(7) Date of release/discharge.

(8) Pay Accounts settled up to.

(9) L. P. C. issued to.

This index will be kept up to date and any change made therein will
also be made in the General Numerical index, maintained by the Misc.
Accountant for the APS Personnel as a whole.

Contingent Group

10.14 This group is a part of the ledger group but separated for
facility of easing the bulk of work pertaining to check of contingent bills.
Claims (both unit and personnel) which are claims on contingent bills are
scrutinised hi the contingent bill clerk and submitted to the J.A.O. for
 286

CHAPTER X ARMY POSTAL SERVICE ACCOUNTS

check, while scrutinising such claims it will be seen that (1) claims are
prepared in prescribed forms (2) authority for the bill is cited (3) the
requisite certificates are endorsed (4) full particulars are given therein (5)
the admissibility of claims is cheeked (6) and is duly countersigned by the
competent authority.

Accounts Group

10.15 All items of work, not directly connected with the

maintenance of IRL accounts are attended to in Account Groups so that
this work can be done with promptitude and accuracy without disturbance
to the work of maintenance of IRL Accounts. The following items of work
are done in this section (i) checking and compilation of accounts of Base
Post Offices; (ii) preparation of Classified Abstract; (iii) checking of Cash
Accounts; (iv) maintenance of objection books; (v) checking and
agreement of acquittance payments etc. The work relating to accounting
reconciliation and agreement of FA payments as per summary with the
debits actually raised against the CDA (OR) by compilation of
consolidated summary from the individual summaries prepared by the
ledger clerk is also attended to here.

Broadsheet Un-drawn Pay

10.16 The difference between the total credits and total debits in
each block of IRL Accounts is taken to the head “Deposits-undrawn pay of
officers and men”. In the subsidiary Register, (Broadsheet) the net
increase/ decrease in respect of each block of ledger accounts is entered
against at the respective blocks and resultant closing balance worked out
which is agreed with the total of balances, lying in all the ledger accounts
a arrived at the consolidation of all the summaries.
 287

CHAPTER X ARMY POSTAL SERVICE ACCOUNTS

Checking of Acquittance Roll Payments

10.17 The acquittance roll portioner will receive advance

acquittance rolls (Original Copies) from the Central Base Post Offices,
duly verified and with duplicate copies and the acquittance rolls in support
of debits received through adjusting account. Before these are passed on to
the IRLA portion holder the same are checked to see that the payments of
acquittance rolls have been attested by the paying officer, individual have
signed or affix their thumb impressions, in cases of payments made on the
authority of APS Section, the particulars of such authority are verified,
payment of festival advances etc., are made on separate acquittance rolls.
On completion of such checking the portioner will prepare convenient
batches of 20 acquittances rolls or less entries in the Register of
Reconciliation and check of posting by supervisory staff is made and then
the, same is made over to the IRLA portioner for debiting the amount in
the IRL Accounts. The IRL Accounts portioner will prepare a summary for
each month for the block of IRL Accounts with him and a consolidated
summary will also be prepared therefrom. The total amount of acquittance
rolls payments appearing in the consolidated summary will be agreed with
the total figure, as arrived at in the manuscript register to ensure that all
payments made to APS personnel have been debited in the IRL Accounts.

The second stage of reconciliation is through a Broadsheet

maintained by the Acquittance Roll portioner. He will obtain the Cash
Account figure and compare it with the summary figure of the month; the
differences due to reasons detailed below will be explained clearly at the
foot Of the Broadsheet.

(a) Payments made by APS Centre and Record Office, Kamptee.

(b) Payments made by units of other Arms of Services for which

 288

CHAPTER X ARMY POSTAL SERVICE ACCOUNTS

debits are received from respective CDAS.

(c) Acquittance Roll payments made on the closing days of the

month included in next months’ Cash Account.

Following payments will not be included in monthly Broadsheet

summary:-

(i) Payments made by BPOs and FPOs to Personnel belonging to

other arms of service.

(ii) Payments made but acquittance rolls not received and therefore
not debited in the IRL Accounts.

10.18 Register of Reconciliation will be submitted to the J.A.O. by

the 15 th of the 2 nd month, following the month of Accounts and also for
taking necessary action for carrying out percentage check by supervisory
staff and thereafter submitted to the Director through the A.O. on the last
day of the month, along with the Review Register.

10.19 “GPF-Schedule for Group D and other than Group D for

each block of the IRLAs allotted to ledger Accountants will be prepared
duly agreed with figures incorporated in monthly summary of IRLAs and
submitted to GPF Group of APS section for consolidation and agreement
with Detail Book figures and for onward, transmission on or before 12 th of
the month following the month of account to GPF Section for further
accounting in the Provident Fund Ledger of Group D and Other than
Group D Accounts.”.

Broadsheet of Reconciliation of F.A. Payments

10.20 F.A. checker will maintain a Broadsheet for reconciliation of

payments as per IRL Accounts with those adjusted by debit to C.D.
Accounts (ORS) on receipt of ATDS from different Postal Account
 289

CHAPTER X ARMY POSTAL SERVICE ACCOUNTS

Offices. For this purpose the total amount of recovery on account of FA

payments in a particular month will be abstracted in the Broadsheet for
reconciliation with the consolidation of the summary.

10.21 The difference, if any, will be on account of non-receipt of

debits from certain Postal Accounts Offices. The J.A.O. of FA Section
will then scrutinise the FA Check Register to ascertain the wanting
vouchers / Schedules / ATS etc. and keep a note of all such wanting
documents in a Progress report, maintained for this purpose and issue
telegraphic reminders to the disbursing offices of the Accounts Offices
concerned for raising debits in case of paid vouchers already received. The
broadsheet will be submitted to the Accounts Officer in-charge through
the J.A.O. on the last day of the month.

10.22 The Broadsheet of reconciliation of FA Payments will

indicate the following: -

(a) FA Payments for the month as per consolidation of summary.

(b) Accounts adjusted.

(i) Cash Accounts figures.

(ii) T. E. Adjustments.

(c) Unadjusted amounts (a-b).

(d) Month wise adjustments, indicating particulars of TE till the

balance is reduced to nil.

Progress Report

10.23 F.A. Accountant will fill up progress report of receipt of

vouchers and schedules by the 20 th of the 2 nd month following the month
of accounts, indicating -
 290

CHAPTER X ARMY POSTAL SERVICE ACCOUNTS

(i) Postal Circle.

(ii) Month of payment.

(iii) Wanting documents.

(iv) Date of reference

(v) Date of receipt

(vi) Particulars of account adjustments i.e. number and date of AT

& month of adjustment, and

(vii) Initials of the Accountant and JAO. This progress report will be
submitted to the Accounts Officer in-charge along with the
Broadsheet for reconciliation for his review on the last day of
the month.

Compilation of consolidate

10.24 On receipt of monthly summaries for the block of IRL

Account maintained by ledger clerk a consolidate of all the summaries
will be taken up immediately on the 24 th of the month, i.e. next day after
the monthly summary are due to be submitted. It should be ensured that
the gross total of balance (credits and debits) is agreed with the closing
balance of the previous months. Difference, if any, will be reconciled and
agreement effected as follows: -

(i) Difference of total credits and total debits will be agreed with
the difference of closing balance credits and dosing balance
debits.

(ii) The difference of total credits less O.S. credits and total debits
less OB debits will be agreed with the difference between the
total closing balance-undrawn. ¥3Y (credits/debits).
 291

CHAPTER X ARMY POSTAL SERVICE ACCOUNTS

Undrawn Pay of Officers and Men

10.25 Under the war system of accounting, pay and allowances are
not paid monthly as they are earned but advances only are paid as required
and the balance of pay and allowance, remaining undrawn is allowed to
accumulate in the individual accounts. Consequently expenditure on
account of pay and allowances is not incurred in full until the final
settlement of individual accounts is effected and payment is actually made
in respect of the accumulated credits. To have full picture of the financial
liability of the Govt. the amount is debited to the DSE of the particular
month by per contra credit to the Deposits Undrawn pay of officers and
Men and its clearance is watched through a Broadsheet.

Accounting work in the APS Accounts Section

10.26 The Director of Accounts (Postal) Nagpur (APS Accounts

Section) compiles the accounts of Army Postal Services personnel since
1 st December 1947. A detailed procedure manual is in use in the APS
Accounts Section. The broad outlines of accounting procedure are as
fallows:-

10.27 The APS Accounts Section receives the Cash Accounts

rendered by BPOs and FPOs working in fields of operation as well as
peace areas and compiles the accounts for incorporation in the classified
abstracts of the Department of Pasts. The main unit farmed by the APS is
“Base Post Office”, which works like a Head Post Office. It renders
periodical accounts for itself and Field Post Offices which are more or less
sub-offices under its jurisdiction.

10.28 The revenue earned in the various Postal transaction e.g. sale
of stamps, MO. Commission, IPO Commission etc. by EPOs and FPOs is
credited to the Department of Posts. Similarly all other transactions are
 292

CHAPTER X ARMY POSTAL SERVICE ACCOUNTS

incorporated in the general accounts of the Department of Posts under the

respective heads of account. The disbursement and cash remittance to
Military or F. P. Functions as a disbursing officer for APS Personnel as
also for other Military Personnel as MT Drivers, I. G. S. Personnel etc.
They draw and remit surplus cash to Military Imprest Holders or field
cashiers. All these transactions find place in the accounts of the Base Post
Offices.

Cash Remittances

10.29 The surplus cash accumulated at the FPO or BPO is remitted

to the nearest Military Imprest Holders or field cashiers. Similarly cash
required is drawn from them and these transactions are provisionally
booked under “858-Suspense Accounts-2 Suspense Accounts, (Posts &
Telegraphs)-5 (17) Field Treasury Chest”. The clearance of these items
under ‘Suspense’ is effected by adjusting receipt of the credit schedules
from the respective CDAs etc. As some of the AP Units have to work
along with Army units in the overseas, the Cash transactions in various
currencies are converted into Indian currency and consequential gain or
loss is classified to “155 Postal-Receipts-Gain due to Exchange or loss
due to Exchange.”

Family Allotment Payments

10.30 Payments of family allotments are made through civil P.O.s

but for the convenience of the families of certain officials staying in Delhi
or New Delhi, family allotment payments are allowed through Central
BPO, New Delhi. The charges are included in the schedule of unclassified
payments together with the supporting vouchers and classified in the
compilation of accounts as charge debatable to Defence Department i.e.
“CDA (ORs.)-Adjusting Account.”
 293

CHAPTER X ARMY POSTAL SERVICE ACCOUNTS

The financial powers of the officers of the APS are as noted below:-

Financial powers of the head of Postal Head of Army Postal Circles and power to
sanction expr. Up to Services.

RS.200

Financial powers to SPOs and first class (i) ADAPS ,

Postmasters and sanction expr. Up to Rs. 20. (ii) CAD APS

(iii) O/C BPOs.

10.31 As regards the sanction for the write off of losses of cash
and stamps in the field, each case of loss is required to be referred to the
D.G.P.S. for a decision as to whether the loss should be borne by the
Department of Posts or Defence Department.

Payment of Advances

10.32 Officer Commanding BPO and FPMs of F.P.Os pay advances

to P&T personnel as well as other army personnel attached to them and the
payments are charged in the accounts under “Bills paid”. Except in case of
urgency all such orders sanctioning a payment are sent through or referred
to APS/ Account Section before being acted upon.

Remittance of Cash To/from Civil POs

10.33 The BPO and FP'O are also authorised under the orders of
the competent authorities to draw or remit cash to the nearest Post Office.
These transactions are classified as “P&T remittances To and from APT
PAO” according to the respective Postal Account Office jurisdiction.

10.34 Remittances to field cashiers/Imprest holders are exhibited

under the head “Remittances to Treasury”. The schedules for such
transactions are prepared in triplicate and two copies together with the
supporting field Treasurer chest receipts are submitted along with the
 294

CHAPTER X ARMY POSTAL SERVICE ACCOUNTS

monthly account returns.

Postage Stamps and Postal Stationery

10.35 A stock of Indian Postage Stamps/Postal Stationery Revenue

Stamps is kept by BPOs and FPOs. The FPOs replenish their stock by
indent on the BPO and the BPOs replenish their stock from the nearest
civil PO and the value of stamps thus obtained is shown as “Remittance
received from other HO” in the accounts.

Enrollment in APS War Time Engagements

10.36 During World War II non-gazetted P&T Personnel were

enrolled in APS in the ranks of JCOs, ORS and some outsiders were also
recruited in the APS directly and were governed by the Military Rules for
all purposes. Those who were retained in the APS after the termination of
World War II are called “deferred volunteers” and are governed by the
terms and conditions under which they were enrolled during war time
engagement. Non-gazetted P&T Personnel while in Military employ draw
their pay and allowances from time to time plus increases (field
allowances) as follows : -

(i) In India elsewhere than infield service Areas-10% of civil pay

as deputation allowances and for issue of ration.

(ii) Ex-India and in field service Areas-50%. These increases are

classified as Compensatory Allowances.
 Appendix A

NOTE - This Appendix contains a list of periodical returns to be rendered by the Branch Postal Accounts Offices which has been
prescribed in this annual or under Special orders. The omission from this Appendix of any returns the submission of which has been
prescribed to this Manual or under special orders should not be interpreted to mean that such returns are to be discontinued.

Periodical Returns to be rendered by the Postal Accounts Officers

Sl. No. Reference to

Description of Returns To whom sent Due date of submission Remarks
para

1 2 3 4 5 6

Fortnightly I- Postal Account Section

Register of recoveries & Refund

295

Twice in a month after the

appearing in Cash adjustment of Money 3·116 Money Order Section receipt of the accounts for each
Order discrepancies. period

Monthly

Statement showing Discharge of War Director of Accounts

1 14th of the following month
Bonds, Loan, etc. and discharge of Govt. 1.16 (postal) Calcutta
Securities
Statement showing anticipatory interests
paid on Bonds, and proceeds of Director of Accounts 25th of the following month
2 Government Securities sold on behalf of 1.34
(postal) Calcutta
claimants to deceased depositors

Memorandum of payments on a/c of Trust Director of Accounts 27th of the following month
3 1.16
Interest Account (postal) Calcutta
 Appendix A- Contd.

1 2 3 4 5 6

II - Govemment Security Section

Statement of total sale of Government Securities in form Branch Postal Accounts 3rd day of the second
1 1.44
DG(PA)-238 Offices month following

Statement of total interest on Government Securities Do Do

2 Do

Statement of approximate figures of sales of Government D.G.P.S. (PA Wing) 16th of the following
3 Securities including interest thereon 1.50 month

Statement of total debits on Government Securities Controller General of First week of the second
296

4 1.52
Accounts month of following

Account Current of British Postal Orders U.K. Postal Authority 12th of the second month
5 5.17 following

Abstract of Transfer entries of Government Security Section Concerned Branch Postal 18th of the following
6 1.51 Accounts Office month

Half Yearly

Interest Payment Orders on the following description of 1· 24 & Postmaster concerned

1
Government Securities 1· 25
5 ½% Compensation Bond 1999 18th January
…. ….
18th July
 Appendix A- Contd.

1 2 3 4 5 6

4 ½ % Loan 1985 .. .. 11th January 11th July

5 % Loan 1982 .. .. 14th January 14th July

4 % Loan 1980 .. .. 17th January 17th July

5 ½ Loan 1991 .. .. Do.

4% Loan .. .. 23rd January 23rd July

3% Conversion Loan 1946 .. .. 15th March 15th September

297

2 ¾ % Loan 1976 .. .. Do.

4 ¾ % Loan 1989 .. .. 14th April 14th October

5 ½ % Loan 2000 .. .. 10th April 10th October

5 ½ % Loan 1999 .. .. 29th April 29th October

4 ½ %Loan 1986 .. .. 7th May 7th November

 Appendix A- Contd.

1 2 3 4 5 6
th th
5 ½ % Loan 1995 10 May 10 November

3 % Loa n 1996-97 29th June 29th December

4% Loan 1979 30th June 31st December

5 ½ % Loan 1990 Do.

5 ¾ % Loan 2003 11th May 11th November

298

5 ¾ % Loan 2002 14th January 14th July

5½ % Madhya Pradesh State 22nd February 22nd August

Development Loan 1977
4 ¾ % West Bengal Loan 1976 23rd February 23rd August

4 ¾ % Kerala S.D. Loan 1976 24th February 24th August

5 ½ % Maharashtra S.D. Loan 22nd February 22nd August

1977
5 ¾ % W. B. Loan 1979 28th February 31st August
 Appendix A- Contd.

1 2 3 4 5 6
Annual

1 Annual statement transactions of Government 1.49 D.G.P.S. (PA Wing) 20th September
Securities on behalf of S.B. Depositors

2 Statement showing particulars of Government 1.53 Publisher Gazette of India old 5th February
Securities held by the Director General Postal Press Building, Civil Lines,
Services on behalf of departmental employees Delhi
and contractors for Publication in the Gazette of
I di
3 Statement of British Postal orders paid in India 5.20 Director General Postal
Services
4 Statement of International Reply Coupons 6.12 International Bureau, Berne
299

exchanged in India.

5 Consolidated annual Statement of Post Office 2.43 Director General, Postal 31st August
certificate balances Services (PA Wing)

III. British Postal Orders, etc.

Monthly

1 Statement of B.P.OE paid 5.13 Director of Accounts (Postal) 23rd of the month
Calcutta (G .S. Section) following that to which
the statements relate

2 Statement of Irish Postal Orders paid 7.2 Director of Accounts (Postal) To reach by 28th of the
Nagpur month following the
month of account
 Appendix A- Contd.

1 2 3 4 5 6

IV. Cash Certificates Section

Monthly

1
Statement of remittances to Foreign Postal Note below Foreign Postal Accounts 29th of the month following the
Accounts Offices para 2.32 Officer concerned month of account

Periodical

1 The actual number of transactions separately

under issues and discharges to the end of-
300

To reach by 25th of the month

(i) September
2.72 Head Quarters Office following the month of account
(ii) November
concerned
(iii) January
(iv) February
(v) March

Annual

1 Annual statement of balance at the close of

Director of Accounts After the close of March
the year 2.40
(Postal) Calcutta Accounts

2 Certificates showing that the balances

(amounts of balances to be specified) have 2.45 D.G.P.S. (PA Wing) 31st October
been verified.
 Appendix A- Contd.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Just after the closure
Director of
of March
3 Annual Report of Postal Certificates 2.42 Accounts (Postal)
Supplementary
Calcutta
Accounts.

Statement showing the particulars of unclaimed cash

4 2.68 Postal Directorate 1st Week of April
and other certificates due to destruction.

V. Savings Bank Section

Periodical

The actual number of transactions separately under

301

deposits, withdrawals and transfers to the end of-

To reach by 25th of
September D.G.P.S.(PA the month following
1 8.10(2)
November Wing) the month of
January Accounts.
February
March

Annual

Savings Bank Accounts Transfers (Inland) up to

1 8.10(3) D.G.P.S 10th August
March (Supplementary)

Consolidated statement of Saving Bank transactions

2 8.10(4) Do. 15th August
up to March Supplementary
 Appendix A- Contd.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Statement showing category wise Saving Bank

3 8.10(5) D.G.P.S. 10th August
balances up to March Supplementary

Statistical statement regarding total interest on S.B.

4 Deposits relating to Previous yen adjusted in current 8.10(6) Do. 31 st July
year, after closure of March Supplementary.

Review' of balances statement under S.B., CTD, RD,

5 8.10(7) Do. 31st August
TD etc.
302

6 Statement for cost calculations 8.10(8) Do. 15th June

VI. Money Order Section

Weekly

Foreign Postal Accounts

1 Advice transfer of mis-sorted money orders 3.44 Once in a week
Office Concerned

Intimation of transfer as per outward lists of Foreign Accounts Officer of the

2 Money orders received from exchange offices under 3.144 principal office of
the jurisdiction of Foreign Postal Accounts Offices. exchange
 Appendix A- Contd.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Fortnightly

List and advice of transfer of paid void money Foreign Postal Accounts 1st and 15th of every
1 3.72(5)
orders issued from offices in Foreign Postal Circles Office Concerned month

Advice of transfer of inward Foreign Money Order

Postal Accounts Office
2 relating to the lists received from office of exchange 3.153
concerned
which is not the principal office of Exchange.

Monthly
303

Note 2
Statement of irregularities in the issue of duplicate
1 below para Heads of Circle
Money Orders
3. 62

Before the date fixed

2 Classification of paid void Money orders 3.72(4) Postal Accounts Section for the posting of
classified abstracts

Statement of recoveries and refunds appearing in

Postal Accounts Office 13th of the following
3 cash account in adjustment of money order 3.116
concerned month
discrepancies

Summaries of Money Orders paid on account of

12th & 28th of every
4 issue of Foreign Postal Circles and advices of 3.34 Do.
month
transfer
 Appendix A- Contd.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Indian Office of exchange and

5 Statement of Foreign Inward Void money orders 3.156 Accounts Office of the principal
office of Exchange

Advice of transfer relating to outward lists received

Foreign Postal Accounts Office
6 from offices of exchange which are not office of 3.145
concerned
exchange the principal

Statement of remittances to Foreign Postal Foreign Postal Accounts Office

7 3.120
304

Accounts Office concerned

12th of the fifth

8 Extracts from Money order Ledger 3.94 D.G.P.S. (PA wing) month following
the of issue month

Extract from Trade charge Accounts on account of

9 money orders relating to issues of other Postal 3.168 Foreign Postal Office concerned
Accounts Offices

General Account with Great Britain and Northern

10 3.183 D.G.P.S. 10th of every month
Ireland with a note against the items adjusted
 Appendix A- Contd.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Annual

1 Statement showing number, value and

commission of Inland Money Orders issued and
3.127 D.G.P.S.(PA Wing) 31st August
paid and the number value and commission of
family Allotment Money Orders.

2 Statement showing the number, value etc. of

Foreign outward sterling and rupee Money 3.200(I) Do. Do.
Orders classified according to Circles of issue.
305

3 Statement showing the number and value of

Foreign Money orders paid classified according 3.200(II) Do. Do.
to circle of Payment

4
Statement showing the Money Orders transaction
with each Country or colony dealing with sterling 3.200(III) Do. Do.
Or rupee money order.

5 Statement showing the number, Value in Indian

Currency and commission of outward foreign
3.200(IV) Do. Do.
money orders for each month of the year just
closed.
 Appendix A- Contd.

1 2 3 4 5 6

D.G.P.S.
Statement showing the number and value of Inward
6 3.200(V) (PA Wing) 31st August
Foreign Money Orders for the year.

Do.
Statement showing the number and value of outward
foreign money orders for each country and colony
7 3.200(VI) Do.
classified according to Posta1 Circles in which the Indian
Offices of Exchanges are situated.

8 Do for inward foreign Money orders 3.200(VII) Do. Do.

306

(i) Statement showing separately the amount received and

3..201 Do. Do.
paid in India on account of Money Order transactions
(excluding remittances with several foreign countries
9 which settle their accounts through London) for each year.

(ii) Do showing the figures up to 3.201 March

3..201 Do. 25th April
(supplementary).

Immediately
Statement showing the unexplained difference in the
after the closure
Money Order Accounts as arrived at in the Money Order
10 3.77 Do. of March and
Ledger and the amount credited to the Head Forfeited
March(s)
Money Orders.
Accounts.
 Appendix A- Contd.

1 2 3 4 5 6

VII. Indian Postal Orders

Monthly

Director of 27th of the month following the

Statement showing the total value of Indian
1 4.37 Accounts month to which the statements
Postal Orders paid together with the paid orders.
(Postal) relate

Statement showing the approximate number of End of the month following the
2 Indian Postal Orders sold and their value and 4.39 D.G.P.S. month of account to which the
the final figures relating to the previous month. approximate figures relate.
307

Annual

4.4 Director of
To reach on or before the 10th
1 Indents for supply of Indian Postal Orders Accounts
August.
(Postal), Delhi

4.46
Certificate of annual verification of the stock of
D.G.P.S. (P.A. To reach by the 1st week of April of
2 Indian Postal Orders in each Postal Accounts
Wing) the year following.
Office on the 31st March.

Statement of Indian Postal Orders sold- 4.38 (i) End of June

3 (i) Up to March. Do. (ii) 16thAugust
(ii) Up to March supplementary.
 Appendix A- Contd.

1 2 3 4 5 6

VIII. Customs Duty on Inward Foreign Mail Articles

Monthly

Statements of credits on account of Customs Duty Director of

30th of the month in case of
1 realised on Inward Foreign Parcels and Letter Mail 9.23 Accounts
Foreign Postal Circles
articles by Post Offices in each Postal Circle. (Postal), Nagpur.

1st week of the 2nd month

Advice of Transfer relating to recoveries and
following the month to which
2 refunds appearing in the cash account in 9.73 Do.
the recoveries or refunds
adjustment of Customs Duty discrepancies.
308

relate

7th of the sixth month

D.G.P.S.(PA
3 Extract of the Customs Ledger. 9.84 following the month of
Wing)
assessment
 309

Appendix – B

List of Forms referred to Postal Account Manual Vol. II

Reference
Form no. Description of Forms Remark
to para(s)
1 2 3 4

DG(PA)-200 Register for controlling the imprest

1.3&1.4
and sales and purchases
DG(PA)-201
Imprest Register 1.3&1.5

Register showing daily profit and

DG(PA)-202
loss on purchase and sale of 1.3&1.48
Government promissory Notes

DG(PA)-203A Requisition for sale of Government

1.7
promissory Notes

DG(PA)-207 Register of purchase and sale of

1.11
Govt. Securities

DG(PA)-208 Memo showing distribution of cost

1.11&1.12
of Government securities.
Day Book of Stock Certificates and
DG(PA)-209 Government Securities sent to and
1.9&1.35
received back from Public Debt
Office.
" Memo forwarding Government
DG(PA)-210 1.9,1.25
Promissory Notes and stock
&1.35
Certificates to Public Debt Office

DG(PA)-210A Statement of Interest paid on G.P

1.25&1.35
Notes at Calcutta

DG(PA)-212 Register of sale and purchase Govt.

1.7
securities through R.B.I.

DG(PA)-213 Intimation Memo purchase of G.P.

1.13
Notes

DG(PA)-214 Receipt for Government securities

1.9
held in safe custody.
 310

Appendix B — contd.

Reference to
Form no. Description of Forms Remark
para(s)
1 2 3 4
DG(PA)-215
Acknowledgement Format 1.10

DG(PA)-216 Report on loss of Records 1.9

Letter returning Government security
DG(PA)-218 for re-submission after furnishing 1.9&1.11
necessary information

DG(PA)-219 Objection Memo 1.11

Statement of irregularities noticed in the

DG(PA)-220 1.14
Schedule of payments etc
Regr. of Application for safe custody of
DG(PA)-222 1.9
GS.
DG(PA)-223 Covering letter reg. receipts of G.S.. 1.9
Register of Application of Delivery' of
DG(PA)-224 1.10
G.S
DG(PA)-225 Covering Letter 1.10
DG(PA)-227 Interest Payment Register 1.30

Forwarding letter to the Postmaster

DG(PA)-228 1.25A
enclosing interest payments orders.
Certificate of credit Interest payment
DG(PA)-228(a) 1.25A
order.
DG(PA)-228(b) GS Interest Payment Order 1.25A

DG(PA)-229 Interest Payment Order (Supplemental). 1.26&1.29

Memo to Postmaster calling for advice
DG(PA)-230 1.29
of Interest Payment Order
Reminder to the Postmaster regarding
DG(PA)-230(a) credit of interest to depositors’ Saving 1.29
Bank Accounts
Forwarding letter of Interest Payment
DG(PA)-231 1.25A
orders
Despatch register of Interest Payment
DG(PA)-232 1.29
Orders
Register to watch the return of inti-
DG(PA)-233 mation of interest on Government 1.26
Securities issued by Postmasters
 311

Appendix B — contd.

Form no. Description of Forms Reference to Remark

para(s)
1 2 3 4
DG(PA)-235 Trust Interest Payment Order 1.30

DG(PA)-236 Statement showing payments under 1.30

the head "Trust Interest Accounts”
DG(PA)-237 Intimation of sale of G.P. Notes 1.12&1.13
DG(PA)-238 Statement showing transactions 1.44
connected with the purchase/sale of
Government securities
DG(PA)-241 Register for monthly reconciliation of 1.45
purchases and sales.
DG(PA)-242 Register of Government Promissory 1.10,1.35&
notes received and disposed off 1.37
DG(PA)-243 Intermediate Day Book 1.39
DG(PA)-244 Stock Day Book 1.38
DG(PA)-247 Register showing the number of 1.42
Government Promissory Notes of each
denomination held in stock after each
day's transaction
DG(PA)-248 Government Security Ledger 1.17&1.25A
DG(PA)-249 Transfer Register of Security Holders'
1.19
Accounts.
DG(PA)-251 Ledger Abstracts 1.40
DG(PA)-252 Running Account of Investors 1.20
DG(PA)-253 Statement showing the transactions in 1.49
P.O.S.B. relating to Purchase, sale,
safe custody & Delivery out of
Custody of G.P. Notes.
DG(PA)-255 Requisition slip of cards for the check 1.21
of maximum limits of investment
through the Post Office
DG(PA)-258 Warrants to Pub. A/c Dep’t. of R.B.I. 1.25
DG(PA)-259 Letter to the Postmaster advising 1.33
cancellation of interest on Government
Securities from the Savings Bank
Accounts of deceased depositors
 312

Appendix B — contd.

Form no. Description of Forms Reference to Remark

para(s)
1 2 3 4
DG(PA)-260 Letter to the Postmaster advising the 1.32
sale proceeds, discharge value and
interest etc. of Government Securities
of a deceased holder for payment to
his legal heirs or for
the transfer of Government Securities
to them, together with the amount of
interest to be paid in cash.

DG(PA)-260(a) Letter to the Postmaster directing him 1.32&1.33

to discharge the Government
Securities of a deceased holder to the
recognized claimant
DG(PA)-260(d) Letter to the Postmaster forwarding 1.32
Government Promissory Notes to be
delivered to the legal heirs of a
deceased holder advising at the same
time the amount of interest if due for
cash payment.

DG(PA)-261 Statement showing payments of 1.34

anticipatory interest on war bonds and
Loans and amounts paid to authorised
claimants of deceased Savings Bank
depositors
DG(PA)-263 Certificate to be issued by the Director 1.25A&1.30
of Accounts (Postal), Calcutta to the
holders of Government Securities held
in the custody of the D.G.P.S.

DG(PA)-305 Statement of British Postal Orders paid 7.02

DG(PA)-306 Account current for British Postal 5.17

Orders and Savings Bank Transactions
DG(PA)-310 Letter to the. Controller General, Post 5.12
Office, London, forwarding unclaimed
British Postal Orders.
 313

Appendix B—contd

Form no. Description of forms Reference to Remark

Para(s)
1 2 3 4

Intimation of the issue of International

DG(PA)-315 6.5
Reply Coupons
Monthly statement of International,
Do. -316 6.10
Reply Coupons exchanged.
Do.-319 Register of P.O. Certificate sent out. 2.6(d)
Check slip of wanting Post Office
Do.-319A 2.6(c)
Certificates.
Statement showing the progress of
Do.-320 work done in the Post Office 2.11
certificate section.
Do.-321 Proof of Posting 2.25 &2.27
Statement showing the amount of
Do.-322 certificates issued and discharged 2.13
for verification with cash account.
Stock and issue Register
Do.-323 2.4
Do.-325 Half margin memo of irregularities 2.55
Do.-325A Half margin memo of irregularities 2.55
Reference to Postmaster for erosions,
Do.-325B 2.17
alterations in summaries.
Declaration in lieu of lost, destroyed or
Do.-330 2.51
stolen Post Office certificates.
Declaration to be issued for the
Transfer to another person of a
Do.-330A declaration already issued in lieu of 2.26
lost, destroyed Or stolen Post Office
certificates.
Declaration in lieu of safe custody
Do.-331 2.52
acknowledgements.
Register of spoiled Post Office
Do.-333 2.53
Certificates
Objection statement
Do.-335 2.55
.
Half margin memo calling for wanting
Do.-336 2.55
advice of payment.
 314

Appendix B—contd

Form no. Description of Forms Reference to Remark

para(s)
1 2 3 4
DG(PA)-337 Register of Abstracts of issues and 2.10,2.14,
discharges 2.25,2.28
&2.35
DG(PA)-338 Register of discharges 2.10,2.28
&2.35
DG(PA)-338A Register of unposted issue/discharges. 2.24
(part I) Note 2 of

DG(PA)-338A Abstract of unsold issue etc. 2.24

(part II) Note 2 of

DG(PA)-339 Circle Balance Sheet 2.10,2.27

&2.35
DG(PA)-339A Explanatory slips (Post office savings 2.10,2.27
certificate
DG(PA)-339B Classified Abstract of Post Office 2.27,2.35
certificate discharged
DG(PA)-339D Compilation of Annual verification of 2.45
P.O. Certificates Balances
DG(PA)-339E Broadsheet of proofsheet Balances 2.37

DG(PA)-339F Classification of Discharged 2.37

Certificates
DG(PA)-340 Progress Report of S.B. section 8.5

DG(PA)-358(a) Head Office Control Account 8.07

(S.B.;F.D.)
DG(PA)-358(b) Head Office Control Account 8.07
(CTD;RD;and T.D.)
DG(PA)-358(c) Head Office Control Account (For 8.07
S.B. only)
DG(PA)-361 Statement of Savings Bank 8.10
Transaction in Post Offices
DG(PA)-376D Level Card for arranging in Old 2.70
Records
DG(PA)-400 Half Marginal Memo of Money Orders 3.20&3.98
Irregularities
 315

Appendix B—contd

Form no. Description of Forms Reference to Remark

para(s)
1 2 3 4
DG(PA)-401 Register of amounts debited to 3.19
Defence Department etc, on account
of commission on Money Orders
issued
DG(PA)-401A Register of Items showing the 3.22
adjustment of corresponding
differences between value and
commission on Money orders
DG(PA)-402 Register of Inland and Telegraphs 3.23, 3.86
Money Orders Transactions.
DG(PA)-403 Check slip 3.30(B)&3.129

DG(PA)-403(a) Half Margin Calling for wanting 3.30(B)

Money Orders from Accounts
Offices
DG(PA)-403(b) Register for Money orders relating to 3. 30(B)
Home Circle Issues received as
not charged with Paid Lists
DG(PA)-403(c) -Half Margin references for carrying 3.100
on further correspondence in con-
nection with wanting M.O.s.

DG(PA)-404 Report to Postmaster General 3.30(B)

regarding submission of Memos of
admission of Payment.
DG(PA)-405 Slip showing the number and month 3.29
of issue and payment of Money
orders paid
DG(PA)-406 Distribution Register 3.26

DG(PA)-407 Memo of Money Orders made Over 3.30(c),3.38

to sorting section.

DG(PA)-408 Half Marginal Memo of differences 3.35

in summary
DG(PA)-408A transfers 3.35

DG(PA)-409 Register showing transactions to and 3.34

from Foreign Postal Accounts Offices
 316

Appendix B—contd

Form no. Description of forms Reference to Remark

Para(s)
1 2 3 4
DG(PA)-410 Progress Report of Sorters 3.38

DG(PA)-410A Distribution B.S. of Sorting Group 3.40

DG(PA)-411 Slip 3.41

DG(PA)-412(A to Sorting Broadsheet of Money Orders 3.42 One for

K) paid each
circle
DG(PA)-413 Register of miss-sorted 3.44 ,3.49
/misclassified money orders. &3.59
DG(PA)-413(a) Register of Money orders abstracted 3.51A
for test debit check.,
DG(PA)-414 Register of Money orders transferred 3.56
to Revenue
DG(PA)-415 progress report of Debit checkers 3.135 ,3.57

DG(PA)-415A Register of cases relating to Stop 3.62

Payment order/other irregularities
in the issue- of Duplicate money
orders.
DG(PA)-415(B) Index to the register of cases 3.62
relating to Stop Payment/other irre-
gularities in the issues* of D.M.Os
DG(PA)-416 3.72
Register of classification of void
Money orders
DG(PA)-417 Register of classification of void 3.73
money orders received from Foreign
Postal Accounts Offices
DG(PA)-418 Register of Forfeited Money orders 3.77

DG(PA)-419 Letter pointing out difference In the 3.79

name of payee or remitter in whose
favour the re-issue is asked for
DG(PA)-420 Re-issue slip 3.82

DG(PA)-421 Register of void money orders re- 3.83

issued.
 317

Appendix B—contd

Form no. Description of forms Reference to Remark

Para(s)
1 2 3 4
DG(PA)-422 Letter to the Postmaster enquiring 3.83
the disposal of re-issued Money
order
DG(PA)-423 Statement of unchecked items 3.85&3.139

DG(PA)-424 Statement of Money order issued 3.13,3.87&3.91

DG(PA)-425 Statement of Money orders paid 3.13,3.87&3.91

DG(PA)-426 Statement of payments made by 3.13,3.88&3.91
one Accounts Office on account of
Money orders issued in Foreign
Postal Accounts Offices
DG(PA)428 Statement of actual short or excess 3.90
payment, missorted money orders
etc
DG(PA)-429 Money Order Ledger 3.93

DG(PA)-430 Extract from Money order Ledger 3.94

DG(PA)-431 Money Order Objection 3.99

Statement(blank)
DG(PA)-432 Money Order Objection 3.99
Statement(printed)
DG(PA)-433 Money Order/Post Office 3.105&9.65
Certificate Objection book
DG(PA)-434 Adjustment Register 2.63,3.108&9.67

DG(PA)-435 Closing entry slip for Objection 2.64,3.105&9.67

Book.

DG(PA)-436 Register of refunds and recoveries 2.6&9.73

to be maintained in Postal
Accounts Section
DG(PA)-437 Statement of recoveries and 3.116
refunds forwerded to other
Accounts Offices
2DG(PA)-438 3.120

Statement of Money Order

Remittances
 318

Appendix B—contd

Form no. Description of forms Reference to Remark

Para(s)
1 2 3 4
DG(PA)-439 Statement showing the amount of 3.127
Money orders issued in each
circle during each month of the
year
DG(PA)-439A Statement showing -the amount of 3.127
Money orders paid in each Circle
during each month of the year.

DG(PA)-440 Money orders sent out Register 3.128&9.88

DG(PA)-441 Printed reply in Money orders 3.130

sent out cases.

DG(PA)-442 Progress Report of Issue list and 3.135

paid List Examiners
DG(PA)442A Progress Report of the assistants 3.135
of the Pick out Group
DG(PA)-443 Express Letter 3.62

DG(PA)-443A Permission for Payment 3.62

DG(PA)-444 Junior Accounts Officer's/ 3.139,9.92,2.06&

Sr. Accountant's Diary 2.07
DG(PA)-445 Intimation of transfer of Foreign 3.144
Money Orders
DG(PA)-446 Register of transfers to other 3.144&3.161
Accounts offices of Foreign
outward/Inward sterling and rupee
money orders.
DG(PA)-447 Register of consolidated figures 3.145,3.146A
of Outward Foreign Money &3.161
Orders
DG(PA)-448 Register showing classification & 3.161
Adjustment of outward Foreign
Money Orders.
DG(PA)-449 Register of consolidated figures 3.167&3.172
of C.O.D.Moneyorders for the
month
of.
DG(PA)-450 Register of inward foreign money 3.155
orders repaid to remitters
 319

Appendix B—contd

Form no. Description of forms Reference to Remark

Para(s)
1 2 3 4
DG(PA)-451 Intimation of money orders treated as 3.156&3.158
finally void and memo of advice to
foreign accounts offices regarding
money orders repaid
DG(PA)-452 Extracts of memo of advice to foreign 3.158
Accounts Offices relating
to foreign Money Orders repaid to
remitters
DG(PA)-453 Form of Communication 3.156

DG(PA)-454 Register of undeliverable Money 3.160

Orders Advised
DG(PA)-456 Register of remittance from Foreign 3.181
Countries
DG(PA)457 Register of advance remittances 3.182

DG(PA)-458 Broad sheet of Foreign Money orders 3.204

figures.
DG(PA)-461 Reconciliation register of foreign 3.202
money orders figures with Detail Book
Figures
DG(PA)-464 Statement showing the money order 3.200
transactions with each country or
colony dealing with. sterling or rupee
money orders
DG(PA)-465 Statement showing the number and 3.200
value (in Indian. Currency) and
commission on Outward Foreign.
Money Order for each month
DG(PA)-466 Statement showing the number and 3.200
value (in Indian Currency) on Inward
Foreign Money orders for each month
DG(PA)-467 Statement showing the number and 3.200
value of outward foreign money orders
classified according to the
circles in which the Indian offices of
exchange are situated
 320

Appendix B—contd.

Form no. Description of forms Reference to Remark

Para(s)
1 2 3 4
DG(PA)-468 Statement showing the number and 3.200
value of Inward Foreign Money
Orders
DG(PA)-469 Broadsheet and reconciliation register 3.200
of outward/ inward Trade Charge
M.O. issued by one country for
payment in another.

DG(PA)-470 Register showing the number, amount 3.200

and commission of foreign outward
Money orders advised

DG(PA)-471 Register showing the number and 3.200

value of foreign inward money order
issued
DG(PA)-472 Register showing the transactions with 3.200
foreign countries in respect of repaid
and void money orders

DG(PA)473 Statement showing particulars of 3.168

Trade charge money orders.

DG(PA)-474 List of unpaid items taken from the 3.171

outward and inward list of C.O.D.
Money Orders
DG(PA)-476 Memorandum of recoveries and 29.97
Refunds.

DG(PA)-477 Register of credits & debits under 9.100

Deposits-Customs duty-U. K.

DG(PA)-479 Half margin memo of customs duty 9.10

irregularities.

DG(PA)-480 Stock Register of Indian Postal Orders 4.06&4.08

received/issued.
DG(PA)-483 Statement of Indian Postal orders paid 4.37&4.38

DG(PA)-483A Certificate of (non) payment of Indian 4.24

Postal orders.
 321

Appendix B—contd

Form no. Description of forms Reference to Remark

Para(s)
1 2 3 4
DG(PA)- Check slip for Indian Postal Orders 4.24,4.33&
483B 4.42

DG(PA)-484 Progress report of the Customs Duty 9.32

Accounts Section.

DG(PA)-485 Reply for non-receipt of Parcel receipt & 9.88

Assessment memos.

DG(PA)-487 Memo of inward foreign parcel and 9.28

letter mail articles made over to Sorting
Group
DG(PA)-488 Check slip for a wanting Inward 9.48&9.88
foreign parcel receipt/Assessment
memo.
DG(PA)490 Slip showing (i) the name of the office 9.29
of exchange (ii) month of assessment,
(iii) the number of receipts or memos,
(iv) the month of delivery, and (v)
initials of sorter.

DG(PA)-491 Customs duty objection Memo of Office 9.64&9.68

of Exchange

DG(PA)-492 Customs duty objection memo of the 9.64&9.68

Head Office
DG(PA)-493 Register of unchecked items made out 9.53
from the inward foreign parcel bills, and
letter mail registers etc

DG(PA)-494 Search bills Memo for tracing the 9.54

disposal of inward foreign parcels, etc.
DG(PA)- Correspondence for untraced receipts 9.50
494A and memos

DG(PA)- Correspondence regarding search bills. 9.58

494B
 322

Appendix B—contd

Form no. Description of forms Reference to Remark

Para(s)

1 2 3 4
DG(PA)-495 Statement showing statistics of 4.39B,2.73,
SB,DSB,CTD,CC,etc. 5.2&8.10

DG(PA)-503 Summary of Revenue 4.08

DG(PA)-519 Monthly abstract of transfer entries 1.51

DG(PA)-574 Register of transfer entries 9.74

C-23(white) Statement of IRCS 6.12&6.13

C-24 Coupon delivered by International 6.03

Bureau.

C.C.-31A PO Certificate Voucher list 2.12

C.C.-18 Weekly journals of N.S.C.s issued and 2.12

delivered.

Do. Do.
C.C.-18(s)
C.C.-19 Journals of D.S.C., N.S.C.

C.C.-19(s) Do. Do.

C.C.-29 Weekly journals of discharges of P.O. Do.
Certificates in Safe Custody

C.C.-30 Summaries of N.S.Cs issued 2.12

C.C.-31 Summaries of N.S.Cs discharged 2.12

M.S.O.(T)-5 Review Register 2.09